SF6 Gas Insulated 72.5 kV Switchgear Technical Specs

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SF6 GAS INSULATED 72.5 KV SWITCHGEAR
Section 1 - General ........................................................................................................................... 12
Section 2 - Particular requirements for SF6 Metal clad Equipment .................................................... 13
Section 3 - Particular Requirements for Primary Electrical Equipment .............................................. 17
Section 4 - Particular Requirements for Secondary Equipment ......................................................... 23
Section 5 - Inspection and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 26
66 kV GIS Substation Page - 11

Section 1 : General
1.1 Introduction
This specification provides for the supply and Installation of SF6 gas Insulated switchgear
(SF6 GIS), at one or more of the substation in high voltage transmission and sub transmission
networks operating at 72.5 kV
1.2. Extent of main contract work
The contract works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this
specification and shall include the design, manufacture, supply, testing at woks, transport to
site, erection and testing, commissioning of SF6 GIS and associated equipment, construction
of the switch house, control room and complementary buildings and civil works as detailed In
the specification.
Where specified the H.V. bushings, bus ducts, cable end units, overhead line terminations
and cables shall be included in the tender and form part of the contract works.
1.3 Standards and Ratings
All electrical switchgear and associated equipment shall conform to the relevant IEC
standards and publications of latest issue, first of all IEC 60694 and IEC 60517. The bidders
attention is drawn to the climatic conditions as stipulated in the relevant contract clauses and
HVPN specification.
In particular the switchgear current rating as specified in the schedules corresponds to an

ambient day time mean temperature between -5 deg C and +50 deg C
The switchgear shall be designed for a maximum operating voltage of 72.5 kV and a rated
impulse withstand voltage of 325 kV according to IEC. The design fault rating shall not be less
than 31.5 kA. Circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting line and cable charging currents
of the magnitude Indicated in the data schedules.
The SF6 GIS shall be located In a permanent building which will be ventilated maintained
reasonably dust free.

Section 2 : Particular Requirements for SF6 Metal clad equipment
2.1 Design concept of SF6 GIS
It is understood that each manufacturer has his own particular SF6 GIS design concept and it
is not the purpose of the specification to impose unreasonable restrictions. However, in the
interest of safety, reliability and easy service, the switchgear offered shall meet the following
minimum requirements:
(a) The switching station shall be of modular design and capable of extension in the future by the
addition of extra feeders, bus couplers, busbars, circuit breakers, disconnectors, and other
switchgear components without necessarily dismantling any major parts of the equipment.
(b) Where a double busbar system is specified it shall be possible to extend the switchgear by
adding further feeders with at least one of the busbar systems and the existing feeders
remaining in service continuously. The tenderer is required to demonstrate clearly in his
submitted documents the suitability of the switchgear design in these respects.
(c) Where a double busbar system is specified: In case of any internal arc fault in a busbar,
busbar disconnector or circuit breaker, repair works must be possible without shutting down
the complete substation and at least one busbar and the undisturbed feeders must remain in
operation, In the submitted documents, clear demonstration concerning this requirement shall
be given by the tenderer, i.e. sequence of repair work steps and description of necessary
restrictions during these works.
(d) Where a bus sectionalizer is specified: In case of any internal arc fault in a busbar, busbar
disconnector or sectionalizer, repair work must be possible without shutting down the
complete substation and at least one half of the substation must remain in operation. In the
submitted documents. clear demonstration concerning this requirement shall be given by the
tenderer, i e. sequence of repair work steps and description of necessary restrictions during
these works.
(e) Automatic pressure relief shall be incorporated in the basic design of the enclosures as a
precaution against explosion in the event of an internal arc fault. Pressure relief shall be by
means of bursting discs with deflection devices to ensure that personnel who may be present
will not be endangered.
2.2 Type Tests
Type tests shall be carried out on the metal enclosed switchgear components in accordance
with the relevant standards.
The performance of the components of the switchgear shall be substantiated by test data
relevant to the particular designs offered.
Evidence of type tests shall be submitted with the tender and shall include dielectric tests.
temperature rise tests, short-time current tests and mechanical endurance tests together with
evidence of tests to verify the making and breaking capacity of the included switching devices
and other primary components. To ensure safety of operating personnel type tests under
condition of internal arc must prove suitable design of the equipment to be installed.
2.3 Sectionalization
The switchgear gas enclosures must be sectionalised, with gas tight barriers between
Sections or compartments.
The sections shall be so designed as to minimise the extent of plant rendered inoperative
when gas pressure is reduced, either by excessive leakage or for maintenance purposes. and
to minimise the quantity of gas that has to be evacuated and then recharged before and after

maintaining any item of equipment. The arrangement of gas sections or compartments shall
be such that it is possible to extend existing busbars without having to take out of service
more than one busbar at any time. For limitation of any internal arc to the concerned bay and
to reduce the extent of necessary gas works each busbar must be sectionalised bay by bay.
The electrical connections between the various gas sections shall preferably be made by
means of multiple contact connectors so that electrical connection is automatically achieved
when bolting one section to another. The surface of the connector fingers and conductor
tubes on such connections shall be sliver plated
Each gas compartment must be independent, external gas pipe connections are not
acceptable.
2.4 Support Insulators and Section Barriers
The support insulators and section barriers /insulators shall be manufactured from the highest
quality material. They shall be free from all voids and the design shall be such as to reduce
the electrical stresses in the insulators to a minimum. They shall also be of sufficient strength
to ensure that the conductor spacings and clearances are maintained when short circuit faults
occur.
Tests shall be carried out during the manufacture of the switchgear to ensure that all parts of
the equipment are free of partial discharge with a partial discharge extinction voltage which is
at least 10 % higher than the rated voltage.
Gas section barriers including seals to the conductor and enclosure wall shall be gas-tight
and shall be capable of withstanding the maximum pressure differential that could occur
across the barrier, i.e. with vacuum drawn on the one side of the barrier and on the other side,
at least the maximum gas pressure that can exist under normal operating or maintenance
conditions and in case of internal arc fault with a safety factor > 2.0
2.5 Gas Seals
All gas seals shall be designed to ensure that leakage rates are kept to an absolute minimum
under all normal pressure, temperature, electrical load and fault conditions. All gas seals
located in the flanges of the equipment enclosures shall be of the O-ring type. The material
and method of sealing used and the maximum gas leakage rate that can normally be
tolerated under working conditions shall be stated in the tender.
2.6 SF6 Gas Density and Pressure

The rated pressure of the SF6, insulating gas in the metal clad equipment shall be as low as is
compatible with the requirements for electrical insulation and space limitations to reduce the
effects of leaks and to ensure that there is no chance of the gas liquefying at the lowest
ambient temperature. The initial gas pressure or density at the time of charging the equipment
shall provide a sufficient margin above the minimum allowable operating pressure for the
plant to be safely operated for a reasonably long period before recharging is necessary.
2.7 SF6 Gas Purity

The SF6, switchgear shall be designed for use with SF6 gas complying with the
recommendations of IEC 60376 at the time of the first charging with gas. All SF6 gas supplied
as part of the contract shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60376 as a minimum.
2.8 Gas Monitoring Devices

Gas density or pressure monitoring devices shall be provided for each gas compartment. The
devices shall provide continuous and automatic monitoring of the state of the gas. The
monitoring device shall have two alarm settings. These shall be set so that.

(a) Advanced warning can be given that the gas density pressure is reducing to an unacceptable
level:
(b) After an urgent alarm, operative measures can be taken to immediately isolate the particular
compartment electrically by tripping circuit breakers and opening disconnections.
2.9 SF6 Gas Treatment

Under normal operating conditions it shall not be necessary to treat the insulating SF6, gas
between major overhauls. Self sealing vacuum couplings shall, however, be provided on each
individual equipment module to facilitate cycling and recharging. In all gas compartments
permanent efficient filters and desiccants shall be installed to remove any residual impurities
in the gas and to reduce the moisture content. The filters and desiccants shall be effective for
the duration of time between major overhauls.
Notwithstanding this, the insulators in the circuit breaker shall be made of any epoxy resin
composition that will resist decomposition products in contact with moisture in the circuit
breaker.
External gas pipes between different gas compartments as well as any kind of centralised gas
supply and / or gas control system are not acceptable
2.10 Metal clothing

The metal enclosures for me SF6 gas Insulated equipment modules shall be made from
nonmagnetic material which does not require protective planning, either Internal or external,
aluminium alloy. The tenderer shall state the material used for his particular design AII
enclosures shall be of three phase common enclosure concept.
All flanges shall be directly connected with good metallic contact Insulators or insulating
material between the Ranges shall be avoided in order to get the best electrical connection
between the different enclosure modules
The gas filled enclosures shall conform to me pressure vessel code applied in the country of
manufacturer.
2.11 Expansion Joints and Flexible Connections

If necessary, the number and position of expansion joints or flexible connections are to be
determined by me manufacturer to ensure that the complete installation will not be subject to
any expansion stresses which could lead to distortion or premature failure of any piece of the
SF6 equipment, support structures or foundations.
Expansion joints, flexible connections and adjustable mountings shall be provided to

compensate for reasonable tolerances in the manufacture of associated equipment to which
the SF6 switchgear may be connected and to ensure that unreasonably excessive accuracy
is not required when installing such equipment and constructing the associated foundations or
support structures, eg transformers or the interconnection of isolated sections or switchgear
by means of long SF6 busbar or duct installations
2.12 Finish of interior surface and clearing
The finish or Interior surfaces and Cleaning the metal clad enclosures shall facilitate cleaning
and inspection. Any paints or other coatings that may be used shall be such that they will not
deteriorate when exposed to the SF6 gas and other vapours, arc products, etc., that may be
present in me enclosures. They shall also not contain any substances which could
contaminate me enclosed SF6 gas or affect its insulating properties over a period of time.
The equipment shall be manufactured and assembled at me manufacturer's works under

conditions of the utmost cleanliness.

In general, dusty conditions will exist at all sites in the country of destination, so that,
wherever possible, at least complete feeders should be shipped as transport units.
Before the metal clad enclosed sections are joined together and charged with the SF6 gas
they must be thoroughly cleaned to the manufacturer's satisfaction.
2.13 Supply of SF6 Gas
The contract shall include the supply of all SF6 gas necessary for filling and putting into
commercial operation the complete switchgear installation being supplied.
2.14 Gas Filling and Evacuating Apparatus
All apparatus necessary for filling evacuating, and recycling the SF6 gas into and from the
switchgear equipment shall be supplied by the contractor to enable any maintenance work to
be carried out.
Where any item of the filling and evacuating apparatus is of such a weight that it cannot easily
be carried by maintenance personnel, it shall be provided with facilities for lifting and moving
with the overhead cranes.
The apparatus for filling, evacuating, and recycling all gases to be used shall be provided with
all necessary pipes, couplings, flexible tubes and valves for coupling to the switchgear
equipment.
The gas compartments shall preferably be fitted with permanent vacuum couplings through
which the gas is pumped into or evacuated from the compartments.
Details of the filling and evacuating apparatus that will be supplied, as well as a description of
the filling, evacuating, and recycling procedures, shall be provided at the time of tendering.
For reasons of environmental protection the evacuating apparatus must allow to evacuate ail
gas compartments to a residual pressure of less than 10 mbar. and to store the evacuated
gas with a capacity of gas from 2 bays completely
Rated and filling densities or pressures and filling SF6 mass must be clearly indicated and
labelled at each gas compartment.

Section 3 - Particular Requirements of Primary Electrical Equipment
3.1 Circuit breakers
3.1.1 General
The circuit breaker must be designed In accordance with the latest state of technology due to
their advantageous switching and bricking behaviour CB's of the self-blast auto putter
principle shall be offered
The SF6 metal clad circuit-breakers for the circuits detailed below shall comply which the
following general requirements for circuit-breakers and the latest revisions of the relevant
specifications IEC 62271-100 and others
Circuit breakers shall be equipped with factory assembled, independent spring / electro spring
operation mechanisms.
The total break time from energising Me trip coil at rated control voltage to final arc extinction
shall be as short as possible, but in any cent not greater than 60 ms.
The circuit breaker shall be capable of breaking all currents from zero up to the specified
maximum fault current in accordance with the relevant IEC publications. Official test response
shall be submitted with me tender as evidence that the offered circuit-breaker meets the
specified rating
The breaker are to be restirke free
3.1.2 Auto re closing
A auto-reclosing is required, the circuit breakers shall be capable of tripping and reclosing
according to the specified IEC duty cycle
O-0.3.s-CO-3 min-CO
The operating mechanisms shall have sufficient stored energy for completing an O-CO-duty
cycle with auxiliary power switched off.
3.1.3 Closing devices
All electrically operated closing devices and any mechanism charging motors or deuces shall
be Suitable for operation at any voltage between 110 % and 85 % of the nominal control
voltage measured at the device terminal.
The breaker shall close correctly when an electrical closing pulse of 50 ms duration is applied
to tile closing solenoid.
The total wattage drawn by the closing solenoid at nominal control voltage when closing shall
not exceed 500 W per circuit breaker.
3.1.4 Tripping Devices
All electrical tripping devices shall be suitable for operation at any voltage between 110% and
85 % of the nominal voltage, measured at the device terminals.
The tripping devices of a circuit -breaker, when the circuit breaker is not carrying current, shall
be capable of operating satisfactorily down to 50 % of the normal control voltage, measured
at the device terminals.

The total wattage drawn by the opening solenoid at nominal control voltage when tipping shall
not exceed 500W per circuit breaker
Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with two trip tolls systems per mechanism. The one rip
system snail be electrically separate from the other the system
An emergency hand tripping (mechanical) device shall be provided in the operating

mechanism
3.1.5 Anti pumping
All circuit-breaker mechanisms shall be provided with means to prevent pumping while the
closing circuit remains energised, should the circuit breaker either fail to latch, or be tripped
during closing due to the operation of me protective relays
3.1.6 Operating Mechanisms
Spring /electro spring mechanisms shall be complete with all control equipment and me only
external requirement for operation shall be electrical supply
Operating oil pressure shall be maintained automatically and a high reliable device shall be
provided to give indication of the available operating energy
Low oil pressure snail be detected by some suitable method and dependent on the pressure
to the oil, shall inmate one or more of me following operations:
(a) Start pump motor,

(b) Block auto-reclosing If pressure is insufficient to complete a break-make break operation
(c) Block closing pressure is insufficient to complete a make-break operation
(d) Block tripping if pressure is insufficient to complete a break operation.
Circuit breaker having Independent operating mechanisms on each phase shall block sipping,
closing and auto closing of all phases if the operating oil pressure Is low In one or more of the
mechanisms
Means shall be provided for detecting loss of nitrogen (or other accumulator gas) from the
main accumulators) and, In the event of excessive loss all hydraulic operation of the Circuit-
Breaker shall be blocked. An alarm contact shall be provided to indicate this condition
In any case hydraulic systems not using accumulator gas for energy storage will be preferred.
Manual charging or me operating mechanism(s) shall be possible in the event of failure of the
motor drive
3.1.7 Auxiliary Switches
The minimum number of normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts on each
circuit-breaker auxiliary switch, additional to those required for control and interlocking, shall
be as specified.
The flitting of additional auxiliary relays to achieve the number of auxiliary contacts required
will not be acceptable
3.1.8 Indicating Devices
Devices shall be provided to clearly indicate whether a circuit-breaker is open or closed.
Each circuit breaker shall be provided with an operation counter per mechanism to record the
number of tripping operations performed.

3.1.9 Testing Facilities
Facilities shall be provided with the switchgear to enable timing tests to be carried out after all
switchgear has been charged with SF6 gas. The facilities shall be such that it is not
necessary to open up any gas section to make test connections to the circuit-breaker primary
terminals.
All details of the test facilities to be provided with the switchgear shall be submitted with the
tender.
3.2 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches
3.2.1 General
The SF6 metal clad disconnectors and earthing switches shall comply with the following
general requirements of disconnectors and earthing switches and the latest revision of the
relevant IEC publications.
All disconnectors and earthing switches shall be provided with motor-driven or motor charged
mechanisms as applicable. They shall also have facilities for manual operation and the
necessary operating handles shall be provided.
Where specified, the busbar and line earthing switches shall be fully insulated and connected
to earth by a removable bolted link in order that the earthing switch may be used for various
test purposes. The insulation shall be capable of withstanding an applied power frequency
voltage of 2 kV. In addition they must have fault making capacity and must be capable to
switch capacitive currents not less than 5 A at 30 kV and inductive currents not less than 50 A
at 3 kV. The continuous current carrying capacity at least should be suitable r6r rated busbar
current and 15 min.
All main contacts, male and female, shall ether be silver plated or shall have silver Inserts
3.2.2 Operating Mechanisms
Mechanisms shall be arranged either mechanically or electrically so that all three phases of
any particular disconnect or earthing switch operate simultaneously.
(a) Hand operation
Handles or levers shall be provided, together with all necessary operating rods and rod
guides. The mechanisms shall be arranged for locking in the open or closed position.
(b) Spring operation
Spring-operated mechanisms shall also be suitable for hand operation. The mechanisms shall
be arranged for locking.
The mechanism of fault making earthing switches shall be equipped with a motor suitable for
operation from the auxiliary supply specified, and a set of springs so arranged that energising
of the motors will cause the springs to be charged and then released.
The springs in turn shall close the earthing switch. Spring charging motors shall be suitable
for operation at any voltage between 85 % and 110 % of the voltage specified, measured at
the motor terminals.
(c) Electric motor operation
Electric motor-operated mechanisms shall also be suitable for hand operation independent of
the power supply Facilities shall be provided for locking the mechanism in each position

For disconnects and earthing switches having three mechanisms {I e one per phase) it shall
be possible to electrically interlock all three phases to ensure that all three phases open or
close If any one phase Is to be electrically operated either by remote or local means
3.2.4 Auxiliary Switches
Spare auxiliary switches shall be provided with the disconnectors and earthing switches as
specified. The number of auxiliary\ switches specified shall be in addition to any switches
required for interlocking and any other control schemes being supplied as part of this contract
3.3 Current transformer
3.3.1 General
The current transformer shall be supplied in accordance with the following general
requirements and the latest revision of the relevant IEC publications
Only current transformers with SF6 high voltage insulation will be accepted
3.3.2 Position of Current Transformers and Cores, Ratios and Characteristics
The number, rating, ratio, accuracy class, etc for the individual current transformer secondary
cores shall be as specified
Where multi ratio current transformer are required the various ratios shall be obtained by
changing the effective number of turns on the secondary winging
3.3.3 Rating and diagram plates
Rating and diagram plates shall be provided. The information to be supplied on each plate
shall be as specified in the relevant IEC specifications which shall be given for the tapping for
which the rated performance is specified and for each transformer core.
3.3.4 Secondary Thermals and earthing
The beginning and end of each secondary winding and all secondary taps shall be wired to
Suitable terminals accommodated In a terminal box mounted directly on the current
transformer section of the SF6 switchgear.
All terminals shall be stamped or otherwise marked to correspond with the marking on the
diagram plate. Provision shall be made forearming of the secondary windings
3.4 Voltage transformers
3.4.1 General
The voltage transformers shall be supplied In accordance with the following general
requirements and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC specifications.
Voltage transformer must be of the electromagnetic type, and with SF6 gas insulation.
3.4.2 Ratio and Characteristics
The rating, ratio, accuracy class, connection, etc for the voltage transformers shall be as
specified.

3.4.3 Rating and Diagram Plates
Rating and diagram plates shall be provided complying with the requirements of the IEC
standards
3.4.4 Secondary terminals, earthing and fuses
The beginning and end of each secondary winding and all secondary taps shall be wired to
suitable terminals accommodated in a terminal box mounted directly on the voltage
transformer section of the SF6 switchgear.
All terminals shall be stamped or otherwise marked to correspond with the marking on the
diagram plate. Provision shall be made for earthing of the secondary windings inside the
terminal box.
3.5 Bushings
3.5.1 General
Outdoor bushings, for the connection of conventional external conductors to the SF6 metal
clad switchgear, shall be provided where specified.
Bushings shall generally be in accordance with the requirements of IEC
Where specified, the SF6 switchgear shall be connected via SF6 insulated during directly to
transformers and reactor. The basic bushings will be supplied by the transformer or reactor
contractor as part of his contract
The clamps or contact for connecting the switchgear conductor to the transformer or reactor
bushing and the metal clad enclosure coupling onto the bushing flange shall be manufactured
as part of this contract. The dimensional and clearance requirements for the metal clad
enclosure will be in the responsibility of the bushing designer I manufacturer in order that the
design of the enclosure may be completed. The switchgear manufacturer shall in turn provide
the bushing designer / manufacturer with the necessary design details for the bushing flange
to ensure that a suitable gastight connection for the metal clad enclosure can be obtained.
The switchgear contractor shall negotiate and collaborate directly with the transformer and
reactor manufacturers when designing the above items of equipment. The names of the
transformer and reactor manufacturers will be advised after the placing of the contract.
3.5.2 Insulation Levels and creepage Distances
All bushings shall have an impulse and power frequency withstand level that is higher than or
equal to the level specified. The levels are applicable to normal sea level atmospheric
conditions.
The creepage distance over the external surface of outdoor bushings shall not be less than
specified
3.5.3 Bushing Types and Fittings
Only bushings being SF6 Insulated will be accepted: conventional condenser type will be
rejected. Due to the better mechanical and electrical behaviour a composite silicon bushing
will be preferred to a porcelain type. Bushing arc gaps are not required.
The terminals on the outdoor bushings shall be solid circular stem with, the dimensions
specified. Stems shall be either copper or aluminium and the copper-steam shall be electro-
tinned. The clamps for connecting the outdoor conductor(s) to the stem will be provided by
the Authority.

3.5.4 Mechanical Forces on Bushing Terminals
Outdoor bushings must be capable of withstanding a cantilever force applied to the terminal
of at least 5000 N.
3.6 H.V. Power Cable circuit
3.6.1 General
The following requirements are applicable to the switchgear equipment where the H V power
Cables are terminated directly in the SF6 metal clad switchgear using cable sealing ends
designed for use in SF6 gas
The H.V. power cables will be supplied and laid by the contractor, the type and size of cable
should be as specified. The final connection of the H.V. cable circuits in the switch house will
be by means of individual single-phase cables, with one cable per phase.
All cable end modules shall be suitable for connecting single core XLPE cables for 72.5 kV
maximum continuous voltage and a core cross section of 1000 rnm2. Bidders are requester to
offer pluggable cable sealing termination, consisting of a gastight socket insulator and a
completely dry, prefabricated cable plug connector. The design of the cable termination shall
allow plugging and unplugging the H.V. cable without need of opening the GIS and without
any gas work. Exact details of the type and size of cable to be connected is given in bill of
material. Where the H.V. power cable does not form pan of the switchgear, the tenderer shall
include in his Offer the epoxy resin cone for fitting into the Cable end unit.
3.6.2 Cable Test Facilities
The cable end unit design shall include a facility for H.V. DC. testing of the connected power
cable on site. The tenderer shall explain the method proposed. Where line disconnectors are
provided, only the disconnector shall be opened during cable tests. Removable bolted links or
similar connections will be accepted only in case of transformer feeders without line
disconnectors. The design of the link and connections shall ensure that when removed the
resulting gap can withstand the impulse and power frequency test voltages applicable to the
switchgear and the cable H.V. DC. test voltage, for a period of 15 minutes, when the chamber
is filled to the minimum rated working SF6 gas density or pressure
3.7 Test Facilities for Switchgear Testing
After erection the complete switchgear shall be H.V power frequency tested with a voltage
level which is at least 80 % of the rated insulation level
The supplier is requested to provide all necessary test facilities and equipment, i.e. test
bushing, test adapter, test transformer or resonant test set etc.

Section 4 -Secondary Electrical Equipment
4.1 Electrical protection
Due to me high importance of the GIS a fast and selectively operating protection scheme is
required it shall be in accordance with approved international standards as IEC
The protective relays shall be mounted in separate protection cubicles and will be located in a
control or protection room in the vicinity of the GIS room. Two tripping schemes are to be
provided, each tripping scheme being connected to one of the two circuit-breaker trip coils.
The tripping schemes are individually fused and will be initiated by the main and if existing by
the back-up protection. The closing and auto-reclosing scheme shall be electrically separate
from the tripping scheme.
4.1.1 Busbar Protection
The CTs shall be specified according to IEC class 5 P 10 or 5 P 20
As an additional option an automatic resting facility shall be provided if required. For later
extension of the GIS with circuit breaker, disconnectors or complete feeders, the busbar
protection shall be pre wired, so that major modifications in existing control and protection
cubicles are not necessary. It shall be possible just by inserting new units to modify the
protection system for operation with the new equipment
4 1.2 Overhead line protection
Overhead lines shall be protected by four zone switched or non switched distance relays. The
starling elements shall have mho, offset mho or lens charlatanistic with an auxiliary unit for
heavy loaded lines if required. The measuring elements may have circular or quadrilateral
characteristic
For high resistive earth faults an optional unit shall be available.
If PLC links are provided by the authority the distance relays shall be provided with optional
units for the various PLC-schemes such as permissive over-and under each, zone
acceleration or blocking scheme.
Power swing blocking and auto-reclose units shall be provided if required. Backup protection
shall be realised by a second distance relay or (directional) overcurrent and earth fault relays.
4.1 3 Transformer Protection
Power transformer shall be protected (additionally to the standard e.g. Buchholz, oil
temperature) by biased differential relays with interposing current transformers. Over current
and earth fault relays are to be provided as backup protection on the high voltage and low
voltage side.
4.1.4 Cable Feeder Protection
Cable feeders may be protected either by pilot wire differential relays or distance relays.
Over current and earth fault relays are to be provided as backup protections
4.1.5 Current Transformer Requirements
Current transformer for protection systems are class 5 P 10 or 5 P 20 according IEC. The
secondary current is 1 A
The rating of the current transformer will be calculated in case of order under consideration of
actual short circuit power, secondary wiring (length, cross-section) and relay burden.

This ensures correct operation of ail protection schemes even under worst short circuit
conditions
If multi ratio CT are used, the calculation must be done at the actual tapping and only this
tapping will be wired to the marshalling kiosk it shall not necessary to wire all tappings to
separate terminal blocks
4.1.6 Test Facilities
All protective relays shall be equipped with test blocks or similar if no other test facilities (such
as automatic testing units) are provided.
Suitable testing equipment (current injection sets, timers, meters etc.) shall be offered
optionally.
4.1.7 Protection Scheme Layout
The final layout of the protection scheme shall be approved by the Authority.
4.2 Local Control I Marshalling Kiosks
A local control and marshalling kiosk shall be provided with each primary circuit.
Each kiosk shall contain the local control and indication devices for the associated SF, circuit-
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches and the DC. protection fuses, links and
supervisory relays specified. The kiosk shall also be a marshalling or junction point for all
protection, control, alarm, indication and DC. power supply circuits from the associated SF,
circuit-breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches and gas monitoring, alarm and protection
system. All cables being provided by the Authority will be terminated in the marshalling
kiosks.
For the above facilities the local control I marshalling kiosk shall generally be provided with
the following features:
(a) A mimic diagram, on or adjacent to which shall be mounted the indicating switches and local
off remote switches.
(b) Any interposing relays associated with the circuit-breaker, disconnector etc. control switches.
(c) The alarm and indication equipment specified
(d) Fuses and links These shall be mounted in the interior of the local control i marshalling kiosk
(e) Cable terminal blocks for terminating and marshalling auxiliary supply cables, control.
indication and alarm circuit cables from the switchgear and the remote control room.
The kiosks shall be located on the switch house floor. A general arrangement drawing of the
kiosk showing the position of all important features and the mounting position shall be
submitted at the tendering Stage. ,
All cable connections between control cubicle and circuit-breakers, disconnectors and
earthing switches shall be by prefabricated multi core cables with multi-point plug-in
connections on both ends.
The local control and marshalling kiosk will be installed indoors but care must be taken with
the design to ensure that all kiosks are dip and splash proof. The kiosks shall also be dust
and vermin proof.

4.3 AC Supplies and Circuits
410 V, 3 phase, 4-wire AC supplies will be derived from an AC distribution panel to be

provided by the Authority in the switch house.
The normal maximum and minimum voltages that will occur in the supply are as specified. All
equipment supplied shall be capable of running continuously or switching the AC current
within the range of the normal maximum and minimum voltages specified.
4.4 DC Supplies and Circuits
DC supplies as specified will be provided by the Authority for all control. protection,
interlocking, alarm, indication and power supply circuits. The normal maximum and minimum
voltage levels that will occur on the supply are specified.
Each control and protection panel to be provided by the Authority will have its own separately
fused supply from the substation DC distribution board.
At least one single fused outlet from the substation DC distribution board will be provided for
each local control and marshalling kiosk.
The design of all circuits must be such that separately fused or sub fused circuits are always
kept electrically separate

Section 5 Inspection and maintenance
5.1 General
Due to the fact that the operational integrity of the fully metal clad SF6 insulated switchgear is
hot subject to external influences, such as pollution, moisture, dust, etc. the switchgear should
be practically maintenance-free.
Visual inspection of switchgear and control gear shall be required not below 2 years intervals.
Inspection should be made not often than every 10 years. During inspection it must be not
necessary to open the switchgear enclosures, thus avoiding interruption of substation
operations. inspection involves as maximum checking the SF6 gas densities or pressures.
checking of hydraulic fluids and lubrication of the moving components in the operating
mechanisms outside of the enclosure. Functional testing of the close and trip coils, auxiliary
switches, pressure and control switches etc. should also be made.
As minimum the following maintenance period can be accepted:
Circuit breaker 5000 closing and opening or 20 interruptions

at max current
Disconnectors: 5000 closing and opening operations
Fast acting earthing switch 2000 closing and opening operations or 2

making operations onto max. rated fault
current.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
16/20 MVA.66/11 KV POWER TRANSFORMER
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacturer assembly testing at manufacturers Works
before dispatch, supply and delivery FOR destination as per schedule of requirement
(annexure-B) of 16/20 MVA 66/1 kV power transformers.
2.0 STANDARDS
The transformers shall comply in all respect the requirement laid down in the latest editions of
IS 2026, IS : 3639, IS : 2099, IS : 3347, IS : 6600 except where specified otherwise of implied
herein.
3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The transformers are required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:
3.1 Max. Temperature 50 Deg C.

3.2 Min. temperature -2.5 Deg C
3.3 Max relative humidity 100%
3.4 Min. relative humidity 20 %
3.5 Average number or rainy days per annum Nearly 120 days
3.6 Average annual rain fall 900 mm
3.7 Average number of dust storm days per annum 35
3.8 Isoceraunic level 45
3.9 Max. wind pressure 195 kg./sq mt.
3.10 Altitude above mean sea level less than 1000 mt.
4.0 TYPE AND RATING
4.1 The transformer shall be of two winding, 3-phase oil immerse core type with ONAN/ONAF
cooling suitable for outdoor service as step down transformer. These transformers shall not
be provided with the tertiary delta winding.
4.2 The rating and other characteristics, which are not covered elsewhere, shall be as detailed in
following clause.
4.2.1 Max Continuous capacity

a) ONAN 16 MVA
b) ONAF 20 MVA
4.2.2 Number of phases 3
4.2.3 Frequency 50 Hz (3%)
4.2.4 Rated voltage

a) HV side 66 kV
b) LV side 11 Kv
4.2.5 Connections
a) Primary Star
b) Secondary Star
4.2.6 Vector group YYO
4.2.7 % age impedance 10%

4.2.8 No. load taps on HV side +5 to 15% in steps of 1.25%
each
4.2.9 (a) Insulation level 66 kV 11 kV
i) Impulse withstand test voltage 325 kV (P) 75 kV (P)

ii) Power frequency withstand test voltage 140 kV(rms) 28 kV (rms)
(b) Insulation level of bushings
i) Impulse voltage 325 kV 75 kV

ii) Power frequency voltage 140 kV (rms) 28 kV(rms)
4.2.10 Creepage
a) Total 25 mm per kV corresponding to

highest system voltage.
b) Protected 50% of the total creepage

distance.
5.0 GENERAL DESIGN OF TRANSFORMER
5.1 The transformer and accessories shall be so designed as to facilitate inspection, Cleaning
and repairs. The requirement of Indian Electricity Rules shall be kept in view.
5.2 The design shall ensure satisfactory operation under severe working conditions due to
fluctuating load of steel furnaces and voltage variations in the system including those due to
short circuits. The transformers shall be designed as to minimize the risk of accidental short
circuits caused by animals birds or vermin.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all
those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment keeping in view the
requirements of Indian Electricity Rules.
5.3 All material used shall be of the best quality and of class most suitable for working under
specified conditions and shall withstand the atmospheric conditions and temperature
variations without undue deterioration or distortion or setting up of undue stress in any part
thereof.
5.4 Cast iron shall not be used for any parts other than the large valve bodies.
5.5 Corresponding parts liable to replace shall be interchangeable.
5.6 All taper pins to be used in the mechanism shall be split type as per latest edition of IS :
2393
5.7 All mechanism should be rust and corrosion proof. Means shall be provided for lubrication of
moving parts not immersed in oil.
5.8 The construction shall be such as to avoid air or water pockets. Special care shall be
exercised to reduce noise and vibration to the minimum level.
5.9 Steel bolts of suitable finish will be used for diameters above 6-mm. Brass bolts or studs used
for electrical connections shall not be of less than 6 mm dia. On outdoor equipment, all bolts
nuts and washers in contact with current carrying non-ferrous parts shall be phosphor bronze.

5.10 All nuts, bolts and pins shall be locked except those, which are external to the transformer. If
bolts and nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, the
supplier shall provide suitable special spanners.
5.11 Labels shall be provided for all apparatus like relays. Switches fuses etc. housed in any
cubicle or marshalling kiosks. These shall be of in corrodible material with matt/satin finish
and permanent lettering. Labels mounted on black surface shall have white letters and
dangers notices shall have red lettering on a white background. The labels shall be secured
by means of brass screws or rust protected steel screws.
5.12 Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.
5.13 Before painting all ungalvanised parts shall be cleaned made free from rust, scale and grease
and external rough surfaces smoothened filled with metal deposition. The interior oil the tank
and other oil filled chambers shall be cleaned by shot blasting or any other suitable method.
5.14 All external surface surfaces shall be given three coats for paints except for nuts. Bolts and
washers which may be given one coat after erection. The final coat shall be a glossy oil and
weather proof, non-fading paint of shade 631 of IS : 5
5.15 The interior of mechanism chambers of kiosks shall be given 3 coats of paint. The final coat
being of a light colored anti-condensation mixture.
5.16 LOCKING OF OUTER RADIAL SPACERS

The outer most radial spacers of the winding shall be locked in position by means of vertical
strips so that the same can not fall/ not displaced.
5.17 TIGHTENING OF THE NUTS OF THE COIL CLAMPING BOLTS

The manufacturers must ensure the proper and complete tightening of the nuts of the coil
clamping bolts. The tightening of the nuts to the designed value and that the nuts of all the
coils clamping bolts are tightened to same extent should be carried out with torque spanners.
The devices used for locking the nuts of coil clamping bolts must be of such a quality and
such care should be taken first in tightening the nuts and next in locking them in position that
the arrangement does not work loose due to vibrations caused by short circuits and
fluctuating loads etc.
5.18 The noise level shall not be more than 5 db above NEMA standard publication TR : 1
5.19 The transformers shall be designed to have short circuit rating of two seconds as per IS : 2026
6.0 INSULTING OIL
6.1 The transformer and associated oil filled equipment shall be supplied with the first filling of oil
plus 10% extra oil. The oil shall conform to IS L 335/93 in all respect. Special care shall be
taken in the design of transformer to reduce the risk of acidity development in oil.
7.0 TEMPERATURE RISE
7.1 Each transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its normal rating without
exceeding the following temperature rise over a maximum ambient air temperature of 50o C
Type of cooling Top oil temperature rise Winding temperature rise

measured by thermometer measured by resistance
method.
ONAN/ONAF 50o C 55o C

7.2 The temperature of cores metallic part and adjacent material shall in no case reaches value
that will demand the core itself, other parts on adjacent material.
7.3 The loading of the transformer shall be done as per IS 66001972 and the provision of IS
6600 in this respect shall be taken care of.
8.0 IMPEDANCE
The transformer shall have 20 MVA base as per IS L 2026 (1983)
9.0 FREQUENCY
9.1 The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a 3% frequency variation
from a normal of 50 Hz without exceeding the temperature rise as specified in clause 1.7
above.
10.0 FLUX DENSITY
10.1 The primary voltage variation which may effect the flux density at every tap shall be kept in
view while designing the transformer.
10.2 The transformer should be so designed that the working flux density should not exceed
(16000 lines per sq cm) at normal voltage, frequency for N-1, N-5 or high B grade CRGO
steel. Tenders with higher flux density than specified shall not be considered.
The tenders should indicate the maximum flux density allowable continuously as well as for
time interval of one minute and five seconds and the limit of flux density at which core
material used by them saturates. The name of core material must be mentioned in the tender.
The successful tenderer shall be required to furnish magnetisation curves of the core material
design calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit by the purchaser for being
satisfied that flux density is as desired.
Note : The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the core due to
temporary over voltage of the orders of 25 %for one minute and 40 % for five seconds that
may appear in abnormal conditions such as due to following sudden loss of large loads.
11.0 SUPPRESSION OF HARMONIC
Conforming to relevant standards
12.0 CORE
12.1 The core shall be constructed from high grade cold rolled steel lamination with oxide silicate
as insulation.
12.2 The design shall be such as to avoid static discharge short circuit paths within itself or to
cathode clamping the devices and production of flux components at right angles to the plane
of the lamination which may cause local heat inn.
12.3 Adequate oil ducts shall be provided in the core for cooling. Tinned copper strip bridging
pieces shall be used for maintaining electrical continuity wherever the magnetic circuit is
provided into pockets by such ducts or insulation material thicker than 0.25 mm
12.4 There should be no movement of the core relative to the tank during transport as well as due
to sudden jerks caused by short circuits and fluctuating loads.
12.5 Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable core and winding to be lifted.

12.6 The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plate shall be such as to
withstand a voltage of 2000 volts AC for one minute
13.0 WINDING
13.1 The 66 kV winding shall have graded insulation whereas all other windings shall be full,
insulated and the neutral points shall be insulated as amended in IS : 2026
13.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular tapping at the
rated kVA when the voltage may vary by +10% of the voltage corresponding to the tapping.
13.3 The windings and connections insulations material shall not soften, ooze out, shrink or
collapse during service.
13.4 No string conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding 6 times its thickness. The
conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize eddy currents and equalize
the current and temperature distribution alongwith the windings.
13.5 The windings and connections shall be properly braced to withstand shocks during
transportation or transient conditions during service.
13.6 The adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board material
having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by the
manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to frequent
short circuits on the transformers.
13.7 All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the construction
of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated with hot oil.
In addition to this, the drying process to sufficiently extended for proper stabilization of the
coil assembly. More than one cycle of soaking in oil followed by re-tightening of the coil
assembly should be adopted.
13.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall be preferably be of flat insulated steel lamination
Axially laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used.
13.9 The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers of the
transformer winding built of section of disk coil separated by spacers.
13.10 Use Of Radial Spacer Blocks Of Proper Quality & Dimensions
The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material that will not
soften out while in contact with oil or tray out into fibres at edges. The slots should be so
dimensioned that the locking will not come out of the slots.
Uniform distribution of coil clamping force shall be designed by using an adequately large
number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping force from camping bolts to the
clamping plates through intermediate members which can spread the clamping force even a
large area without joint shall be used.
13.11 Type Of Joints
The joint shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and load
fluctuations.
14.0 INTERNAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENT
14.1 All metal parts of the transformer excepting individual core lamination, core bolts and
individual clamping places shall be maintained at the fixed potential

14.2 The earthing connections shall have a minimum area of cross-section of 0.8 sq cm excepting
connection inserted between the laminations and in close terminal connection with them,
which may have area of cross section of 0.2-sq cm.
14.3 The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper strip.
One or more of the following methods shall earth the bottom clamping structure.
a) By connection through vertical tie-rods to the top structure
b) By direct metal to metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of the core and
windings
c) By a connection to the tip structure on the same side of the cores as the main earth
connection to the tank.
14.4 The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to clamping structure by a link connection from the top
yoke near the bridging pieces referred to the clause: 12.3 in the side of main earth. An
inspection hatch shall be provided over the link in the tank cover.
14.5 For the individual insulated section of the magnetic circuit separate link shall be provided. The
bridging construction as per clause:12.3 shall not be taken as being of sectional construction.
15.0 TANK CONSTRUCTION
15.1.1 The tank shall be fabricated of a suitable grade steel and strong enough to allow the lifting of
complete transformer with oil by means of the crane or jacks and transported to site without
over straining the joints etc.
15.1.2 The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 100.64 kN/m2 (760 mm of
Hg)
15.1.3 The base shall be so designed as to allow the transformer to be moved by skidding without
any means
15.1.4 All channelled constructions and stiffeners shall be designed to avoid retention of water.
15.1.5 The construction shall be free of the pockets where such pockets cannot be avoided vent
pipes of 15 mm internal diameter shall be provided to vent gases into the main expansion
pipes. In case of short branch pipes, however minimum diameter may be taken as 6 mm
15.1.6 All joints other than those that may have to be broken shall be welded.
15.1.7 Suitable lifting lugs for lifting the transformers filled with oil shall be provided on the tank.
15.1.8 Four jacking pads shall be provided to enable the transformers complete with oil to be lifted or
lowered by crane on jacks.. The lugs shall be fitted at a minimum height (excluding under
base if detachable) of 300 mm for transformer up to 10 tons weight and of 500 mm
transformer above 10 tons weight.
15.1.9 The transformer shall be provided with detachable steel flanged wheels suitable for moving
transformer complete with oil these shall be bidirectional and mounted on swivels which may
be turned through 90 deg when the tank is jacked up and capable of being locked in the
position parallel to and at right angle to the longitudinal axis. The wheel be suitable for
standard gauge track of 1676 mm

15.2 TANK COVER
15.2.1 The tank cover shall be bolted and of adequate strength when lifted cover shall be provided
with lifting arrangement. access to the bushings, winding connections or testing the earth
connections. The weight of each inspection cover shall not exceed 25 kg.
15.3 CONSERVATOR TANK OIL GAUGE AND BREATHER
15.3.1 An adequate conservator tank complete with sump and drain valves shall be provided in
such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connection to the transformer.
15.3.2 If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator. This extension shall
be at least 25 mm.
15.3.3 One end of the conservator shall be bolted type to facilitate cleaning.
15.3.4 The conservator shall be provided with a magnetic oil level gauge.
15.3.5 The oil connections from the transformer tank to the conservator shall be at rising angle of 3
to 9 degrees to the horizontal upto Buchholz relay. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be 80
mm. Suitable valve shall be provided on both sides of the buchholz relay to cut off oil supply
to it. Whenever required to attend the buchholz relay.
15.3.6 The conservator shall be provided with oil preservation system which should be suitable
either to remove moisture continuously from air entering into the air space with which they are
connected or may not allow direct contact of atmospheric air with oil during operation, in
addition to silica gel breather.
15.4 VALVES
15.4.1 The transformers shall be provided with a filter valve of 50 mm size mounted on top of the
main tank for oil circulation and one drain valve of 80 mm size with plug. The conservator
shall have drain plug of 25 mm size.
15.4.2 Sampling devices shall be provided at the bottom and top of tank but not in the filler valve.
15.4.3 One all release plug of 15 mm shall be provided.
15.4.4 Plugs shall be supplied for all valves opening to atmosphere.
15.4.5 All valves shall comply with the latest edition of IS ; 3839.
15.5 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
A suitable pressure relief valve with the contacts shall be provides in the main tank for rapid
release of any pressure in transformer, which may endanger the equipment. The valve shall
operate at static pressure of less than hydraulic test pressure for transformer tank. If the valve
is mounted on tank cover it shall be fitted with a skirt protecting 25 mm inside the tank and of
such construction as to avoid as accumulation.
15.6 EARTHING TERMINALS

Two earthing terminals capable of carrying full low voltage short circuit current of this
transformer for 4 second shall be provided at the bottom corner of the tank.
15.7 JOINTS AND GASKETS
All gaskets used for making tight joints shall be of granulated cork bonded with synthetic
rubber. Metals tops shall be provided for preventing over compression wherever compressible
gaskets are provided.

15.8 RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES
15.8.1 Each transformer shall carry a diagram plate showing internal connections. Voltage vector
relationship of different windings, plan view of the transformer showing physical relationship of
the terminals, no load voltage and corresponding current on each tap.
15.8.2 Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plates and diagram as specified in IS :
2020 in its appropriate clauses.
15.8.3 I.R value alongwith temperature at the time of testing shall be indicated on rating plate or
separate plate to be provided on transformer.
16.0 COOLING PLANT
16.1 Detachable radiators shall be fitted on the main tank with machined flanged outlet and inlet.
Each radiator shall be provided with 19 mm drain plug at bottom and 19 mm air release plug
at the top valves shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to radiators.
16.2 In case separate cooler bank are used and these shall be suitable for mounting on a flat
concrete base. These shall be provided with a valve (25 mm) at each point of connection to
the transformer tank. Removable blanking plates to blank off main oil connections to each
cooler. Thermometer pockets with captive screwed cap at inlet and outlet of each separate
cooler fitted with valve at top and bottom and air release plug of 15 mm.
16.3 The motor blower shall be direct drawing and suitable for continuous outdoor operation and
complete with necessary air ducting. These are mounted independently from the radiator and
in the case. These are radiator mounting type, use shall be made of some antivibration
means. Care shall betaken that the blower unit is capable of being removed without disturbing
the radiator structure. The blades shall be suitably painted, shall not be of hollow sections.
Suitably painted wire mesh guards with mesh not greater than 25 mm shall be provided to
probable accidental contact with the blades.
16.4 MOTORS
16.4.1 The motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed weather proof type suitable for direct starting
and for continuous running from 415/240 volts, three phase/single phase 50 Hz supply, the
motors shall comply with IS as applicable for continuous rated machine.
16.4.2 All motors shall be capable of continuous operation at frequency 50 Hz with variation of +3%
and 415/240 V AC +10% variation of the normal voltage without injurious over heating.
16.4.3 All motors shall have ball or roller bearing with hexagonal nipples for greasing. In case of
vertical spindle motor shall have bearing capable of withstanding thrust due to weight of the
moving parts.
16.4.4 Varnished cambric or glass insulator shall be used for connection from stator winding to the
terminal suitable for external wiring. The motor terminals shall be of stud type and totally
enclosed.
16.5 COOLER CONTROL
16.5.1 Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a 3 pole electrically operated contactor
with control gear for motor operation by hand and automatically through winding temperature
indicator. Provision shall be made of over load protection but no volts release shall not be
provided.
16.5.2 All connection shall be so arranged as to allow either individual or collective operation of the
motors. Alarm indication (audio and visual) for failure of group of fans and to indicate failure of
power supply shall be provided.

16.5.3 The control equipment shall be installed in the marshalling box as specified in clause 22 in
readily accessible position .
16.5.4 The alarm indication for failure of group of fans, failure of power supply and failure of
individual fans be provided through independent non trip alarm scheme conforming to the
following.
i) The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be accompanied by a flag
indication on the concerned auxiliary relay.
ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp which will not reset until the fault has
cleared.
iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing accept push button. If after cancelling
the alarm but before resetting the visual signal the same fault persists the buzzer shall be
suppressed.
iv) If after cancelling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal. Some other fault takes place
the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate auxiliary relay shall take place.
v) If after cancelling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal the same fault appears or
some other fault takes place the alarm flag indication and non-trip lamp indication shall
reappear as usual.
vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of push button and resorting of visual signal
may also preferably be done through a push button.
vii) Means shall be provided for testing checking trip and alarm circuit at frequent intervals.
viii) The equipment shall be suitable for 110 volts DC operation.
17.0 VOLTAGE CONTROL (ON LOAD TYPE)
17.1 The transformer shall be provided with voltage control equipment of the tap changing type for
varying its effective transformation ratio while the T/Fs are on load and without producing
phase displacement.
17.2 Equipment for local and remote electrical and local manual operation shall be provided and
shall comply with the following conditions. Local remote switch may be housed in remote
control panel or in tap changer drive mechanism.
17.2.1 It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating gear is in use.
17.2.2 It shall not be possible for any two electric controls to be in operation at the same line
17.2.3 The equipment shall be suitable for supervisory control and indication on a multi way switch
make before break having one fix contact for each tap position shall be provided and wired to
the tap changer drive gear. This switch shall be provided in addition to any which may be
required for remote tap change position indication purpose. Supervisor indication shall be
provided in the form of contacts to close on tap change incomplete
All other components of the supervisory gear. If required be specified separately.
17.2.4 Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only until the
control switch shall cause one tap movement only until the control switching returned to the
off position between successive operations.
17.2.5 All electrical control switch on the local operation gear shall be clearly labelled in a suitable
manner to indicate the direction of tap changing.
17.2.6 The local control switches shall be mounted in the marshalling box or drive gear housing .
17.3 The equipment shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change has been
commenced. It shall be completed independently of the operation of the control relays or
switches. In case of a failure of the auxiliary supply during a tap change or any other

contingency such as tap changer getting stuck resulting into non-completion of a movement.
Adequate means shall be provided to safe guard the transformers and its auxiliary equipment.
17.4 Suitable apparatus shall be provided for each transformer to give indications as per following
sub clauses.
17.4.1 To give indication mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote control points
of the number of the tapping in use of the transformer.
17.4.2 To give an indication at the remote control point that a tap change is prepared by means of
illuminated lamps.
17.5 For remote control the required switches tap positions indicator etc. shall be supplied duly
mounted on remote control panel.
17.6 All relays and operating devices shall be operated correctly at any voltage between the limits
specified in the relevant ISS.
17.7 The tap changing switches and mechanism shall be mounted in the oil tanks or compartments
mounted in an accessible position on the transformer.
17.8 Any enclosed compartment not filled with oil shall be adequately ventilated metal clad.
Thermostatically controlled heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism chamber and
in the marshaling box. All contactors, relay coils or other parts shall be suitably protected
against corrosion or deterioration due to condensation fungi etc.
17.9 The tap changer contacts which are not used for making or breaking current like separate
selector switch contacts can be located inside main transformer tank where tap changer
construction permits such an arrangement. On load tap changer having separate
compartment for selector contacts the oil in such compartment shall be maintained under
conservator head by means of pipe connection from the highest point of the chamber to the
conservator. Such connection shall be controlled by suitable valve and shall be arrange so
that any gap leaving the chamber will pass into the gas and oil actuated relay. A separate
single float Buchholz relays may be provided for this compartment to trip the power
transformer in case of the fault in it.
17.10 It shall not be possible for the oil in these compartments of the tap change equipment which
contain contacts used for making or breaking current to mix with the oil in the compartments
containing contacts not used for making or breaking current.
17.11 Any DROP DOWN tanks associated with the tap changing apparatus shall be fitted with
guide rods to control the movement during lifting or lowering operations. The guide rods shall
be so designed as to take support of the associated tank when in the fully lowered position
with oil. Lifting gear fitted to Drop Down tanks shall include suitable device to prevent
runaway during lifting and lowering operations. They shall be provided with adequate
breathing arrangement. The tap chamber shall be mounted in such a way that the cover of
the transformer can be lifted without removing connections between winding and tap changer.
17.12 Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall be
provided with a suitable direct reading oil gauge.
17.13 The alternating supply for electrical operation of the control and indicating gear shall be
standard. 415 volts three phase 3 wire 50 Hz alongwith 240 volts single phase 2 wire 50 Hz
subject to a variation of +10 percent so that the equipment offered can withstand variation in
AC.
17.14 Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over running of the mechanism and except where
modified in clause 17.15 shall be directly connected in the circuit of the operating motor. In

addition a mechanical stop or other approved device shall be provided to prevent over
running of the mechanism under any condition.
17.15 Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor provided that a
mechanical de-clutching mechanism is incorporated.
17.16 Thermal devices or other means like motor charged breaker with shunt trip coil shall be
provided to protect the motor and control circuits. All rulers switches fuses etc. mounted in
the marshaling box or driving gear housing shall be clearly marked for purpose of
identification. These shall withstand the vibration generated with tap changer gear operation.
17.17 The control circuits shall operate at 110 volt single phase to be supplied from a transformer
having a ratio of 415 or 240/55 0 55 volt with the centre point earthed through a removable
link mounted in the marshaling box or tap changer drive.
17.18 The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving satisfactory
service without undue maintenance under conditions to be met in service including frequent
operation.
17.19 A five-digit counter shall be fitted to the tap changing mechanism to indicate the number of
operations completed by the equipment.
17.20 A permanently legible fabrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism chamber
where applicable
18.0 PARALLEL OPERATION
18.1 In addition to individual control of tap changer provision shall be make to enable parallel
operation of the tap changer when one unit is running in parallel with another similar unit of
same rating.
18.2 Suitable selector switch shall be provided so that any transformer of the group can at a time
be selected as master follower or independent. Arrangement shall be make that only one of
the transformers can be selected as master at a time.
18.3 Out of step device shall be provided for each transformer indicating out of step condition by
lamp and buzzer. It shall be arranged to prevent further tap changing when transformer
operating parallel control tap out of step.
19.0 BUSHING INSULATORS AND TERMINALS
19.1 The characteristics of the bushings shall be in accordance with IS:2099 and IS:3347.
19.2 A continuous flexible pull through lead suitably sweated to the end of copper winding shall be
connected to the connector in the helmet of the 66 kV bushing. The bushing may be filled with
oil, which may be in no communication with the oil in transformer.
19.3 All porcelain shall be free from defects and thoroughly vitrified with a smooth hard and
uniform brown glaze. It should be capable of satisfactory use under the climatic conditions as
specified in clause 3.00
19.4 In case of paper insulation care shall be taken to prevent ingress of moisture and a final coat
of non-hygroscopic varnish shall be given to them.
19.5 All clamps and fittings made of malleable iron or steel shall be galvanized as per IS 2633. The
bushing flanges shall not be re-entrant shapes, which may trap air.

19.6 Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied suitable for single 0.4 sq. inch ACSR Zebra
conductor for 66 kV 11 kV and neutral bushing. The take off for HV & LV connectors shall be
vertical and for HV neutral and LV neutral it should be of horizontal type.
The connector shall have six number bolts provided with checknuts. The connectors shall
have rating corresponding to those of equipment or higher and shall be designed most
liberally with a higher factor of safety to comply in all respects with temperatures rise
resistance tensile strength short circuit withstand capacity test as specified in IS:5561 1970 or
amendment there of (latest edition). Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture of Bimetallic
connectors shall conform to designation grade 4600 of IS:617 1975. The steel bolts nuts
washers and checknuts shall be not dip galvanized marked with ISI certification mark. Bolts
and nuts shall be of GKW make.
20.0 TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICE
20.1 The transformer shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating oil temperature.
The indicator shall be fitted with a pointer to register maximum temp recorded and adjustable
set of mercury contacts for alarm and tripping.
20.2 In addition all the transformers shall be provided with a dial type Hot Spot winding
temperature indicator. The indicator shall have a pointer to register maximum temperature
reached and adjustable set of Mercury contacts for alarm and trip. Provision shall also be
made to remote repeater indicator, which shall be flush mounting type and shall be supplied
duly connected on remote tap change control cubicle.
20.3 The temperature indicators shall be housed in marshalling box except where outdoor type
indicators are provided.
20.4 The alarm contact of oil temperature and winding temperature indicators shall be adjustable
between 50o C to 100o C. Whereas their trip contacts shall be adjustable to close between 60o
C and 120o C. These contacts shall be re-open when the temperature has fallen by not more
than 10o C.
20.5 The contacts used for controlling cooling plant motors shall be adjustable to close between
50o C to 100o C and shall be reopen when the temperature has fallen by a desired value
between 15o C and 30o C.
20.6 All contacts should be accessible on removal of the cover adjustable to scale. It shall also be
possible to move the pointers by hand for checking the operation of contract and associated
equipment.
20.7 In addition each transformer shall be provided with a thermometer for indicating the ambient
temperature.
21.0 GAS AND OIL ACTUATE RELAYS:
21.1 Each transformer shall be provided with a gas and oil actuate relay fitted with alarm and trip
contacts as per IS:3637.
21.2 Each such relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible connection for checking
relay operation.
21.3 A machined surface shall be provided on top of relay for checking mounting angles in the pipe
cross level of relay and its setting.
21.4 The pipe work shall be such, as to allow any gas formed in the tank to pass through the relay.
The oil circuit through the relay shall not form a parallel delivery path with any circulating oil
pipe. Nor shall it be tied into or connected through the pressure relief cont.

21.5 Adequate clearance between oil pipe work and live metal parts shall be provided.
22.0 MARSHALING BOX
22.1 A sheet steel vermin proof well ventilated and weatherproof marshalling box of suitable
construction shall be provided for the transformer ancillary apparatus. The box shall have
domed or sloping roofs. Ventilation covers shall also be provided. It shall be painted as per
clause: 5.15.
22.2 The marshalling box shall accommodate temperature indicators local electrical control of tap
changer (if same cannot be housed in motor drive housing) control and protection equipment
for cooling plant terminal boards and gland plates for cable etc. The terminal board will be of
moulded dielectric having brass inserts (studs). The equipment shall be mounted on panels
and panels wiring shall be done at the back for inter connections.
22.3 The temperature indicators shall be mounted at about 1000 mm from ground level.
22.4 A metal clad heater controlled by a waterproof rotary switch on the outside of the box and
duly supplemented with a thermostat shall be provided.
22.5 The incoming cables shall enter from the bottom with gland plate not less than 450 mm from
the base of the box. Care shall be taken to avoid ingress of water from the cable trench.
23.0 CONTROL CONNECTIONS INSTRUMENTS WIRING TERMINAL BOARD AND FUSES:
23.1 All cable and wiring shall be suitable for use under the conditions as specified at C1.3. Any
wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall be of oil resisting insulation. The bare ends of
stranded wire shall be sweated together to prevent oil from creeping along the wire.
23.2 The instrument and panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non-rusting metal cleats of limited
compression type.
23.3 The box wiring shall be as per relevant ISS. All wiring shall be of stranded copper of 660V
grade and size not less than 4 sq. mm for CT leads and not less than 2.5 sq. mm for other
connections. The panel wires and multi-core cable shall be ferrule of white insulation material
with indelible marking in black and as per relevant ISS. Same ferrule number shall not be
used on wires in different circuits. Double ferrule max be provided where a change in number
is required.
23.4 Stranded wires shall be terminated with tinned Ross Courtney terminal clamps washers or
crimped tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be used for each wire. Wire shall not be jointed
between terminal points.
23.5 Where apparatus is mounted on panels all metal cases shall be separately earthed by copper
wire or strip of not less then 2.5 sq. mm. The streams of screened of multi core cable shall be
earthen at one end of the cable only.
23.6 All terminal boards shall be mounted obliquely toward the rear door and these boards shall be
spaced not loss 100 mm apart. Suitable insulation batteries shall be provided between
adjacent connections. No live metal shall be exposed at the back of terminal boards.
23.7 All fuse shall be of cartridge type and fuses and links shall be properly labelled
24.0 EQUALIZATION FORMULA
The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender. The manufacturers shall state
separate no load read and auxiliary losses at rated frequency and voltage and lead losses
corresponding to ONAF rating (at full load at 75o C). For fair comparison of different offers. It
is essential that tenderers quote firm losses.

For the purpose of arriving at comparable losses the load and load losses at normal tap and
auxiliary lose shall be capitalized as per formula given below.
Capitalized cost of T/F = IC=56700 WI + 24500 mWc +22700 WP
Where IC = Initial cost.

WI = Iron (No load) losses
Wc = Copper (load) losses
W = Auxiliary losses
In case losses are subject to IS tolerance then the component losses shall be increased by
15% tolerance
Note : For capitalization of losses as are subject to tolerance the component losses shall be
increased by 15% but if it is question of acceptance of losses the tolerance would be limited to.
Total losses ____10% of the total losses

[Total losses comprise of no-load losses load losses and
auxiliary losses]
Component losses 15% of each component loss provided that the tolerance for
total losses is not to exceed 100%
25.0 TESTS
25.1 All type and routine tests shall be performed in accordance with the latest edition of IS:2026
and IS:8468 1977 (specification for on load tap changer) in the presence of the purchasers
representative if so desired.
25.2 In addition the following tests shall be carried out on the transformer tank :
25.2.1 OIL LEAKAGE TEST:

All tank and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness by being completely filled
with oil of viscosity not greater than of insulating oil to IS:335 at ambient temperature and
subjected to a pressure equal to normal pressure plus 35 kV/M2 (5 lbs./sq./inch) measured at
the base of the tank. This pressure shall be maintained for a period not less than 12 hours
during which period no leakage shall occur.
25.2.2 One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subjected to vacuum pressure of 68 kV/M2 (500
mm of Hg). The tanks designed for full vacuum shall be tested at an internal pressure of 3.33
KN /M2 (25 mm of no.) for one hour.
The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall not exceed
the value given below without affecting the performance of the transformer.
Horizontal length of Permanent

flat plat (mm) deflection (mm)
Upto & including 750 5

751 1250 6.5
1251 1750 8.0
1751 2000 9.5
2001 2250 11.0
2251 2500 12.0
2501 3000 16.0
Above 3000 19.0
25.2.3 One transformer out of the lot shall be subject to the pressure corresponding to twice the
normal head of oil or normal pressure plus 35 KN/M2 (which ever is lower) measured at the

base of the tank and maintained for hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after
removal of excess pressure shall not exceed the figures specified on clause : 25.2.2
25.2.4 IMPULSE TEST
The tenderer shall note that the impulse test with full and chopped on tail will be carried out as
per clause:13.00 of IS:2026/1981 (Part III) on one limb only ie, on the HV and LV winding
both of the same limb.
25.2.5 TRANSFORMER OIL :
The tenderer shall indicate in detail facility available at his works for carrying out various test
on transformer oil as per IS:335 (latest) and oxidation stability test as per AS MM:D:1984. It is
contemplated that the oil test as per IS:335 shall be carried out on the transformer oil at the
works of the transformer manufacturer before and after pouring of oil.
New transformer oil before pouring in tanks should conform is IS:335/93 (latest edition). After
pouring in the tank but before energization of the transformer oil should conform IS:1866/83
read with (Amendment No. 1) issued in Dec. 1987.
25.3 Test certificates shall be submitted in quadruplicate in respect of each transformer unit for the
approval of the purchaser. No material shall be dispatched without the approval of the test
certificate.
25.4 The purchaser reserve the right to have any other reasonable test carried at his expenses
either before dispatch or at site to ensure that the transformer complies with the requirement
of this specification.
25.5 The power drawn by cooling fans tests shall also be performed in accordance with IS : 2026
(Part I)/1977 in presence of purchasers representative if so desired.
25.6 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST
Short circuit test in accordance with clause:16.00 of IS:2026 Part I/1977 or latest edition
shall be not conducted on one of the unit if the test agencies where facility exists.
Alternatively the short circuit test may be not conducted as per the facility available at CPRI
Bhopal.
25.7 STAGE INSPECTION
The purchaser reserve the right for stage inspection of one of all the transformers at following
stages to ensure that the internal details are in accordance with the data/information supplied.
For which the supplier would give 30 days prior notice and the suppler would not go ahead
with further production schedule without obtaining concurrence from the purchaser.
i) Core Assembly
ii) Pre-tanking
26.0 SPECIAL TOOLS
26.1 Any special tools required for erection and for maintenance work shall be provided alongwith
each transformer.
27.0 DRAWINGS
27.1 The following drawings shall be supplied as part of the tender.
27.1.1 Online general arrangement drawing of transformer and accessories.

27.1.2 Bushing and terminal connectors.
27.2 The successful bidder shall submit final version of drawings compete in all respects as
detailed in the following sub-clauses. In quadruplicate within four weeks of placement of order
for purchasers approval. The purchaser shall communicate four weeks of their receipt. The
manufacturer shall,. If necessary modify the drawings and resubmit the same for purchaser
approval within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such duly revised drawings will be
approved by the purchaser within two weeks of their receipt.
After receipt of purchaser approval to drawings the manufacture will submit a set of
reproducible of all the approved drawings and will also supply five sets of all approved
drawings and five sets of manual of instructions per transformer.
ONE SET OF ALL THE APPROVED DRAWINGS AND MANUAL OF INSTRUCTIONS WILL
BE SUPPLIED ALONG WITH EACH TRANSFORMERS WITHOUT WHICH THE SUPPLY
WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED AS COMPLETE SUPPLY
27.2.1 Outline general arrangement drawings of transformers and accessories.
27.2.2 Assembly drawings and weight of each component.
27.2.3 Shipping drawings showing dimension and weight of each package.
27.2.4 Drawing showing foundation details along with foundations bolts.
27.2.5 Bushing and terminal connectors drawings.
27.2.6 Schematic and wiring diagram for auxiliary equipment like OLTC control gear, cooler control
gear and marshalling kiosk.
27.2.7 Combined rating and diagram plate.
27.2.8 Valve schedule plate.
27.2.9 Core assembly drawing with flux density calculations.
27.2.10 Interconnections diagram between OLTC panel. Drive mechanism and marshalling kiosk
27.2.11 Detailed calculations for radial and axial short circuit forces.
27.2.12 Cable arrangement on the transformers
27.2.13 Drawing showing connection of HV LV lead with the respective bushing and their place of
storage during transportation.
28.0 LIST OF SPARES
a) Set of bushings 1 set of each rating

b) Set of OTI & WTI 1 set
c) Magnetic oil level gauge 1 no.
d) Set of gasket 1 set.

Annexure A
GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR POWER TRANSFORMER
1. Name of the manufacturer and country of the rain.

2. Conforming to standard.
3. Service (indoor/outdoor)
4. Ratings (MVA)
a) 1, with ONAN cooling

2, with ONAF cooling
b) Rated no. load voltage

HV
LV
5. Temperature rise of top oil (deg. C)
6. Temperature rise of winding measured by resistance.

i) With ONAN cooling (Deg C)
ii) With ONAF cooling (Deg C)
iii) Period of operation of transformer at full load
without calculated winding hot spot temperature
exceeding 140 degree C with
50% coolers
100% coolers
7. Rated frequency (Hz)

8. No. of winding
9. No. of phases
10. Connection symbol and vector group.
11. Tapping :
i) Type of tap changer
ii) Tap step (percent)
iii) Total tap range
(+) Percent to
(-) Percent
iv) Tapping provided at HV/LV-N
12 Magnetization data at no load & rated Percentage of rated no-load voltage

frequency
At 90% At 100% At 110%
i) Current in Amps
ii) Power factor
iii) Load in kW
(core loss dielectric loss)
iv) Max. flux density in sq. mm
13. Load loss at rated current at 75 deg C in KW
i) For ONAN rating

ii) For ONAF rating
iii) Auxiliary loss in kW
iv) Total losses in kW

14. Impedance at rated current HV to LV and frequency at
75 deg C rated HVA.
i) Positive sequence at normal tap in %
ii) Position sequence at max. voltage tap in %
iii) Positive sequence at min. voltage tap in %
15. Reactance per phase at rated current and frequency and

normal tab on rated MVA base :
HV to LV : %
16. Resistance at 75 Deg C. of :

HV winding in ohms
LV winding in ohms
17. Efficiency at Deg C taking in to account At unity At 0.8

input to cooling plant as loss P.E P.E Tan
i) At 125 % full load

ii) At 100 % full load
iii) At 75 % full load
iv) At 50 % full load
18. Maximum efficiency and load at which it occurs (load

and P.F)
19. Regulation at full load and at 75 Deg C.
i) At unity p.f. in %
ii) At 0.8 p.f (lag) in %
20. a) Short time thermal rating of LV winding in

kA and duration in seconds
b) Short time thermal rating of HV winding in
kA and duration in seconds
21. a) Overload capacity for 2 hours after

continuous full load run
b) Thermal time constant in hours
22. a) Test voltage

i. Lighting impulse withstand
KV (peak)
ii. Power frequency voltage withstand
KV (rms)
b) Voltage to earth for which star point will be in

insulated
i. Impulse kV (peak)
ii. Power frequency kV (rms)
23. Noise level when energized at normal voltage and

normal frequency at no load.
24. Approximate weights.
i) Core (kg)
ii) Winding (kg)
iii) Tank and fittings (kg)
iv) Oil (kg)
v) Total weight (kg)

25. Required quality of oil in litres
26. Terminal connectors types and drawing no :
HV
LV
27. Net core area in sq. meters

28. Type of transformer (core)
29. Mater talk of lamination
30. Max. flux density at rated voltage and frequency in lines
/sq. cm
31. Type of joints between core limb and yoke
32. Conductor area in sq. cm and current density in amp 7
sq. cm
HV
LV
33. Type of windings

HV
LV
34. Winding insulation type and class graded or upgraded

HV
LV
35. a) Insulating material

i. Turn insulation
ii. HV side
iii. LV side
b) Between HV and LV
c) For core bolts, washers and end plates
d) Tapping connection
36. i) Type of axial support

HV winding
LV winding
ii) Type of radial coil support

HV winding
LV winding
37. Clearance in air Between phases Between phase to

earth
38. Details of tank

i) Material for T/F tank
ii) Type of the tank
iii) Thickness of sides in mm
iv) Thickness of bottom in mm
v) Thickness of cover in mm
vi) Thickness of radiators in mm
39. Details of painting at works and site
40. Minimum clear height for lifting cover and for lifting core
and windings from tank (mm) (untanking height )

41. Deleted
42. Shipping details :

i) Parts detached for transport
ii) Weight of heaviest package
iii) Weight of other heavy packages
iv) Dimensions of largest package LxBxH
43. Details of Bushings HV LV HV N LV N

i) Type
ii) Power frequency visible coronal discharge
voltage kV (rms)
iii) One minute dry withstand power frequency
voltage kV (rms)
iv) One minute wet withstand power frequency
voltage kV (rms)
v) Under oil flashover or puncture power frequency
voltage kV (rms)
vi) 1.2/50 micro sec lightning impulse withstand
voltage kV (peak)
vii) Under oil flashover or puncture impulse voltage kV (peak)
viii) Creepage distance in air (mm)
ix) Weight to assembled bushings (kg)
x) Phase to earth clearance in air of live parts at
the top of bushing
xi) Maximum current rating of the bushings
xii) Grade of oil in the bushings
xiii) Quantity of oil in the bushings in litres
44. On load tap changing gear

i) Make and type
ii) Rating
a) Rated voltage kV
b) Rated current Amps
c) Step voltage kV
d) No. of steps Nos.
iii) Approximate over all dimensions WxBxD
iv) Approximate over all weight
v) Total quantity of oil in litres
vi) Time to complete on tap change step in seconds
45. Cooling system

i) Grade of oil
ii) Quantity of oil in transformer in litres
iii) Weight of oil in transformer in kg
iv) Total radiation surface in sq mt.
v) Method of drying out transformer at site
vi) Type and make of material used for the radiators
vii) Total number of radiators/banks for transformer
and dimensions of tubes
viii) Total weight of radiators in kgs
46. Cooling equipment : Fan motor

i) Make and type
ii) Number connected
iii) Number in standby
iv) Rated power (kW)
v) BHP of driven equipment
vi) Capacity Litres/min

vii) Rated voltage
viii) Locked rotor current
ix) Temperature over which control is adjustable.
47. Over all dimensions of transformer including cooling

gear tap changing gear tap changing gear etc.
a) Length mm
b) Breadth mm
c) Height mm
d) Reference drawing no.
48. Whether oil temperature indicator provided (Yes/No)
49. Type and size of oil temperature indicator and whether

supervisor alarm and trip contacts provided (Yes/No)
50. Type of oil level indicator and whether supervisor alarm

contract for low oil level provided (Yes/No)
51. Type and size of gas operated relay and whether

supervisor alarm and trip contracts provided and their
sizes and nos.
52. Whether winding temperature indicator with supervisor

alarm and trip contacts provided if yes then (Yes/No)
53. Ratio and type used for winding temperature indicator.

i) Ratio
ii) Type
54. Type and size of thermostat used
55. No of breathers provided
56. Type of dehydrating agent used for breather
57. Capacity of conservator vessel
58. Valve
i) Drain valves mm No.
ii) Filter valves mm No.
iii) Sampling valve mm No.
59. Size of rail, rail gauge for installation in yard

a) Longer axis
b) Shorter axis
60. Wheel base
61. a) Type and make of pressure relief device

b) No. of each type of device per transformer and
c) Minimum pressure

66 KV CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL BOARDS
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection and testing at
manufacturers work before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at the discretion of
purchaser of control and relay boards for the substation
1.2 Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not specifically stated
in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory operation of the scheme of to
complete the work in a good workman like manner shall be deemed to have been included in
the scope of supply of the bladder.
1.3 Co-ordination
Circuit breakers, current transformers, PTs/CVts and isolating switches etc. are being
purchased against separate specification. The particulars of CTs, PTs and CVTs existing/to
be arranged are listed at annexure B. the supplier of control and relay boards shall be
responsible for preparing complete wiring diagram of 66 kV C&R panel boards and shall also
undertake to mount and wire any equipment received from other supplier. The schematic of
all voltage level breakers and 66 kV isolators are required to be incorporated in the panel
schematic.
1.4 Experience
The bidder shall be manufacturer of relays and all the main relays on the C&R panels offered
shall be of his own make only.
2.0 STANDARDS
The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant Indian Standards or equivalent IEC : -
When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceeds or differ than those
required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take
precedence.
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS :
3.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions : -
i) Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA

ii) Max. ambient air temp (Deg. C) 50
iii) Min. ambient air temp (Deg C) -2.5
iv) Max. relative humidity (%) 100
v) Min. relative humidity (%) 26
vi) Average annual rain fall (mm) 900
vii) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq. m.) 195
viii) Max altitude above mean sea level (meters) 1000
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/year ) 50
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3g
xi) Average number of dust storm (days per annum) 35
Note : -
i) Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The climatic
conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions

ii) Air conditioning or any special arrangement for making the control room dust proof shall not
be provided in substation.
3.2 All control wiring, equipment accessories shall be protected against fungus growth,
condensation, vermin and other harmful effects due to tropical environments.
3.3 Aux. Power Supply
i) AC supply : 415/240 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz

Voltage variation : 10 %
Frequency variation : 3%
ii) DC supply battery (insulated) : 110 volts, 2 wire available from S/Stn.
Variation : 10 %
3.4 66 kV voltage will be three phase having normal frequency of 50 Hz subject to a variation of
3 %. Neutrals of the power transformers at the S/Stn. covered in this specification are solidly
earthed.
3.5 The degree of protection shall be IP-31 or batter as per IS:2147
4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
4.1 The panel shall have the principal dimensions as detailed below : -
i) Depth of panels = 610 mm
ii) a) Height of switchboard above base frame = 2210 mm

b) Height of base frame = 102 mm
iii) Width of corridor in case of duplex panels = 762 mm
iv) Type of panel
a) Simplex control and relay panels.

b) Deleted
Note : The offer of the Bidder not confirming to above requirements shall be out rightly rejected.
4.2 MIMIC DISPOSITION
The mimic disposition on control panel should be matching to our standard drawings, the
details of which will be supplied to successful bidders.
4.3 ARRANGEMENT OF PANELS.
The panels shall be fabricated so that even if the order of panels is charged, no difficulty shall
be faced in the placement of panels and cabling etc. the sequence of various panels in a
panel board at the substation shall be supplied to successful bidder.
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :
5.1 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
All material used in the construction of the panel/relays shall be of the best quality obtainable
of their respective kind and whole of the work shall be of the highest class well finished and of
approved design and make castings shall be free from blow holes, flows, cracks or other
defects and shall be smooth grained and of true dimensions and forms.

The draw out mechanism in respect of draw out relays should be smooth and convenient so
as to give adequate service during their use.
5.2 DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATION :
Should the tenderer wish to depart from the provisions of this specification either on account
of manufacturing practice or for any other reasons he will draw specific attention to the
proposed points of departure on the prescribed performa (enclosed) at Annexure D in his
tender and submit such full information, drawings and specifications as will enable the merit
of this proposal to be appreciated. However, no deviation shall be accepted with reference to
clause 4.1 above.
In the event of contractor drawing, specification and tables etc. disagreeing with this
specification during the execution of the contract this specification shall be held binding
unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.
5.3 PAINTING
All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame works shall be sand blasted to remove rust,
scale, foreign adhering matter and grease. A suitable rust resistance primer shall be applied
on the interior and exterior of steel which will be followed by application of an under coat
suitable to serve as base for finishing coat. The finishing coat shall be as under : -
Exterior - Stoved enamelled light grey as per shade no. 631 of IS:5
Interior - Stoved enamelled white
Base frame - Stoved enamelled glossy black
5.4 TESTING EQUIPMENT AND TESTING FACILITIES ON THE RELAYS :
The tenderer shall recommend suitable testing equipment (alongwith quantity) required for
field testing of protective schemes and other relays offered against this specification.
Also adequate testing facilities should be provided on the relay so as to test them without the
necessity of their removal or making any extra connections. The bidder will clearly indicate
the testing procedure to be followed in respect of relays offered.
5.5 The tentative transmission line data in respect of 66 kV lines covered in this specification is
given at Annexure E.
The standard chart providing the details of per unit valves of Z1, Z2, and Z0 on 100 MVA base
per 100 km of line for calculating these values for full lengths of lines are enclosed at
Annexure E.
The suitability of distance scheme offered with reference to the above parameters may be
seen.
Guaranteed test sheets as per Annexure A shall be submitted by the tenderer. Relevant
literature shall be supplied alongwith the bid for proper appreciation of the offered equipment.
5.6 SUPERVISORY SERVICES :
The tenderer may offer supervisory services for testing and commissioning of 66 kV panel
board included in the specification. The tenderer may quote their rates on diem basis
category wise with their terms and conditions. The rates quoted should be valid for at least
three years from the date of receipt of equipment of us.

5.7 TRAINING OF PERSONNEL :
The contractor will provided free facilities for training the purchasers technical/Engineers at
his works and design office. He will intimate in advance the schedule of completion of designs
and manufacture of equipment against the contract (of this specification) or similar equipment
to be manufactured at the works so that the purchaser may depute upto 3 technical and 3
engineers for training at the manufacture assembly, testing, operation and commissioning etc.
including testing and commissioning of protective relays, covering training in detecting faults
in static relays. Complete explanation of the schematic, wiring and wiring schedule of the
relays/scheme together with full understanding regarding the functional modules of the
relays/scheme together with full understanding regarding the functional modules of the
relays/scheme shall be given to the Engineers/technicians. The topics of CTs and PTs
towards relay applicable shall also be kept under the scope of training. The training shall be
arranged by the contractor at the works in such a way that the persons under training shall be
freely acquainted with the equipment. The engineers/technicians shall also be provided with
relay/scheme guides/instruction manuals covering drawings of functional modules of
relays/schemes. The period of training will be not exceeding 15 days and all expenses shall
be borne by the purchaser.
5.8 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.8.1 Duplex C & R Panel Boards :
The panel shall comprise of cubicles placed in juxta position to form continuous board. At
each substation the relay boards shall be mounted back to back with the control boards and
arranged as to have a corridor carrier in between to provide access to internal wiring. Hinged
lockable access double leaf doors shall be fitted at both ends of the corridor and corridor
interior shall be automatically lit by the opening of these doors.
The offered C&R panels shall be complete with end access doors with concealed hinges
having a swing of not less than 105o in fully open position of the doors.
The control and relay cubicles shall be made of cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less
than 10 SWG for the base frame, door frame, front and rear portions of cubicle and not less
than 14 SWG for doors, side top and bottom portions.
The bottom of the cubicle frame shall be suitable for erection on flush concrete floor. The
trench, carrying the control cables, shall run at the back of erected C&R panel boards in the
switch house building. Evenly spaced grout bolts projecting through the base channel forming
members of the frame shall be used for securing cubicles to the floor.
The front panel of all cubicles shall be detachable and all inter connections from the control
panel to the relays panel and vice versa shall be through terminal connectors. The inter
connections shall preferably run underneath the top cover.
The control and relay boards shall be completely dust and vermin proof and shall be suitable
for tropical use. All holes and extension windows in the panels shall be blanked and access
doors shall be lined with compressible liners at the edges.
5.8.2 Simplex C&R Panel Boards
The panel board for the substations mentioned at Sr. no. 4.1. (IV) (a) above shall be of
simplex type and consisting of separate cubicles (for each circuit complete with side covers)
made of cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 10 SWG for the base frame, door
frame and front portions of the cubicles and not less than 14 SWG for door, side, tip and
bottom portion having provision for extension at both ends with internal wiring, illumination
with door operated of and on switch. The cubicle shall be suitable for floor mounting with its
bottom open and shall be completely dust and vermin proof. Each cubicle shall be fitted with
flush mounted steel hinged door and lock at the back and all the equipments will be mounted

in front. In case of panels having width more then 800 mm, double leaf doors shall be
provided. The supply shall include suitable grouting bolts and nuts etc. All holes and
extension windows shall be blanked and access doors shall be provided with compressible
linear at the edges.
These simplex panels offered may, therefore match in following respects : -
i) Height wise and depth wise matching.

ii) Size and disposition of mimic diagram matching
5.9 SUPERVISION SCHEME :
5.9.1 Indicating Lamps :
5.9.1.1 Deleted
5.9.1.2 66 kV control and relays panel boards of all respective concerned substations covered by this
specification shall be provided with the following supervision lamps. : -
Circuit breaker close : Red.

Circuit breaker open : Green.
Auto trip : White.
Spring charge lamp : Blue.
For monitoring of entire trip circuit (from control and relay panel terminal to the trip coil of
circuit breaker) both in open and close position of the circuit, 2 no automatic trip circuit
supervision relays are proposed for 66kV panels and breakers being procured are and
operated with two trip coils for 66kV.
5.9.1.3 Auto trip lamp shall be wired on 110 V DC whereas circuit breaker open, close and spring
charge lamps shall be wired so as to be on 110 V AC under normal conditions with an
automatic changeover relay to charge them over to 110 V DC supply in the even of failure of
AC supply.
5.9.1.4 Glass/plastic lens of appropriate colour shall be screwed into the front of the lamp body. The
design of indication lams shall be such as to facilitate replacement of fuse lamps.
5.9.1.5 An engraved label indicating the purposed of the lamp shall also be provided with each lamp.
5.9.2 SEMAPHORE INDICATORS :
Automatic semaphore relays of the under mentioned types shall be provided to mimic the
position of circuit breakers, isolators and earth switches in the mimic diagram painted on the
control and relays boards.
5.9.2.1 The control and relay panels covered by this specification shall be provided with suitable
semaphore relays whose discs rotate clock wise /anti clock wise through 45o to show on/off
position of the circuit breakers/isolators/earth switches. For distinction purposes, the dic
diameter of the semaphore relays used to mimic the circuit breaker position shall be bigger
than those for isolator/earth switch.
5.9.2.2 The operating coil of the semaphore relays shall be continuously rated and shall be suitable
for use with 110 V DC. The semaphore relays shall work satisfactorily between 80% - 120 of
the rated DC voltage.
5.10 NON TRIP ALARM SCHEME
5.10.1 Each of the 66 kV control and relay panels shall have independent non-trip alarm scheme.
The scheme shall generally conform to the followings : -

i) The closing of an initiating contract shall sound a buzzer and light an annunciator indicting
lamp. It shall be possible to silence the buzzer (common to a voltage level C&R panel
board) by pressing accept push button.
ii) By pressing the reset push button the individual indicating lamp shall be extinguished
provided that the troubled contact has opened. The resetting shall be possible only after the
alarm is accepted.
iii) Lighting of an annunciator lamp shall not interfere with or cause false operation of any other
annunciator lamp whether lighted simultaneously or in sequence. Operation of reset push
button shall not cause the alarm to sound whether or not the trouble contact is closed.
iv) With the help of lamp test push button it shall be possible to test all the lamps in the group.
v) The lamps for visual annunciation system shall have separate compartment behind inscribed
white translucent windows. These shall be so arranged that illumination from one
compartment shall not light adjacent windows.
vi) The equipment shall operate on 110 V DC and shall be complete with alarm accept, alarm
reset and lamp test push button.
vii) Only static facia alarm scheme is acceptable.
5.10.2 The annunciation way for various 66 kV C&R panels shall be provided as under : -
Description Annunciation way (nos)

Transformer panel Feeder panel Transformer incomer panel
66 kv 16 12 -
The details of annunciations on all these panels is attached at Annexure-F
5.11 ALARM SCHEME FOR TRIP ALARMS
Trip commands due to operation of protective relays will trip the breaker. Its auxiliary contact
will actuate bell (common to a voltage-level C&R panel board) and will be cancelled by the
circuit breaker control handle in case of all the pane against this specification. Auto trip lamp
will glow on the concerned panel and there will be flag indication on the concerned protective
relays/auxiliary relay of the panel.
5.12 MIMIC SCHEME :
Suitably painted mimic diagram will be reproduced on the panels/boards covered by the
specification. Automatic semaphores for indicating open and close position of circuit
breakers, isolators and earth switches shall be suitably incorporated in mimic diagram. The
colour scheme for all the S/stn, specified herein shall, however, be as under : -
Voltage level Colour Shade no.

(according to IS:5 or equivalent IEC)
66 kv Golden brown 414
5.13 METERING SCHEME :
5.13.1 All indicating and integrating instruments shall be of switch-board type back connected
suitable for flush mounting and provided with dust and vermin proof case and finished in egg
shell bright black colour and shall be calibrated to read directly the primary quantities. All
fixing screws, nuts and threaded parts shall be designed to relevant Indian Standards. All the
instruments (i.e, Voltmeters, frequency meters and Wattmeters) shall be in square pattern

case and shall conform to the provisions of the latest edition of IS: 1248 and IS : 2419 or
relevant BS, IEC standards. The nominal sizes of these indicating instruments shall be 144
mm. Energy meter shall conform to provisions of IS : 722 amended upto date or relevant BS,
IEC standards.
5.13.2 AMMETERS
Ammeter shall be suitable scaled (additional dials, if any, required to cover all the taps of the
CTs shall be included at the time of tendering) and provided with a selector switch facilitating
the measurements of phase currents as well as the unbalance current. The coil of the
ammeter shall be rated for 1 amp. The instruments shall be of moving iron spring controlled
type of industrial grade A classification with accuracy class 1.
5.13.3 VOLT-METERS
Volt-meter shall be suitably scaled and provided with selector switch (wherever asked for) to
facilitate the measurement of phase to phase and phase to neutral voltage of all the three
phases one by one. The coil of the voltmeter shall be rated for 110 volts (phase to phase)
wherever asked with selector switch and 110/-- volts if asked without selector switch. The
instrument shall be of moving iron spring controlled type of industrial grade A classification
with accuracy class of 1 and shall conform to IS: 1248 or relevant BS or IEC standard.
5.13.4 KILO WATT HOUR METERS
All 66 kV feeder control and relays panels against this specification shall be provided with kilo
watt hour meter. The kilo watt hour meter shall be of 3 element type suitable for use on three
phase three wire unbalanced system. Calibration shall correspond to CT ratio 300/1 A for all
the 66 kV and 132 kV feeder panels. For other CT ratios, multiplying factors shall be used
which may be inscribed on the dial plate. The current coil of the instrument shall be suitable
for 1 amp. CT secondary and voltage coil shall be suitable for 110 volts (phase to phase). The
instrument shall be static type. The accuracy class should be 1.0
5.14 CONTROL SCHEME AND CONTROL SWITCHES :
5.14.1 CONTROL SWITCH FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS :
5.14.1.1 It shall be possible to close various circuit breakers from the control room. For these
purpose control switches have pistol grip type and of the spring return to neutral position
type non-lockable handles with alarm cancellation contacts shall be provided for OP of
circuit. Breakers. These shall be so designed that after being operated to close a circuit
breaker, the operation cannot be repeated until the switch has been turned to a trip
position making it impossible to perform two closing operations consecutively.
5.14.1.2 The rating of the control switch contacts shall be suitable for the duty imposed by the
closing and opening mechanism of circuit breakers and shall conform to the
recommendation which may be made by the suppliers of circuit breakers. The moving and
fixed contacts shall be of such a form and material as will ensure good contact and long
service under sever operation duty. All contacts shall be readily renewable.
5.14.1.3 The tenderer in view of various requirements of this specification shall decided the number
of contacts in the control switches. two pairs of contracts one normally open and one
normally closed shall be kept spare. The total number of contacts proposed to be provided
shall be stated in the tender.
5.14.1.4 Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch in the control switches shall be
ensured.

5.14.2 CONTROL SWITCH FOR ISOLATORS :
It shall be possible to close the isolators from the control room. For this purposed control
switches with spade grip handles and having no provision for locks shall be mounted on the
66 kV C&R panels specified herein so as to be easily distinguishable from those meant for
circuit breaker controls.
5.15 RELAY SETTINGS :
The successful bidder will be responsible for calculating the relay setting of the distance
protection scheme included in the bid and obtain HVPNLs M&P wing clearance before their
adoption. Any data/ information in regard to the power system required by the supplier for this
purpose shall be supplied by HVPNL.
5.16 PROTECTION SCHEME :
5.16.1 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS
A) TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION :
The transformer for which the protection is required are equipped with on-load-tap changer
having a setting range of 5 to +15%
The relay shall
i) Be triple pole type

ii) Have 3 instantaneous high set over current units.
iii) Have second harmonic restraint or other inrush proof feature and be stable under
normal over fluxing conditions.
iv) Have fifth harmonic by pass filter or similar other arrangement to prevent mal-
operation of the relay under operation conditions.
v) Be static type (the tripping device may be static or electromechanical)
vi) Have operating setting sufficiently low so as to cover practically the whole of the
transformer against all types of faults.
vii) Have adjustable setting either in the operating or restraining circuits.
viii) Be provided with necessary terminals and links to measure current in restraining
circuits and in the operating circuits of all the phases under load without making any
wiring changes.
ix) Cover the lightning arrestors (proposed to be provided very close to the transformer)
in the zone of protection.
B) OVER CURRENT PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET :
The relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min. time of 3
secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of 50%-200%of 1 amp
supplemented with high set units having a setting range of 500% to 2000%of 1 amp shall be
provided. The relay shall be electromechanical type.
C) RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION :
It shall be single pole type for the clearance of earth fault in the protected zone. The relay
shall be of high impedance type with a suitable setting to cover at least 90% of the winding
and shall have a setting range of 10% to 40% of 1 amp. The relay shall be complete with
turned 50 Hz circuit and stabilizing resistance. The tuned circuit will help reject harmonics
produced by CT saturation and thus make the relay operative for fundamental frequency
only. The stabilizing resistance may appropriately be set to avoid mal-operation under through
fault conditions.
D) 8 no. auxiliary relays for various transformer trip functions shall be provided.

E) OVER FLUXING PROTECTION :
An over fluxing detecting relay for the protection of the transformer against over-fluxing
conditions is proposed to be provided on each of the 66 kV transformer C&R panel covered
by this specification. The relay shall be static in design with adjustable setting so as to avoid
its operation on momentary system disturbances. The relay shall be suitable for 110/3 volts
(phase to neutral). The relay shall have two time delays one to have 0.3 seconds delay for
alarm to draw the operators attention about the existence of over fluxing conditions and
second to have 4-120 sec. delay to cause tripping of 66 kV transformer controlling circuit
breaker if the over-fluxing conditions continue to exist.
F) OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY
It is proposed to provided an over current (i.e. single phase ) relay employing a sensitive
balance armature polarised unit for initiating an alarm during transformer overload condition
on the 66 kV T/F C&R panels. The relay shall have continuous variable setting range of 50%-
120% of 1 amp and shall be supplemented by a suitable timer. The relay shall be arranged to
sound an alarm when the transformer exceeds the setting for a given period of time to draw
the operators attention.
G) NON-DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT RELAY : -
i) For 33/11 kV transformers incomer C&R panels
ii) For 66 kV transformer incomer C&R panels.
The relay shall be triple pole non-directional IDMTL type combined over current and
earth fault relay consisting of outer over current elements having a setting range
50%- 200% of 1 amp. and one middle IDMTL type earth fault element having a
setting range of 20% to 80% of 1 amp with a definite minimum time of 3 secs at 10
times setting for both 2 over current and 1 earth fault elements.
The relay shall be electromechanical type
H) OVER VOLTAGE RELAY
The relay is proposed for all 66 kV T/F incomer C&R panels. The relay shall have inverse
time characteristic having setting range of 100% to 130% suitably for operation with 110/3
volt AC supply (phase to neutral)
5.16.2 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR LINES :
A) DELETED
B) SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION SCHEME [FOR 66 KV LINES]
The main protection scheme for these lines will be distance scheme working on definite
distance measuring principle both for phase and earth faults. The switched scheme, which is
proposed to be static in construction, shall be directional in nature and three step. The
scheme shall comprise of 3 no. impedance/mho type starters with adjustable impedance
setting common for phase to phase and phase to ground faults and 1 no mho type measuring
element common for phase to phase and phase to ground fault. In case the tenderer wishes
to offer any other type, then the use of the offered one should be justified technically. It will
have to be ensured by the tenderer that the offered distance scheme picks up under minimum
generating conditions and remain in-operative for peak load conditions.

For correct measurement of earth faults necessary equipment for residual compensation shall
be included. The scheme shall be complete with auxiliary relay, timer, tripping relays and test
blocks as may be required for smooth functioning of the scheme.
It shall be provided with fuse failure relay to prevent its operation in the event of blowing off
the VT fuse. An indication of non-trip alarm will appear when VT supply fails. The use of any
alternative to VT fuse relay should be justified technically by the tenderers, keeping in view
the use of our common bus PTs/feeder CVTs for all the circuits for feeding ibid schemes as
per the not given in the respective mounting list. The scheme shall be equipped with instant
trip feature so as to trip the controlling circuit breaker instantaneously in the event of a three
phase fault very close to relay location. The operating time versus Zs/ZL curve shall be
supplied and the time of operation to be mentioned by the tenderer.
The scheme shall be suitable for 1 A rated CT secondary, 110 V (phase to phase) VT supply
and 110 V DC supply. Mode of conversion of DC supply from 110 V DC to voltage required
for static scheme may be mentioned in detail. Requirement of CTs and VTs etc. may be
checked for their suitability for the offered protection scheme and the position be indicated in
the tender.
C) NON-DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION [FOR 66 KV

LINES] :
The protection scheme shall comprise of triple pole IDMTL type combined 2 over current and
1 earth fault relay having setting range of 50-200% of 1 A and 20-80% of 1A respectively with
a definite minimum time of 3 sec at 10 time setting for both 2 over current and 1 earth fault
elements. The relay shall be electromechanical type.
D) DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT RELAY [FOR 66 KV LINES]
The relay shall :
i) Be single pole electromechanical type.

ii) Have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times
setting.
iii) Have a variable setting range of 50-200% of 1 amp.
iv) Have a characteristic angle of 45o
v) Include hand rest flag indicator.
vi) Be suitable for 110 V VT secondary.
E) DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT RELAY [FOR 66 KV LINES]
The relay shall :
i) Be single pole electromechanical type.

ii) Have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times
setting.
iii) Have a variable setting range of 20-80% of 1 amp.
iv) Have a characteristic angle of 45o
v) Include hand rest flag indicator.
vi) Be suitable for connection across open delta formed by the 110/3 volt rated
secondary of VT.
5.17 DELETED
5.18 Small Wiring
a) All wiring shall be of switch board type consisting of stranded/single annealed copper
conductor insulated with polyvinyl chloride insulation suitable for 650 volts service and in
accordance with IS:694.

b) The wiring of the following circuits shall not be less than the size specified below :
CTs, PTs and CVTs circuits : 2.5 mm2

Control, alarm and supervision circuits etc. : 1.5 mm2
c) All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and also will have no tee junction
enroute. The connections shall be securely made with the help of connecting lugs to ensure
non-oxidation of the bare copper conductor. At the terminal connections washers shall be
interposed between terminals and holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by locking
nuts. The connection studs shall project at least 6 m from the lock nut surface.
d) Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately. Fuses and links shall be provided to
enable all the circuits in a panel to be isolated from the bus wire, wherever practicable, all
circuits in which the voltage exceeds 125 volts shall be kept physically separated from the
remaining wiring. The function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal
boards.
e) All wiring diagram for the control and relay boards shall be drawn as viewed from the back of
the cubicle and shall be in accordance with IS:375 or equivalent IEC. Multi core cable tails
shall be so bound to its cable that each wire may be traced without difficulty.
f) All wring interconnecting the front panels with the rear panels in case of Duplex type
switchboards shall be wired in gutters held against the ceiling of corridors by means of
screws. As the front and the back panels will be detachable, the interconnection shall be
made through suitable terminal connectors securely fixed on the panel.
g) All potential bus wiring, non-trip and trip alarm bus wiring, AC and DC control supply, panel
lighting bus wires and such other wiring which runs from panel to panel within a C&R panel
board shall be laid out in gutters and shall be suitably screened in case of duplex type switch
board. In case of simplex type C&R boards these common wires will run through bus wire
holes.
5.19 Terminal Boards, Test Blocks And Spare Contacts :
a) Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass stud inserts shall
be provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the panel wiring and the corresponding tail
ends of control cables. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections.
The height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be such as to give
adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals. Provision shall be made on each
pillar for holding 10% extra connectors.
b) The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 660 volts service and for connection with both copper
and aluminium wires.
c) Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy access to termination
and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty. Wire ends shall be so connected
at the terminals that no wire terminal gets marked due to succeeding connections. Terminal
board rows shall be adequately spaced and shall not be less than 100 mm apart so as to
permit convenient access to wires and terminations. Labels in the form of engraved plastic
plates shall be provided on the fixed portion of terminal boards. No live metal parts shall be
exposed at the back of terminal boards.
d) Switch board type back connected test block with contacts shall be provided with links or
other devices for shorting terminals of CT leads before interrupting the normal circuit for
injection from an external source or for inserting testing instruments in the circuit without
causing open circuit of the CT. The potential testing studs shall preferably be housed in
narrow recesses of the block for relays and meters, wherever required, shall be placed as
close to the equipments as possible. Test blocks shall be of flush mounting pattern and the

number of test blocks being provided on each control and relays panel shall be stated in the
tender.
e) The purpose of all HT relays (including the auxiliary relays) switches, lamps and push buttons
etc. is required to be indicated just below the respective equipment through engraving or
painting.
f) Spare contract of relays are required to be brought on TBs and shall be indicated on the
drawings.
5.20 Name Plate
An easily accessible engraved or painted panel nameplate shall be provided on each panel. It
must include GA drawing No., purchase order no., Suppliers reference no., Item number as
purchases order, Name of substation and name of circuit. In additions to this, the purchase
orders no. alongwith date is required to be engraved on front sheet of the panel at appropriate
height so that it is readable while standing in front of the panel. It is required to be indicated
on the GA drawings also.
An engraved label indicating the purpose of all the relays and switches shall also be provided.
5.21 Ferrules
Wire no. shall be indicated on panel schematic and wiring diagrams and accordingly
engraved ferrules with the same numbers and letters as indicated in the said diagrams shall
be provided on the terminal ends of all wires for easy identification of circuits for inspection
and maintenance. Ferrules shall be of strong and flexible insulating material with glossy finish
to prevent adhesion. These shall be engraved and marked clearly and shall not be effected by
dampness. Ferrule numbering shall be in accordance with IS: 375. The same ferrule number
shall not be used on wires in different circuits on a panel. At these points of interconnection
between the wiring carried for equipments of different suppliers where a charge of number
cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire with the appropriate
connection diagram of the equipment.
5.22 Space Heaters
Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 110 volts AC supply
complete with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at the bottom of
each control and relay panel to prevent condensation of moisture. The watt loss per unit
surface of heater shall be low enough to keep surface temperature well below visible heat.
5.23 Safety Earthing
Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipment mounted on the
switchboards shall be done with bare copper conductor. Copper bus of size 25 mm x 6 mm
extending through entire length of a control and relay board shall be provided. The earthing
conductor shall be connected by Rose countney terminals and clamp junctions.
The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers and one
corner of the open delta connected LV side of potential transformer, if used shall be similarly
earthed with the main earth bar of the switchboard earthing system. Multiple earthing of any
instrument transformer shall be avoided.
5.24 Illumination Lamps
The C&R panel shall be provided with 220/240 volts lamps for interior lighting. The lamp shall
be free from hand shadows. A door operated button switch shall be provided in each simplex
panel and at both entrances or corridor in case of duplex panels. Each simplex panel shall be
provided with one no illumination lamp with door switch and no. of lamps in case of duplex

panels will depend on the length of corridor. In addition to above, each cubicle in case of
duplex panel shall be provided with lamp holder with switch.
5.25 Power Socket
Single-phase 240 volt AC power socket with power on /off switch shall be provided in each
simplex and earth part of duplex panels.
5.26 Tripping Relay
High-speed tripping relay shall :
i) Be instantaneous (operating time not to exceed 20 milli-seconds).

ii) Reset within 20 milli-seconds.
iii) Be 110 volt DC operated.
iv) Have adequate contracts to meet the scheme requirement.
v) Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil
vi) Be hand resent type.
vii) Be electro-mechanical type
5.27 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay
The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of each trip coil and associated
circuit of circuit breaker during ON and OFF conditions.
5.28 Bus Wires
The VT, DC, AC, trip alarm, non-trip alarm and DC fail etc. inter panel bus wire terminals shall
be brought on Bus TBs as well as on TBs so that any panel specified herein can be used
separately at the substation specified in this specification. The said bus wires for the panels
specified in case of existing substations shall be matched with the bus wire of the C&R panels
already available at site, the drawing for matching purposes for which shall be supplier to the
successful bidder. The bus wire terminals shall be indicated on the panel schematic drawings
as well. The bus wire diagram shall also be supplied alongwith the schematic drawings for
each panel.
5.29 Control Of Voltage Circuits :
Proper voltage selection scheme shall be provided.
5.30 Loose Relays
A. REF RELAY OF 1 AMP. RATING.
Details same as per Sr No. 5.16.1 (c) above.
B. 2 WINDOW AUX. RELAY FOR NON TRIP ALARM.
The relay shall be electromechanical type. The relay shall have a hand reset N.C contact. In
series with the relay coil, one hand reset N.O contact for initiating lamp, 1 no. self reset N.O.
contact in series with the relay coil for accepting the hooter through push button circuitry. The
push button, lamp and hooter shall not be part of the relay
The above description is for one window of the relay. The second window shall be identical to
the 1st one.
C. HIGH SPEED TRIPS RELAY
Details same as per Sr. No. 5.26 above

D. 3 POLE TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
Details same as per Sr. No. 5.16.1 (A) above
E. SET OF 3 O/C RELAY OF 1 AMP RATING WITH HIGH SET
The protection scheme shall comprise of triple pole combined 3 over-current IDMTL type
having a setting range of 50% to 200% of 1 amp. with a definite minimum time of 3 secs. at
10 times setting. All the 3 over current elements of the relay shall be equipped with high set
elements having setting range of 500% to 2000% of 1 amp. the relay shall be
electromechanical type.
F. SET OF NON DIRECTIONAL 2 O/C AND 1 E/F RELAY OF 1 AMP
Details same as per Sr. No. 5.16.1 (G)(I) above.
G. SET OF NON DIRECTION 2 O/C AND 1 E/F RELAY OF 1 AMP.
Details same as per Sr. No. 5.16.2 (C) above.
NOTE: - Relay base etc. if required for the relays shall be considered as part of the relay. This
is due to the fact that the relay can be installed in C&R panel of other makes.
5.31 Panel Details :
The mountings on various 66 kV panels against various substations specified herein shall be
as under. The tenderers shall quote item wise as per Schedule of quantities and give the
details of the various panel mountings in the same serial as specified herein as under for the
convenience of checking of the same with reference to the provision in the specification. The
bidders shall add any item required for the completeness of the scheme and ones found
unrequired shall be deleted by them, which will be viewed for the suitability by the purchaser.
MOUNTING DETAILS OF VARIOUS C&R PANELS :
I. 1 NO. 66 KV TRANSFORMER C&R PANEL FOR 16/20 MVA, 66/11 KV TRANSFORMER
The panel shall be equipped with the following.
1. Black PVC circuit label 1

2. Mimic diagram 1
3. Indicating lamps for CB 3
4. Spring charge indication lamp 1
5. Semaphore indicators for isolator position indication
6. Semaphore indicators for circuit breaker position indication 1
7. Ammeter suitably scaled 1
8. Ammeter selector switch 1
9. Spring return to neutral breaker control switch with sequence device, lost
motion device and 2 pairs of bell alarm contacts 1
10. Set of 12 ways static annunciator facia complete with accept, reset and
lamp test push buttons 1
11. Transformer differential relay 1
12. AC/DC changeover relay 1
13. High speed trip relay 1
14. REF relay
15. Single pole non directional over current relay with high set 1
16. Aux. relay for transformer Buchcholz., pressure relief for main tank,
pressure relief for OLTC, oil surge relay, oil temp., HV side winding temp.
and 1 no. spare for transformer trip functions. 8

17. Trip circuit supervision relays 2
18. Set of DC supervision scheme including one no. push button each for
DC fail test and accept with one no. indication lamp (amber) for DC fail
visual indication 1
Mounted inside
1. Illumination lamp with door switches 1

2. Space heater with on/off switch 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch 1
4. AC buzzer for DC fail alarm 1
II. 1 NO. 66 KV FEEDER C&R PANEL
The panel shall be equipped with the following : -
1. Black PVC circuit label 1

2. Mimic diagram 1
3. Indicating lamps for CB open, close and auto trip indications 3
4. Spring charge indication lamp 1
5. Semaphore indicators for isolators position indication 3
6. Semaphore indicators for earth switch position indication 1
7. Semaphore indicators for CB position indication 1
8. Ammeter suitably scaled 1
9. Ammeter selector switch 1
10. Voltmeter suitable scaled 1
11. Voltmeter selector switch 2
12. kWH meter 1
13. Spring return to neutral breaker control switch with sequence device, lost
motion device and 2 pairs of bell alarm contacts 1
14. Set of 12 ways static annunciator facia complete with accept, reset and
lamp test push buttons 1
15. Switched distance protection scheme with test blocks etc.
16. AC/DC changeover relay 1
17. High speed trip relay 1
18. Directional over current relay without high set 2
19. Directional earth fault relay without high set 1
20. Trip circuit supervision relays 2
Mounted inside
1. Illumination lamp with door switches 1

2. Space heater with on/off switch 1
3. Power socket with on/off switch 1
Note : The protection scheme and metering shall be fed from feeder CVTs
6.0 TESTS
6.1 Type Tests
The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report should not be more than five
years old, reckoned form the date of bid opening. Type test reports for all the protective and
auxiliary relays (static and electromagnetic/electro-mechanical) carried out in accordance with
relevant standards from Govt./Govt. approved test house and shall be submitted by the bidder
along with bid.

6.2 Routine Tests
6.2.1 All equipment shall be subject to routine tests according to the relevant standards and to such
other tests as may be required to ensure that all equipment is satisfactory and in accordance
with this specification. The Purchaser reserves the right to witness all the tests, unless
dispensed with in wiring by the Purchaser.
6.2.2 The supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation at least 15 days notice for Indian Supplier
and 30 days notice for Foreign Supplier)to the purchaser to enable him to depute his
representative for witness the tests. Following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturers
works after complete assembly : -
i. Checking wiring of circuits and their continuity.

ii. One-minute high voltage test.
iii. Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipment mounted
on the panel.
iv. Checking the operation of protection schemes
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
7.1 All the drawings shall conform to international standard organization (ISO) A series of
drawings sheet/Indian Standard Specification IS : 11065. All drawings shall be in ink and
suitable for microfilming. All dimensions and data shall be in SI units.
7.2 The successful supplier shall submit four sets of GA and schematic drawings for purchasers
approval within two weeks of the date of placement of order. The purchaser shall
communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within four weeks of the
date of receipt of above drawings. The supplier shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and
resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for Purchasers approval within two weeks from
the date of purchasers comments. After receipt of purchasers approval, the supplier shall
submit final sets of drawings for each circuit and one good quality reproducible substation
wise of the following drawings as detailed at para 7.3 below.
i) Board wise arrangement drawing (applicable for the panel board at a substation
having more than one panel)
ii) GA drawing alongwith GA legend and foundation details.
iii) Schematic drawing alongwith legend and internal wiring details of main relays like
local breaker back up schemes, distance protection scheme, transformer differential
relay, REF relay etc.
iv) Equipment wise and wire wise wiring diagrams.
Each set of drawings shall be bound separately. The final documents shall be supplied before
despatch of equipment.
7.3 The number of sets of drawings shall be as under : -
i) Ten sets of drawings each for Sr. no A1 to A4 of schedule of requirements.

ii) For the various substations at Sr. No. A5 to A8 and A10 to A16 of SCHEDULE OF
REQUIREMENT, 5 sets of drawings are to be supplied for each of the above. Each
set of drawings are to be bound separately.
iii) 3 sets of drawings for each circuit panel for the substations at Sr. No. A9 of
SCHEULE OF REQUIREMENT and each set of drawings are to be bound separately.
iv) For loose relays, the connections diagram for using the relay, internal wiring diagram,
technical details of relay and the instruction manual is to be supplied.
For each relay the above information shall be bound separately and the no. of sets shall be
equal to the quantity of respective relays.

7.4 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with approved drawings
and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All
manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of
the drawings shall be at the suppliers risk.
7.5 The supplier shall furnish specified no. of nicely printed and bound volumes of the instruction
manuals in English language, prior to the despatch of the equipment. The instruction manual
shall contain step by step instructions for all operational and maintenance requirements for all
the protective and aux. relays, switches, instruments etc. mounted on the panel and shall
include the following aspects.
i) Storage for prolonged duration
ii) Unpacking
iii) Erection.
iv) Handling at site
v) Pre-commissioning tests.
vi) Operating procedures
vii) Maintenance procedure.
viii) Precautions to be taken during operation and maintenance work.
ix) Catalogue number of all the components liable to be replaced during the life of the
panels.
x) Internal wiring diagrams of all the relays.
7.5.1 5 sets of substations shall be supplied free of cost before dispatch of equipment. Each set of
instruction manuals shall be bound separately. One master set for all the substations shall be
supplied with in a week of placement of order to the design directorate of facilitate the
checking and approval of drawings.
7.6 Approval of drawings by Purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable
standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at
the time of ordering.
Note : In case the equipment offered by the supplier does not meet with the requirements of
technical specification, the offer of the firm shall not be considered.

ANNEXURE A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
I. CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS
1. Dimension of the C&R panels

i. Depth
ii. Overall height
iii. Width
2. Width of corridor (applicable in case of Duplex type

panels).
3. Dimension of supporting channel.
4. Thickness of the sheet steel proposed for fabrication of
panels
II SWITCH BOARD WIRING
1. Insulation of wiring
2. Material of wiring conductor.
3. Size of wiring conductor for :
i. CT circuits
ii. CVT/PT circuits
iii. DC supply circuits
iv. AC supply circuits
v. Other circuits
4. Size of earth bar for safety earthing.

5. Type of terminals used in wiring the panel
III INDICATING AND INTEGRATING INSTRUMENTS

(AMMETER, VOLTMETER, AND KWH METER TO BE
FILLED IN SEPARATELY FOR EACH ITEM ).
1. Make
2. Type
3. Size
4. VA burden
a) Current Coil
b) Potential coil
5. Power consumption.
a) Current Coil
b) Potential coil
6. IS standard grade of accuracy.

7. Range of dial.
8. Limits of error in effective range.
9. Calibration for :
a) CT Ratio
b) PT Ratio
10. Finish.
11. Short time overload capacity.
12. Descriptive leaflet reference nos. submitted.
13. Type and make of selector switch for :
a) Ammeter
b) Voltmeter

IV CONTROL SWITCHES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER AND
ISOLATORS.
1. Make.
2. Type
3. Type of handle provided.
4. Number of position.
5. Whether no. of normally closed and normally open
contacts sufficient for scheme requirements ? (Yes/No).
6. Whether spring return to neutral or stay-put type.
7. Type of lock provided.
8. Making capacity/breaking capacity at 110 volt DC for
both inductive and non-inductive current.
9. Descriptive leaflet number submitted.
V. SEMAPHORE INDICATORS (FOR CIRCUIT

BREAKER, ISOLATOR AND EARTH SWITCH).
1. Make
2. Type
3. Diameter of the disk
4. Operating voltage
5. Burden
6. Whether latch-in type or supply failure type.
VI. INDICATING LAMPS
1. Make
2. Type
3. Operating voltage.
4. Size of lens.
5. Wattage of the lamp.
VII. OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT RELAY
1. Make
2. Type of relay
3. Current coil rating.
4. Potential coil rating (applicable only in case of directional
relays)
5. Tap range.
6. Range of high set elements (wherever applicable)
7. VA burden.
a) Highest tap
b) Lowest tap
8. Time V/S current characteristics.

9. Trip contact rating.
10. Descriptive leaflet no. submitted.
VIII. AUXILIARY RELAYS.
1. Make
2. Type
3. Capacity of contacts

i) Continuously
ii) For 3 seconds.
4. Operating coil VA burden

5. Voltage operated or current operated.
6. No. of normally closed & normally open contacts
sufficient for scheme requirements (Yes/No)
7. Contacts hand or self reset type.
IX. FACIA ANNUNCIATOR
1. Make
2. Type
3. Size
4. No. of windows of the standard facia
5. No of the additional windows that can be added to the
standard facia, as at Sr. No. 3 above.
6. Provision of Accept, Reset, and Lamp test, push
buttons in the facia.
7. Mode of inscription on the facia window.
8. Operation voltage.
9. Description of leaflet submitted.
X. TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAY.
1. Make
2. Type
3. Minimum differential current at which relay operations.
4. Range and steps of bias setting
5. Operating time at twice the relay setting.
6. VA burden of the relay.
XI. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY.
1. Make
2. Type
3. Rating
4. Minimum voltage for satisfactory operation (% of rated
voltage)
5. Monitoring of breaker trip coil in both close and open
position provided.
6. Safety resistor provided to limit the current if the relay
coil is short circuited.
7. No. of normally closed and normally open contacts
sufficient for scheme requirements (Yes/No)
XII. RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT RELAY
1. Make
2. Type
3. Tap range
4. Timer setting range
5. VA burden
6. Time/current characteristics
7. Short time rating of relay
8. Descriptive leaflet no. submitted

XIII. LOCAL BREAKER BACK UP RELAYS
1. Make
2. Type
3. Setting range (% of rating)
a) Phase faults
b) Ground faults
4. Operating time (m sec.)

5. Reset time (m sec.)
6. Burden
7. Timer range
8. Whether no. of normally closed and normally open
contacts sufficient for scheme requirements ? (Yes/No).
XIV. OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY.
1. Make
2. Type
3. Rated voltage
4. Setting ranges.
5. Operating time.
6. Setting range continuously variable.
XV. SELECTOR SWITCHES (CARRIER PROTECTION

IN/OUT SWITCH SWITCH).
1. Make
2. Type
3. Type of handle
4. No of positions
5. No of normally closed and normally open contacts
sufficient for scheme requirements (Yes/No).
6. Marking and breaking capacity of contacts.
XVI. DISTANCE RELAYS.
1. Make
2. Type of relay
3. Type of distance measuring elements.
4. Details of starting units and their switching sequence, if
applicable.
5. Range of settings (in secondary ohms) for Zone-1, Zone-
2 & Zone-3.
6. Operating time :
i) First zone timing
ii) Second zone time setting adjustable between ---
------- secs. to --------------- secs.
iii) Third zone time setting adjustable between ------
---- secs. to --------------- secs.
7. Contacts rating
i) First zone
ii) Second zone
iii) Third zone.

8. VA burden
i) Current circuit of the scheme.
ii) Potential circuit of the scheme.
9. Is the VA burden at Sr. No. 8 above is continuous ?

(Yes/No)
10. Operating time versus ZS/ZL curves of the distance
scheme.
XVII. CHECK SYNCHRONIZING RELAY :
1. Make
2. Type
3. Rating (V, ac)
4. Aux. voltage (V, dc)
5. Permissible voltage difference (%)
6. Permissible phase angle difference (degree)
7. Response time or relay (without timer)(m sec.)
XVIII. AUTO RECLOSING
1. Make
2. Type
3. Coil rating
4. Tap rating
5. VA burden
i) Highest tap
ii) Lowest tap
6. Trip contract rating (amp)
7. Descriptive leaflet no submitted

ANNEXURE B
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CTs, PTs, CVTs & NCTs.
I 72.5 KV TRANSFORMER CT
Core Application Current Current Accuracy Formula for min. Max. A.L.F.
No ratio (A) burden class as knee point voltage exciting
(VA) per IES at CT secondary current
185 resistance at 75o C (mA)
at 150 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Differential 150- - PS 40(RCT+1) 30AT Vk/4 -

protection 75/.577
2 REF Protection 150-75/1 - PS 20(RCT+1) 30AT Vk/2 -
3 Over current 150-75/1 25 5P - - 10

protection
Rated short time withstand current (rims) = 31.5 kA for 1 sec.

Rated dynamic withstand current (peak) = 78.75 kA
II 72.5 KV LINE CT
Core Application Current Current Accuracy Formula for min. Max. A.L.F. /
No ratio (A) burden class as knee point voltage exciting I.S.F.
at 300 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Distance 600-300- - PS 110(RCT+11) 80AT Vkp -

protection 150/1
2 Over current 600-300- 15 5P - - ALF 10

and earth fault 150/1
protection
3 Metering 600-300- 20 1.0 - - ISF < 5

150/1

III 72.5 KV NEUTRAL CT
Core Application Current Current Accuracy Formula for min. Max. Minimum
No ratio (A) burden class as knee point voltage exciting Insulation
(VA) per IES at CT secondary current voltage
185 resistance at 75o C (mA) (kV)
at 150 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 REF protection 150-75/1 - PS 20(RCT+1) 30AT Vk/2 15


B. DETAILS OF 11 KV INCOMER CTs (DIFFERENTIAL CORE ONLY)
Core I
Purpose Differential protection

Ratio 900-450/0.577
Knee point voltage at 900 A tap (volt) 40 RCT (Neglecting lead resistance)
Accuracy class PS
C. DETAILS OF 72.5 KV PTs AND CVTs
I 72.5 KV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)
Sl. No Requirements Particulars
1. Rated primary voltage 66/3 kV
2. Type Single phase
3. No. of secondaries 1
4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5. Capacitance (minimum) 8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
6. Method of earthing the system Solidly earthed
7. Rated frequency 50 Hz
8. Nominal system voltage 66 kV
9. Highest system voltage 72.5 kV
10 1.2/50 micro second lightning impulse 325 kV

withstand voltage (peak)
11. 1 minute power frequency withstand 140 kV

voltage (rms)
12. Rated voltage (volts) 110/3
13. Application Protection, metering, carrier coupling &

interlocking of line cum earth switch
14. Accuracy 1/3P
15. Output burden (VA) 50

ANNEXURE C
(C&R PANELS)
TRANSMISSION LINE DATA (TENTATIVE)
Sr. No. Name of Circuit Line length in km Conductor size

equivalent sq. inch ACSR
copper

ANNEXURE D
(C&R PANELS)
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM THE SPECIFICATION
In the table the Bidder shall set out all deviations clause by clause from the specification of the
equipment offered. The bid shall be deemed to conform to purchasers specification in all respects
unless specifically mentioned in this table.
Sl No. Clause No. Detailed deviations with Justification

ANNECURE E
(C&R PANELS)
LINE PARAMETERS (PER UNIT)/100 MVA BASE/100 KM

WITH CONDUCTOR SIZE & POWER CAPACITY
Voltage No of Conduct- Resist- React- Suscept- Resist- React- Line

KV ckt. or size ance ance ance ance ance capacity
(inch2) R X Y R0 X0 (MW)
220 D/C 0.40 0.0080 0.0443 0.2700 0.05109 0.21666 300

220 S/C 0.40 0.0176 0.0886 0.1350 0.05951 0.26180 150
132 D/C 0.20 0.0445 0.1167 0.0970 0.15648 0.64289 112
132 S/C 0.20 0.0890 0.2335 0.0485 0.19776 0.76814 56
66 D/C 0.15 0.2347 0.4637 0.0272 0.71210 2.70857 50
66 S/C 0.15 0.4695 0.9275 0.0136 0.93744 3.20761 25
Remarks :
1. Size of earth wire for : -
220 kV = 7/3.15 mm
132 kV = 7/2.5 mm
66 kV = 7/2.5 mm
2. Resistance of conductor at 20o C.
3. Resistivity of earth assumed = 100

ANNEXURE-F
(C&R PANELS)
ANNUNCIATION DETAILS
I 66 kV TRANSFORMER C&R PANELS
Sl No Description
1. T/F magnetic oil level low 1

2. T/F buchholz alarm 1
3. T/F oil temp. high alarm 1
4. T/F HV winding temp. high alarm 1
5. T/F LV winding temp. high alarm 1
6. Spare for T/F function 1
7. Spare for T/F function 1
8. CB low SF-6 gas pressure alarm 1
9. CB low SF-6 gas pressure lockout alarm 1
10. CB CD fail 1
11. CB motor single phaseing/over load alarm 1
12. Spare for CB 1
13. Spare for CB 1
14. Trip circuit 1 fault 1
15. Trip circuit 2 fault 1
16. Spare 1
II. 66 KV FEEDER C&R PANELS.
Sl No Description
1. Trip circuit 1 faulty 1

2. Trip circuit 2 faulty 1
3. CB low SF-6 gas pressure alarm 1
4. CB low SF-6 gas pressure lockout alarm 1
5. CB CD fail alarm 1
6. CB motor single phaseing/over load alarm 1
7. Spare for CB 1
8. Spare for CB 1
9. VT fuse fail 1
10. Distance protection operated 1
11. SOTF trip 1
12. Spare 1

11 KV CLASS ALUMINIUM WOUND DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (CONVENTIONAL TYPE)
FOR 200 KVA
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing supply and delivery of distribution
transformers required for outdoor sub stations in earthed neutral system with nominal voltage
of 11 kV rural electrification distribution systems.
2. STANDARDS
The transformers shall conform in all respects to IS 1180-1981 and IS 2026-1977 except
where specified otherwise. Equipment meeting any other authoritative standards which
ensures an equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above will also be
acceptable. In such cases the copy of standards (English version) adopted should be
enclosed with the tender.
3. TYPE AND RATING
The transformers shall have core type construction and ON cooling as mentioned below and
shall be suitable for outdoor service as step down transformers. The rating and electrical
characteristics of the transformers shall be as follows :
i) Continuous capacity 200 kVA

ii) Rated HT voltage 11 kV
iii) Rated LT voltage 433 V
iv) Frequency 50 Hz
v) No of phases 3
vi) Connection (HT) Delta
vii) Connection (LT) Star, Neutral Brought out
viii) Vector group Dy-11
ix) Taps No taps to be provided
x) Type of cooling Onan
4. WINDINGS
4.1 The primary winding shall be connected in delta and the secondary winding in star (vector
symbol Dy-11) so as to produce a positive displacement of 30 deg C from the primary to the
secondary vectors of the same phase. The neutral of the secondary winding shall be brought
out to a separate insulated terminal.
All transformer shall be oil immersed, weather proof and suitable for outdoor installation.
The conductor used for winding shall consist of high conductivity non-oxidising solid drawn
EC grade aluminium.
The coils shall be circular in shape and their construction shall be such that there is no
possibility of distortion under any likely conditions of service.
The high and low voltage windings shall be concentric with the low tension winding nearest
the transformer core and high tension winding outside. The two windings shall be so placed
that they remain electro-magnetically balanced under all conditions of service. The axial
length of the coils must be kept down to a minimum so as to strengthen the winding against
axial stresses under short circuit conditions.
The coils shall be wound to form a continues coil or a number of dishes and the individual
discs separated to provide a distinct oil space between them. The inner coil shall be

adequately insulated from the core. The insulating cylinders shall have electrical and
mechanical strength. No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six
times its thickness.
All HV and LV coils ends shall be provided with crimped lugs. The star point on the LV side
shall be properly sleeved, crimped as well as brazed. All fixations/joints should be such that
there is no scope for loose contact,. Local heating, breakage of conductor, loosening due to
vibrations etc.
Copper strip/foil used for earthing the core should be tinned. The tinned foil should be
properly connected to the channel to the channel with bolt and nut after removing the paint
form the channel underneath the copper foil.
Current density both in LT and HT windings should be around 1.5 to 1.55 amp/mm
The transformer shall be designed and constructed to withstand without damages thermal
and dynamic effects of an external short circuit. The manufacturer/supplier shall furnish all
relevant design data and calculations in support of having fulfilled this requirement as
stipulated under clause 9 of IS 2026 (part-I)-1977.
4.2 Double paper covered aluminium-conductor shall be used both for HV and LV windings.
4.3 The size of HT windings wires (bare) should be
Sl No Ratings HT windings Remarks

Dia of HT No of HT coil/
windings wire phase
1 200 kVA 1.73 mm 4 D.P.C
4.4 The size of LT winding strips (bare) should be
Sl No Ratings Size of LT strip in mm No of strips Remarks

1 200 kVA 10 x 4.5 mm or 11.2 x 4 mm Two D.P.C
Note : The size of conductor wire/strip of LT/HT wdg of distribution T/Fs should not be less
than the specified values.
5. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
a) Core Material CROO sheet.
b) The core shall be of high grade cold rolled grain oriented annealed steel laminations having
low loss & good grain properties, coated with oil proof insulation, bolted/clamped together to
the frames firmly to prevent any vibration. All core clamping bolts if provided shall be
effectively insulated . the complete design of core must ensure permanency of the core losses
with continuous working of the transformers. The value of the flux density allowed and the
design and grade of laminations used shall be clearly stated in the offer.
c) Flux density : flux density at normal voltage (for grade-41 CRGO laminations) shall not be
more than 1.6 tesla.
d) Over flux : over flux in the transformer core shall be limited to 12.5% ensure that in the event
of over-voltage to the extent of 12.5% the core does not get saturated.
e) No load current : No load current at 100% voltage shall not be more than 2% of the full load
current shall be subject to tolerance as per ISS. No load current at 12.5% over voltage shall
not exceed 8% of the full load current. The supplier shall furnish necessary design data in
support of this stipulation.

f) Minimum number of steps of core shall be 5 nos
g) Core clamping :
i) The core clamping channel shall be size of 75 mm x 40 mm with 2 no. 12 mm dia MS

bolts for clamping efficiently.
ii) For top yoke (channel), if cut of holes are made for LV connection, suitable
reinforcement to channel shall be made.
iii) MS Channel shall be painted with oil & corrosion resistant paint before use.
iv) Core base & bottom yoke shall be supported with 75mm x 40mm M.S channel with
proper bolting together. In no case flat or cut channels shall be accepted.
6. TEMPERATURE RISE:
o
The temperature rise shall be not exceed limits of 55 C (measured by resistance ) for
transformer windings & 45oC (measured by thermometer ) for top oil , when tested in
accordance with IS- 2026-1977.
7. LOSSES AND IMPEDANCE VALUES:
7.1 The no load and load-losses shall not exceed the values given in the following table .
KVA No load losses (fixed losses) watts Load losses at 75 C

Rating
200 500 3520
These losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any plus tolerance. No
weightage in prices for offers with lower losses shall be given for these size of transforms
7.2 IMPEDANCE
The percentage impedance at 75 C shall be 4.5% subject to tolerance as per IS-2026

7.3 COOLING
All transformer shall be capable of giving a continuous output without exceeding the specified
temperature rise with ONAN cooling.
8. TRANSFORMER OIL
The transformer oil shall comply with REC specification no. 39/1985 (Appendix-I) with latest
amendment.
9. FITTINGS
a) Two no earthing terminals

b) Oil level gauge indicating three positions of oil marked as follows :
c)
i) Minimum - 5 deg C
ii) At 30 deg C
iii) Maximum 98 deg C
d) Lifting lugs & pulling lugs

e) Rating and terminal marking plates
f) Silica gel breathing devices of weather proof design
g) Drain cum sampling value made of steel of the type shown in figure (i) welded to the tank
(The special tool for operating the value shall be supplied with each transformer)
h) Thermometer pocket for 200 kVA units.
i) Filling hole having P-1-1/4 thread (with cover ) on the transformer body/conservator.

10. CONSERVATOR :
On transformer of 200 kVA, provision of conservator is obligatory. When a conservator is
fitted the oil gauge and the breathing devices shall be fixed to the conservator which shall
also be provided with a drawing plug and a filling hole with a cover. In addition, the cover of
the main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable trapped air to be released
unless the conservator is so located as to eliminate the possibility of air being trapped within
the main tank.
The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank shall be within 20
mm to 50 mm and it should project into the conservator in such a way that its ends is
approximately 20 mm above the bottom of conservator so as to create a sump for collection
of impurities. The minimum oil level (corresponding to 5 deg C) should be above the sump
level
11. INSULATION MATERIAL AND CLEARANCES

a) Materials : Electrical grade insulating craft paper and press boat is should be used.
b) Redial clearances of LV coil to core (bare conductor) shall not be less than
c) Radial clearance between HV and LV shall not be less than 10 mm to 12 mm
d) Phase to phase clearance between HV conductors shall not be less than 10 mm
e) The minimum electrical clearance between HV winding and body of the tank (between inside
surface of the tank and outside edge of the winding)
f) Minimum end insulation to earth shall be 25 mm
g) No of HV coil/phase for 200 kVA = 4 nos.
12. TANKS
12.1 TANK CONSTRUCTION
The main tank of the transformer shall be made of good quality steel having a minimum
thickness of 3.15 mm for the sides of the tank and a minimum thickness of 5.00 mm for top
and bottom plates for all ratings. The tanks shall be suitably stiffened at two places along the
height to the tank. The tank shall be capable of withstanding a pressure upto 0.8 kg/cm2. The
permanent deflection of plate after pressure has been released, shall not exceed the values
given below.
Length of plate Deflection

750 mm 5 mm
751 1250 mm 6 mm
12.2 RADIATORS
These shall be made of ERW tubes with min side thickness of 18 SWG. Theses tubes should
be used in vertic formation without any bending and properly welded on both ends to common
headers. these radiators should be individually test for leakage and pressure tests etc. before
welding with the main tank.
13. BUSHING AND TERMINALS
13.1 The bushings shall conform to IS-2090-1973, specification for high voltage porcelain
bushings
13.2 The dimensions of bushings of the following voltage classes shall conform to Indian Standard
mentioned against them.

INDIAN STANDARDS
Voltage class For porcelain parts For metal parts

Upto and including IS: 3347 (part-I/sec-I/1979) IS: 3347 (Part I/sec-2 1979)
1 kV bushings IS: 3347 (part III/sec-I/1972) IS:3347 (Part-III/Sec-2) 1982)
12 kV bushings
13.3 A minimum phase to phase clearance of 75 mm for LV (upto 1 kV bushings) and 255 mm for
rHT 3.3 kV and above) bushings shall be obtained with the bushings mounted on the
transformer.
13.4 The bushings terminal connectors both for HT and LT shall be of clamp type to directly
receive aluminium/conductors/cables without requiring use of lugs. The terminal connectors
shall be directly screwed on the stem to secure effective sealing of the bushings)
13.5 The bushings rods and nuts shall be made of brass suitable for bushings as requirement of
IS-3347 mentioned in 14.2 above.
14. SEALING GASKETS
All sealing washers/gaskets should be of grade RC-70c or RC-80b of neoprene bended cork
as per IS-4253 (P-II)-1980 (latest edition)
15. FINISH
The exterior of the transformer tank and other ferrous fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned,
scraped and given a priming coat and two finishing coats of durable oil and weather resisting
paints or enamel. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiralty grey conforming to
No. 632 of IS:5-1961 colour for ready mixed paints (second revision)
16. RATINGS AND TERMINALS MARKING PLATENS :
Each transformer shall be provided with non detachable rating and terminal marking plates of
weather proof material fitted in a visible position and showing the complete information as
given under clause 17 of IS-1980 (part I) 1981 or any authoritative standards for
transformers including the following details : -
i) Purchase order no and date

ii) Date of inspection
iii) Property of HVPN
17. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
The under base of all transformer shall be provided with two 75 x 40 mm channels, 460 mm
long with holes of 14 mm dia at a centre to centre distance of 415 mm to make them suitable
for fixing on a plat form of plinth as shown in fig. 3.
18. TESTS AND INSPECTION
All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with clause 16 of IS (part-I) 1977
18.1 ROUTINE TESTS :
All transformers shall be subject to the following routine tests at the manufacturer works in
accordance with IS-2026 and 1180 (part I)
a) Measurement of winging resistance

b) Ratio, polarity and phases relationship
c) Measurement of impedance voltage/short circuit impedance

d) Load losses
e) No load losses and no load current
f) Insulation resistance
g) Induced over voltage withstand
h) Separate source voltage withstand
i) Oil leakage test
18.2 Type tests : The following type tests shall be made on the transformers in addition to the
routine tests from (a) to (i) as indicated in 19.1 above.
i) Temperature rise test shall be carried out on one unit from each load offered for inspection
ii) Air-pressure tests: The tank shall be fixed with a dummy cover with all fittings including
bushings in position and shall be subjected to the following pressure created inside the tank :
a) 0.8 kg/cm2 above the atmospheric pressure for 10 minutes

2
b) a vacuum corresponding to (-) 0.7 kg/cm for 10 minutes. Permanent deflection of flat
plate, after pressure has been released, shall not exceed the value given below :
Length of plate Deflection

Upto 750 mm 5 mm
751 to 1250 mm 6 mm
iii) Impulse voltage withstand test on all the tree limbs of HT side as per clause 13 of ISS
2026/1991/Part-II to be conducted in presence of boards representative at some
recognized/Govt. test house. The despatches shall only be allowed after successful
conductance of this test.
iv) SHORT CIRCUIT TEST : This test shall be made in accordance with the details specified in
IS 2026/1977 and to be conducted in presence of boards representative at same recognised
/Govt. Test House. The despatches shall be allowed only after successful conductance of this
test. If short circuit tests on unit of similar design of transformer with capacity as per schedule
had been conducted earlier then certificate shall be produced and the test need not be
conducted.
v) Unbalance current test : The value of unbalance current indicated by the ammeter shall not
be more than 2% of the full load current.
The purchaser also reserve the right to get any number of additional units type tested.
However the cost shall be paid by HSEB. As such the test charges charge, theses shall be
considered as excluded and loading will be done the purchaser/its representative and without
carrying out the impulse and short circuit tests satisfactorily.
18.3 Flux Density Test :
The supplier shall arrange to conduct the flux density test on one of the cores of the
transformers in each lot so as to ensure that the flux density does not exceed the maximum
specified limit of 1.6 tesla at normal voltage & frequency.
18.4 Oil Test
Al least two samples of oil shall be drawn out of any two sizeable lots from total ordered
quantity to ensure that the oil used complies with the requirements of the specification as per
annexure 1. However inspecting officer can drawn oil samples from any number of lots if
considered necessary so as to ensure that transformer oil conforming to HSEB specification
is being used. The despatches for such lots shall be allowed only after receipt of satisfactory
oil test results.

18.5 Oil Leakage Test
The air pressure tests provided as a routine test shall be carried out on 10% of the
transformers in each lot. The firm shall ensure to get this test carried out strictly as per
relevant ISS.
18.6 Physical Check On Various Dimension (Internal & External Weight Clearance Etc.
One no transformer from each lot shall be opened for checking of core weight, size and
weight of HT and LT conductor, quantity of oil and various clearances etc.
18.7 Inspection
The inspection shall be carries out by an outside inspection agency to be nominated by the
board/boards representative. All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacturer unless otherwise specifically agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser at the time of placing the order. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector
representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy himself that the
material is being furnished in accordance with this specification.
18.8 The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at its own cost by an independent
agency whenever there is any dispute regarding the quality of supply. If the transformer fails
in the tests, the cost shall be borne by the supplier and if passes, the cost shall be borne by
the board.
19. INSULATION RESISTANCE OF WINDTGNS
The minimum insulation resistance values in mega ohms between winding and earth when
the transformer is filled with oil should be as below : -
INSULATED RESISTANCE IN MEGA OHMS BETWEEN WINDING TO EARTH
20 deg C 30 deg C 40 deg C 50 deg C 60 deg C

11000 volt (HV) 800 400 200 100 50
433 voltage (LV) 400 200 100 50 25
The insulation resistance values will be measured with a 1000 v/2500 v, preferably motorized
and of some good standard manufacturer such as M/S Evershed and Vignole make.
20. TEST VOLTAGE
Transformer shall be capable of with standing the power frequency and impulse test voltage
prescribed as below.
NOMINAL SYSTEM HIGHEST SYSTEM TMPULSE TEST POWER

VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE FREQUENCY TEST
VOLTAGE
11kV (rms) 12 kV(rms) 75 kV (rms) 28 kV(rms)
21. TOLERANCE OF ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE
Tolerance shall be according to clause 11 to IS: 2026 (part-1/general : 1977)
22. PACKING
Transformers shall be delivered suitably packed. All though the method of packing is left to
the discretion of the manufacturer, it should be robust enough for rough handling, that is
occasioned during transportation by rail/road.

23. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
The guaranteed technical particulars of the transformers offered shall be given by the
tenderer per attached.

GUARANEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
S. No. Particulars Unit of measurement

if any
1. Name of the manufacturer and place of manufacturer

2. Continuous max. rating as per this specifications KVA
3. Nominal ratio of transmission .
4. Hechod of connections /LV
5. Maximum amount density
a) Higher voltage amps per sq mm
b) Lower voltage amps per sq mm
6. Max. winding temp. (ambient air temp. on which above is based) 0 deg C
7. Max observable oil temp. (ambient air temp on which above is
based) 0 deg C
8. Estimated maximum hot spot temperature 0 deg C
9. Fixed losses at normal voltage and ratio kW
10. Load losses at normal voltage and ratio kW
11. Total losses at normal voltage and ratio kW
12. Efficiency at normal voltage and ratio
i) Unity power factor at 50% load
ii) 0.8 power factor leg load & at full load
13. Regulation as percentage of normal voltage
a) At unity power factor

b) At 0.8 power factor lagging
14. Impedance voltage at normal ratio between HV and LV wiring
15.
i) Type of transformer shell or core
ii) Name and grade of core material
16. Type of insulation used for

a) High voltage windings
b) Low voltage windings
17. HT Coil
a) Size of HT wire
b) Total no of HT turns and turns per coil section
c) Inner dia HT coil
d) Outer dia of HT coil
e) Control depth of HT coil
18. Type of insulation used on

a) Core bolts
b) Core bolt washers
c) End plates
d) Core laminations
19.
a) Size of LT wire
b) Total no of LT turns
c) Inner dia of LT coils
d) Outer dia of LT coils
e) Central depth of LT coils

20. Whether conservator is provided.
21. Whether breather is provided ?
22. Impulse test voltage level of HV and LV windings
23. Grade of oil
24. Total contents of oil ltrs
25. Whether transformer will be transported with oil ?
26.
a) Type of transformer tank
b) Thickness of top side and bottom plates
27. Approximately over all dimensions

a) Height mm
b) Breadth mm
c) Length mm
d) Tolerance mm
28. Weight of insulated conductor

a) HV kg
b) LV kg
29.
a) Weight of core kg
b) Tolerance %
30. period for which this design of transformers has been in

commercial use year
31. Resistance of winding at 75 deg C per phase
a) HV ohms
b) LV ohms
32. Reactance at current and frequency

a) HV ohms
b) LV ohms
33. Bushings characteristics
NORMAL VOLTAGE DRY WITHSTAND WET WITHSTAND IMPULSE FLASH

RATING OF KV KV OVER KV
1 2 3 4
11 kV
433 volts
34. Material of bushings rods and nuts

35. Rate of commencement of production of distribution transformers
at the factory of the bidder.

66 KV ISOLATORS AND ISOLATORS CUM EARTH SWITCH
1. SCOPE
The specification provides for design manufacture, testing at manufactures works packing
and delivery of 66kV isolators with and without earthing blades for installation at grid sub-
stations. The isolators or isolator cum earth switches shall be complete in all respects with
insulators, terminal connectors, arcing contacts, operating mechanism., interlocks auxiliary
switches, indicating devices, fixing details etc. as described herein.
The supporting structure for the isolators and isolators with earth switches are excluded from
the scope of this specification.
2. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM:
The isolators to be procured under this specification are intended to be used in 3 phase 66 kV
AC 50 cycle supply system with neutral effectively grounded.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The climatic conditions are of extreme nature varying from extreme cold to dry to tropical
humid and to hot. The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site
conditions.
TEMPERATURE
a) Maximum 50 Deg C
b) Minimum -2.5 Deg C
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
a) Maximum 100 %
b) Minimum 26 %
c) Isoceraunic level 45
d) Approx. No of rainy days/year Nearly 4 months/year.
e) Average rain fall/year 900 mm
f) Average no of dust storm days/annum 35
g) Attitude Below 1000 m above sea level
h) Max. Wind pressure 195 kg/mt sq
4. SYSTEM FREQUENCY: -
The isolators shall be suitable for giving satisfactorily service when system frequency varies
by 2.5 % from nominal 50 C/S
5. STANDARDS
The isolators with and without earth switch shall conform to the latest edition of IS : 9921.
6. TYPE
Isolators with and without earth switches shall be triple pole single throw, double break, three
posts per phase central pole rotating type. The blades shall open and close in a horizontal
plane.
Each isolator with and without earth switches shall consist of three identical pole units linked
together mechanically and shall be suitable for upright parallel mountings having triple pole
group operation. All isolators and isolators with earth switch shall operate through 90 deg
from the fully closed position to fully open position so that the break is distinct and clearly

visible from the ground level. The isolators/isolators with earth switches will have manual
operating mechanism.
7. RATINGS
The rated insulation strength of equipment shall not be lower than the levels specified in latest
IS: 9921 which are reproduced below. The isolators and earth switches are to be installed
alongwith the breakers having short time current rating 31.5 KA, 1 second.
The principle rating of the isolators shall be as under:
1 Normal system Voltage 66 kV

2 No of poles 3
3 Rated Voltage 72.5 kV
4 Continuous current 1600 Amps
5 Rated frequency 50 c/s
6 One minute power frequency withstand
Voltage to Earth and between poles 140 kV (rms)
7 Impulse withstand Voltage to Earth
& Between poles 325 kV(peak value)
8 One minute power frequency test Voltage
against isolating distance 160 kV
9 Impulse withstand voltage across
isolating distance 375 kV(peak value)
10 Phase clearance 1880 mm
11 short time current rating 31.5 KA/1 Sec
12 rated peak short time current 2.5 times the time current.
The isolator with and without earthing blades are not required to operate under load but they
must be capable to handle magnetization currents of power transformers and capacity current
of bushings, bus bar connectors short length of cables and current of voltage transformers
etc.
The isolators with and without earth switches are required to be used in electrically exposed
installation and this should be taken into account while fixing the clearance between phases
and between phase and earth.
8. TEMPERATURE RISE
In view of the severe climatic conditions at site the reference ambient temperature is to be
taken as 50 Deg C. The temperature rise for the various parts mentioned in relevant
standards shall be adjusted accordingly.
9. ISOLATOR INSULATION
Insulation to ground, insulation between open contacts and the insulation between phase of
the completely assembled isolating switch shall be capable of withstanding the dielectric test,
test voltage specified in clause 1.07 above. The phase to ground clearance shall be adequate
for the class of isolators being offered and shall be as specified in IS: 10118 with the latest
edition. Insulation between open contacts of a pole shall at least in 15% more than insulation
between the live parts of a pole to ground so that if any flash over occurs when switches
open, it shall be to the ground.
The post insulators selected shall conform to IS 2544 (with latest edition) and will be for use in
heavily polluted atmosphere and shall be specifically suitable to meet the particular
requirement of ultimate tortional strength and cantilever loads, which they will be called upon
to resist during service of the rated voltage.

The number of units in each post insulator stack should be 2/3 as well as solid core insulators
(BIL 325 kV) of 66 kV rated voltage corresponding to creepage distance for highly polluted
area. The electrical values for the complete stack should in no way be less than those
specified in IS 2544 (amended to date)
The guaranteed data and particulars of the insulators adopted for the equipment offered by
the tenderer should be given in the tender as called for in Annexure A
The porcelain shall be homogenous and free from cavities and flaws.
Design of insulators shall ensure ample insulation mechanically strength and rigidity for
satisfactory operation under site conditions. The design shall also ensure that losses caused
by capacitive currents or conduction through dielectric are minimum and that the leakage due
to moisture and dirty insulator surface is least. The insulators of the isolators and isolators
cum earth switch shall be so arranged that leakage current shall pass to earth and not
between terminals of the same pole or between poles.
All the metal caps and supports shall be cemented to the porcelain whereas the blades and
contact blocks shall be bolted to the metal parts of insulators thus making the replacement of
damaged insulator easy.
10. MAIN CONTACTS
All isolators with and without earth switches shall have heavy duty, self aligning and high
pressure relieving type fixed contacts of modern design and made of hard drawn electrolytic
copper. The various parts should be accordingly finished to ensure interchangeability of
similar components. The switch blades forming the moving contacts shall be make from
tubular section of hard drawn electrolytic copper, having suitable diameter and suitable
thickness. The contacts should be liberally dimensioned so as to withstand safely the highest
short circuit current and over voltage that may be encountered during service. The surface of
the contracts shall be rendered smooth and shall be silver place as per ISS-1771/1970 (latest
edition) In short the female contacts assemblies shall ensure:
i) Electro-dynamic withstands ability during short circuits without any risk of repulsion of
contacts.
ii) Thermal withstands ability during short circuits.
iii) Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulators stacks to tensile
stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus of flexible conductors either
because of temperature variation or otherwise.
iv) Wiping action during opening and closing.
v) Self-alignment assuring closing of switch without minute adjustment.
The earthing switches shall each be provided with three sets of suitable type of fixed contacts
below the fixed contacts assemblies of the main switches on the incoming supply side three
sets of moving contacts having gauged operation. These contacts too shall be fabricated out
of electrolytic copper.
Note: As per IS 9921 the rated peak short circuit current and the rated short time current of earthing
switching shall be at least equal to those specified for the isolator. The tenderers are required
to submit the type tests reports for the short time current rating test conducted on the earthing
contacts (earthing switches) in support of the above said contention otherwise it must be
specifically confirmed that the size of earthing contacts will be equal to the size of main
contacts.
11. ARCING CONTACTS
The isolators and isolators cum earth switches may be provided with make before and break
after arcing contracts.

12. TERMINAL CONNECTORS
Each isolator and isolator cum earth switch shall be provided with appropriate number of
bimetallic clamping type of connectors suitable for ACSR 0.2 Sq. Inch conductor. The terminal
connectors shall be suitable to receive both horizontal and vertical jumper connections. The
maximum length of the jumper that may be safely connected or any special instructions
considered necessary to avoid undue loads on the post insulators should be stated by the
tenderers in their offers.
The connectors shall have six number bolts provided with checknuts. The connectors shall
have ratings corresponding to those of isolators or higher and shall be designed most liberally
with a higher factor of safety to comply in all respects with temperature rise, resistance,
tensile strength, short circuit current with stand capacity tests as specified in IS 5561 1970
amendment thereof (latest edition). Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture of bimetallic
connectors shall conform to designation grade 4600 of IS: 617: 1975. The steel bolts, nuts,
washers and check nuts shall be hot dip galvanized. Bolts and nuts shall be of reputed make
like GKW or TISCO.
13. OPERATING MECHANISM
All isolators as isolators cum earth switches shall have separate independent manual
operation, mechanism. These should be provided with ON and OFF indicators and padlocking
arrangement for locking in both the end positions to avoid un-intentional operation. The
position whether the isolators with earth switches is in open position should be clearly visible
from ground.
The isolators/isolators cum earth switches operating mechanism should be such that they
should not come out of their or open or closed position by gravity, wing pressure vibration,
reasonable shocks or accidental touching of the connecting rods of the operating mechanism
isolators and L&E switches should be capable of resisting in closed position dynamic and
thermal effects of maximum possible short circuit currents. The operating mechanism should
be of robust construction easy to operate by a single person and conveniently located for
local operation in the switchyard at ground level.
The operating mechanism should be such that they should not come out of their open or
closed position by gravity, wind pressure vibrations, reasonable shocks or accidental touching
of the connecting rods of the operating mechanism. Isolators and L&E switches should be
capable of resisting in closed position dynamic and thermal effects of maximum possible short
circuit currents. The operating mechanism should be robust construction easy to operate by a
single person and conveniently located or the local operations in the switchyard at ground
level.
The operating mechanism alongwith its accessories shall be enclosed in a water tight,
weather proof and dust proof hot dip galvanized cubicle mad of 2 mm thick sheet steel with
hinged door complete with gaskets, butterfly locking arrangement. All working parts in the
mechanism housing shall be of corrosion resistant material and all bearing which require
greasing shall be fitted with pressure grease fittings. The bottom of auxiliary box of an isolator
should have cut outs to receive 1 no. 16c x 2.5 sq mm and 1 no 2.1 c 2.5 sq mm copper
control cable whereas that of an earth switch should have cut outs for 1 no. 16 x 2.5 mm2 and
2 nos 2c x 2.5 mm2 copper control cables. Suitable glands to make the box vermin proof shall
be provided. In addition to cable glands required for electrical interlocking between isolator
and earth switch, control cable required for electrical interlocking between isolator and earth
switch shall also be made in scope of supply.
14. INTERLOCKS
The necessary auxiliary contacts be provided on each isolator so as to have the provision for
having electrical interlocking connections with the associated equipment i.e., CBs etc.

The operation of isolating switch with respect to line earth switches shall be interlocked
mechanically so that the following requirements are full fitted.
a) It shall be possible to close the earthing switch only when the isolating switch is in the
full opened position.
b) It shall be possible to close the isolating switches only when the earthing switch is in
the fully open position.
The operation of earth switches shall also be interlocked with the PT/CVTs. Supplies from
transmission lines i.e., it shall be possible to close the earth switch only when the line is dead
form the secondary of line PTS/CVTS. The voltage from the secondaries of PTs/CVTs for the
purpose of interlocking shall be 110 / 3 V.
The operation of earth isolating switch shall not take place when the corresponding
isolator/earth switch is in the operating stroke or vice versa.
Isolators and earth switch shall be so designed that the above noted requirements can be
conveniently met. Detailed control schematic incorporating all the necessary interlocking
features mentioned shall be prepared and submitted with the tender for the approval of
purchaser. The equipment included in the scope of supply on the basis of control schematic
shall be clearly marked on the drawings.
All the mechanical interlocks shall be so designed as to prevent mal-operation at the point at
which hand power is applied. Interlock shall be of robust design of a reputed make and the
electromagnet shall be suitable for continuous energization with 110 V DC supply having +10
or 20% voltage variation.
15. AUXILIARY SWITCHES

All the isolators with and without earthing switches shall be provided with 110 voltage DC
auxiliary switches for their remote position indication on the control board and for electrical
interlocking with other equipment. Four pairs of normally open and four pairs of normally
closed silver plated contacts should be provided on the auxiliary switches for the earthing
switches. While all isolators shall have eight pairs of normally open and equal number of
normally closed contacts. Both ends of the auxiliary contacts should be brought out on
terminal board and which should be suitably housed. Separate auxiliary switches shall be
provided for isolators and earth switches. The auxiliary switches shall be of robust
construction of some reputed made and housed in weatherproof and dust tight covers
mounted on the respective operating mechanism.
All auxiliary switches shall be capable of making and continuously caring 10 AC/DC and
breaking 10A, 240V AC and 2A, 110V DC (inductive load). The terminals at the terminal
board/strip shall be suitable to receive 2.5mm2 /4mm2 copper control cable and be so
positioned to provide an easy access for external connection. The metallic portion used in the
terminal board/strip should be of brass.
16. GUARANTEED DATA AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

Guaranteed data and other technical particulars of the isolators and earthing switches and
post insulators should be given in the form of AnnexureA. Any other particulars considered
necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to those listed in the schedule.
17. DRAWING AND LITERATURES

In addition to any other drawing which tenderer may enclose to show the merits of his
equipment the following drawings shall be enclosed with the tender.
i) Drawing showing the outlines dimensions of isolating and earth switches.

ii) Drawing showing the detail of main contacts.
iii) Drawing showing the mechanical interlock between earth and isolating switches.

iv) Drawing showing the electrical connections of control cables.
v) Drawing showing for equipment for electrical interlocking.
vi) Drawing showing operating mechanism.
vii) Drawing showing details of bimetallic terminal connector.
Descriptive literature explaining the construction of various operating mechanism of the

isolating and earth switches and control scheme shall be enclosed in addition to a spare parts
catalogue. The successful tender shall submit the above drawings in quadruplicate to the
CE/D&P, sub station design DTE., HVPN, Vidyut Nagar, Hisar for approval and subsequently
a set of reproducible copies of approved drawings in ink and 20 sets of all the approved
drawings shall be supplied alongwith 4 nos of instruction manuals explaining the construction,
various operating mechanism, control scheme, erection, operation and maintenance of the
isolators and L&E switches per isolators and L&E switches. The drawings received without
the write-up of the control scheme will be considered incomplete.
18. BEARINGS
The design and construction of various bearings shall embody all the features required to
withstand climatic conditions specified so as to ensure dependable and effective operation
even after long periods of inaction of these isolator & switches. All the bearings in the current
path except those specially designed, as flexible copper conductors of adequate cross section
should flexible copper conductor of adequate cross section should shunt high-pressure
contacts. Bearing housing should be weatherproof. Facilities should be provided for
lubrication of bearing.
All the bearings shall be filled with first filling of grease and provided with nipples for
servicing.
19. DESIGN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

The tenderer shall be responsible for coordination and adequate design. All material used in
the construction of equipment shall be of the highest quality appropriate class well finished
and of approved design and make. All similar parts should be accurately finished and
interchangeable.
All ferrous parts shall be heavily hot dip galvanised. Bolts nuts pipe and washers etc. used on
the isolators shall also be galvanised. Special attention shall be paid to give tropical treatment
to all equipment as it will be subjected during service to extremely severe exposure to
atmospheric moisture and to long period of high ambient temperature all current carrying
parts shall be of non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed to limit sharp points/edges
and similar sharp faces.
20. TESTS
Each isolator and earth switch shall strictly comply with the requirements of all the type tests
and shall be subjected to all routine tests stipulated in the relevant standard (latest edition).
All tests shall be made on each isolator and earth switch prior to offer the material for
inspection. The works test results alongwith their internal inspection reports shall be
submitted at the time of offering the material for inspection. Selected nos of isolator and earth
switch shall be subjected to all the routine and acceptance test. At least one no. isolator-cum-
earth switch shall be subjected to temp rise test in the presence of representative of
purchaser and the test results in quadruplicate shall be supplied to the purchaser for its
approval by the purchaser before the dispatch of the material.
Copies of the type tests already performed on similar type of isolators alongwith drawings
duly certified by testing accuracy indicating dimensions/ material used must be enclosed with
the tender to judge the merits of the equipment offered by the tenderer.

21. SPARES
The bidder shall quote item wise unit price in respect of spares recommended for 5 years
continuous operation of isolator and isolator-cum-earth switches alongwith all accessories.
The spare parts shall include but not be limited to the ones mentioned in Annexure-B. The
quality of spare parts in respect of the item referred in the list shall be 10% of the total
quantity of individual items in respect of all the isolators and L&E switches ordered except
isolators which shall be 5% of the total quantity while working out 10% or 5% of the total
quantity of items, the next whole number shall be considered for procurements
22. COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT

Any fittings accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in
these specification but which are necessary for the satisfactory working of the isolators and
earth switch shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply. All equipment
shall be complete in all details whether such details are mentioned in these specifications or
not.
23. CABLE AND BOXES

Cable glands for terminating multi-core control cable shall be provided whatever required. The
supply shall included necessary connecting material for mounting of cable and boxes on the
isolator structures in accessible position clear of the floor level to make the jointing work easy.
24. SUPPORTING STRUCTURES

All isolators and earthing switches shall be mounted rigidly in an upright position on their own
supporting structures and not on the line or bus bar structures. The supporting structures will
be arranged by the purchaser. The isolators should have requisite fixing details for mounting
than on supporting structures.
25. DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATION

Should the tenderer wish to deviate from the provisions of the specification either on account
of manufacturing practice or my other reasons, he shall draw attention to the proposed points
of deviation in his tender and submit such full information/drawings and specification so that
the merits of this proposal may be fully understood. This specification shall be held binding
unless the deviations have been fully recorded as required.
26. TRAINING
If required the successful tender shall arrange for the training of one or two Boards engineers
so as to make them familiar with the manufacturing and assembly process of the equipment
covered by this specification. The boarding and lodging expenses of the trainees shall
however be borne by the Board.

Annexure A
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED DATA AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 66KV

ISOLATORS AND ISOLATOR WITH EARTH SWITCH.
1. Makers name and country of origin
2. Manufacturers type designation.
3. Rated voltage (kV)
4. Max. Permissible continuous service voltage kV
5. Rated frequency
Rated supply for operation mechanism
6. No of poles.
7. No of breaks per phase.
8. Indoor or outdoor.
9. Whether manual or remote operated.
10. Clearance in air (minimum)

i) Between phases and earth mm
ii) Between phases mm
ii) Distance between centres of outer stacks of
insulators (mm)
11. Power frequency withstand test voltage for completely assembled switches.
a) Against ground.
i) Dry kV
ii) Wet kV
b) Across open contacts

i) Dry kV
ii) Wet kV
c) Between phases
i) Dry kV
ii) Wet kV
12. Impulse withstand test voltage of completely assembled switch without arising horns with
1.2/50 micro second impulse wave.
a) Against ground kV (peak)

b) Across the open ends of the same phase kV (peak)
c) Between phases kV (peak)
13. Particulars of the main contacts ie. fixed contacts (main

switch and parting switch) and moving contacts (main
switch and earth switch)
a) Type
b) Material.
c) Surface treatment and thickness of surface coating.
d) Contacts area.
e) Contact pressure.

14. Current density at minimum cross section of switch
blade. Amps/sq. mm
15. Continuous current rating. Amps
16. Short time current rating.

i) For one second kA(rms)
17. Rated peak short circuit current kA (peak)
18. Rated peak short circuit current of earthing blade. kA (peak)
19. Momentary current kA (rms)
20. Temp. rise corresponding to : -

a) Max. continuous current ratings at 50o ambient
temperature 0o
b) Short time current rating
i) For one second 0o
21. Type test report for thermal limiting current (copy to be

enclosed).
22. Max. Transformer magnetizing breaking current which

can be safely interrupted by the switch Amps.
23. Max. Capacitive current which can be safely interrupted

by the switch. Amps
24. Max. Current that can be safely interrupted between

equipotential . Amps
25. No. of operation which the switch can withstand without

deterioration of contacts.
26. No. of times the switch can be operated without any

need for inspection.
27. Auxiliary switches.

a) No of normally open and normally closed
contracts (main as well as earthing switch) .
b) Rate voltage Volts
c) Rated current Amps.
d) Test voltage Volts
28. Phase to phase distance mm
29. Type of mounting
30. Torsional strength cm/kg
31. Cantilever strength of isolators

a) Upright kg.
32. Location and type of bearings
33. Particulars of rotating insulator unit valves. Stack valves 66 kV

i) Make
ii) Type
iii) Number of units per stack.
iv) Failing load in bending (upright) kg.
v) Failing load in bending (inverted) kg.
vi) Failing load in intersion kg.
vii) Failing load in compression kg.
viii) Failing load torque in MKg.
ix) Overall weight of post insulator kg.
x) Overall diameter post insulator MM
xi) Total creepage distance mm.
xii) Protected creepage distance mm
xiii) Dry one minute power frequency withstand voltage
xiv) Wet one minute power frequency withstand voltage kV
xv) Dry impulse withstand voltage +ve/-ve kV
xvi) Dry impulse flashover voltage +ve/-ve kV
xvii) Power frequency rupture voltage per unit kV
xviii) Hissing voltage at which the audible discharge can be
detected.
xix) Drawing reference number.
xx) Weight of unit.
34. Power required by DC interlocking coil at 110 volts and

its male Watts.
a) Power required by operating mechanism Watts.
35. Safety factor taken into account while designing the

isolator.
36. Whether connectors provided and if so indicate the type

and material used.
37. Whether arcing contacts provided and if so given type

and material used.
38. Whether separate operating mechanism provided for

operating of main blade and earthing blades.
39. Tolerance permissible in the DC operating voltage volts

DC.
40. Weight of one three pole isolating switch with earth

blades. Kg.
41. Wt. of one three pole isolating switch without earthing

blade. Kg.
42. Type of interlock between isolating switch and earth

switch.
43. Torque required to open the switch.
44. Drawings of reference.

a) Without earth blades.
b) With earthing blades.
45. Wt. Of operating mechanism.

46. Type and details of interlocks provided.
47. Deviation from this specification.

Annexure B
Sl No. Name of Item
1. Moving contacts.
2. Fixed contact (Y/O earth blade)
3. Auxiliary switch for main switch.
4. Auxiliary switch for earthing switch.
5. Electrical interlocking coil
6. Insulators.
7. Bimetallic terminal connector suitable for 0.2 sq. ACSR conductor (panther)

66 KV LIGHTING ARRESTOR
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing before despatch at
manufacturers works and delivery of 66 kV Metal oxide surge arrestor without gap having
non-liner resistance connection in series/parallel without any integrated series or parallel
spark gap alongwith surge monitors insulting base complete in all respect as detailed in the
Schedule of quantities
2. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM.
The 66 kV LAs shall be suitable for use on 66 kV solidly grounded 3 phase systems having a
normal frequency of 50 Hz subject to variation of 3%. The highest system voltage normally
to be expected at side may be taken as 72.5 kV
3 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The equipment is recorded to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions
i) Temperature
a) Maximum 0 Deg C.
b) Minimum .5 Deg C
ii) Relative Humidity

a) Maximum 100%.
b) Minimum 26%
iii) Isoceraunic level 45

iv) Approximately no. of rainy days/nearly 120 days/year.
v) Average rain fall/year 900 mm
vi) Altitude above mean sec below 1000 M
vii) Max. Wind pressures 195 kg/Mtr. Sq.
viii) Average number of dust
Storm, days per annum 35 days.
The reference ambient temperature may be taken as 50 Deg C.
4. GRADING RINGS
The LAs shall have corona free operation where ever necessary electrostatic
screens/grading rings shall be provided
5. THERMAL CONNECTORS
The LAs shall be provided with appropriate number of solderless adentable type terminal
connectors suitable for conductors of size upto 0.4 sq. copper equivalent ACSR conductors.
Each terminal clamp shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal connection of the
transmission line conductor. Each equipments shall further be provided with appropriate
number of grounding terminal connectors suitable for 50 x 6-mm size steel flat for grounding
connection s
6. MOUNTING
All LAs shall be suitable for mounting either on concrete foundation plinth or steel structures.
The necessary flange, foundation bolts or clamps, nuts etc for the base of the lightening

arrestors shall be supplied and these shall be galvanized. The tender shall supply the
requisite information and data for the design of supporting pedestal structures.
Insulation bases for mounting of the arrestors with attachment of surge monitors shall be
quoted for separately in the tender.
7. METAL PARTS
All ferrous parts of LAs shall be heavily hot dip galvanized. The bolts, nuts, screens, sins etc
used on these equipment shall be galvanized.
All current carrying parts shall be non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall designed to avoid
sharp points, edges and sharp faces.
Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in
these specifications but which are useful or otherwise necessary for the proper operation of
the equipment shall be deemed to have been included in the contract.
9. TYPE AND INSTALLATION
These surge arresters shall be self-supporting type and suitable for out door installation
without any protection against rain, dust and direct rays of the sun. The arresters shall be of
modern design having non-linear metal oxide resistors connected in series and or in parallel
without any integrated series or parallel spark gaps. Grading impedence, in particular, grading
capacitors connected in parallel to one single or to a group of non-linear metal oxide resistors
to grade voltage distribution along the arrester stack shall be provided. The arresters shall be
station class heavy-duty type.
Surge arresters shall be mounted on raised steel structures to provide adequate ground
clearance. The tenderer shall supply the requisite information and data for the design of
supporting structures, which will be arranged by the purchaser. Necessary connecting
materials such as fixing bolts, nuts, washers etc. for mounting the equipment on the
supporting structures shall be included in the scope of supply. The minimum safety clearance
of ground end of the arresters shall be 2.5 meters. Data regarding minimum recommended
phase to phase spacing between arresters and the clearance between ground objects
required at various heights of arresters shall be mentioned in the tender.
10. a) STANDARDS
Surge arrestors shall confirm to the provisions of the latest amendment IEC draft specification
TC-37 WG-4 (part-3) except for the modifications which may be necessary to meet the
requirements of this specification. Equipment manufactured to any other authoritative
standard ensuring an equal or better performance may also be considered for acceptance.
Where the equipment offered conforms to any standard other than latest amendment IEC
draft specification TC-37 WG 4(part 3) the salient points of difference between the
standard proposed IEC. Draft specification shall be suitable elaborated. English copy of the
standard if proposed other than IS: 3070 part I and IEC draft specification TC-37 WG-4 (part
3) shall be submitted with the tender.
b) PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE
Single phase to ground fault currents in the 66 kV system may be assumed as 25 kA. Surge
arrestor shall therefore, be fitted with efficient pressure relief devices and suitable for relieving
internal pressure and preventing explosive shattering of porcelain housing and providing path
for flow of the rated fault currents in the event of arrestor failure. The pressure relief devices
shall be of class-A as per table VI of IEC-TC-37WG-4. Tender shall enclose details

information and literature of the pressure relief device. Surge arrestor without pressure relief
devices shall not be accepted.
11. SEALING
Each individual unit of surge arrestor shall be hermetically sealed and fully protected against
ingress of moisture. The hermetic seal shall be effective for the end life of arrestor and under
the service conditions be specified. The tenderer shall furnish section view of the arrestor,
showing details of sealing employed.
12. SYSTEM VOLTAGE
The nominal and highest system voltage of the system will be as follows
Nominal system voltage 66 kV

Highest system voltage 72.5 kV
13. RATING:
The LAs shall have the following ratings
1. Rated arrestor voltage 60 kV (station class)

2. Nominal of discharge of current 10 kA having 8/20 ms wave
3. Max, discharge current with 4/10 micro sec. wave 65 kA
4. Max. Continuous operating voltage 49 kV (rms)
5. Max. Switching surge protective level voltage at 500 amp 140 kV (peak)
6. Max. Residual voltage of steep fronted current impulse of 10 kA 186 kV (peak)
7. Min. Thermal discharge capability As per class
8. Max. Residual voltage for 10 kA discharge current of 8/20 micro
second wave. 170 kV (peak)
9. Min. Total creepage distance of arrestor hosing 1800 mm
10 Impulse withstand voltage of arrestor housing with 1.2/50 micro
second wave 325 kV(P)
11. Long duration current Class- 2
12. Temporary power frequency over voltage withstands capability
for arrestor.
a) For 100 seconds 1.1 times rating

b) For 10 second 1.2 times rating
c) For 1 second. 1.3 times rating
d) For 0.1 second 1.35 times rating
14. IMPULSE WITHSTAND VOLTAGE OF TIL EQUIPMENT
The basic insulation level of the transformers and other equipment of 66 kV side is 325
kV(peak)the transmission line and the sub-station are shielded by overhead ground wire
intended to protect the equipment against the direct strokes.
15. EQUIPMENT TO BE PROTECTED.
The LAs shall be used for protection against lightening and switching surge on wave traps,
capacitor isolating switches, circuit breakers, current transformers, capacitive voltage
transformer, power transformers and other sub-stations equipment. Basic insulation level of
transformer and other sub station equipment adopted on 66 kV system are 325 kV (peak)
16. GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The surge arrestors shall be designed according to the latest techniques and developments
incorporating the most modern design features such as thermally stable non-liner resistors

and internal voltage grading resistors and capacitors. The characteristic of the non-linear
metal oxide resistors shall be properly coordinated so as to ensure satisfactory operation of
arrestors under switching and line discharge surge. Number and rating of units per phase as
well as number and rating of non-linear resistors per unit shall be clearly stated.
The arrestors shall be designed to provide max. Possible protection against lightening and
switching surge and shall have capacity to discharge reportedly such transient voltages likely
to reach the sub-stations.
It is essential that energy of these transients shall be satisfactorily dissipated and that there
shall also be no possibility of the arrrestor reflecting or resonating the transients back on the
protected equipment of line.
The arrestors shall be of single phase construction and shall have fittings made of corrosion
proof material. Special care shall be taken on the design of arrestors to avoid stresses due to
large variations of temperature at site
17. PLACE OF INSTALLATION
The LAs would be suitable for outdoor installations without any protection from rain, dust and
direct rays of the sun in normally polluted atmosphere. The tenderer shall state the safe
distance upto which the lightening arrestors shall afford complete protection.
18. MAGNITUDE OF EARTH RESISTANCE
Earth resistance of the comment sub-station ground mats to which the grounding leads of LAs
shall be connected may be upto 1 ohm.
19. PORCELAIN HOUSING
The insulating casing of the arrestors shall be made of vet process electrical porcelain free
from cavities and other flaws etc and properly vitrified. The shade design shall be such as to
minimize surface contamination by natural action of wind and rain. The creepage distance
shall be large enough to ensure that the resulting surface contamination under site conditions
does not adversely affect the arrestor operation. The creepage distance shall be at least 1800
mm corresponding to heavily polluted atmosphere.
The ratio interference level shall be negligible. The withstand strength power frequency and
impulse voltage of the porcelain housing when the characteristic elements of the arrestors are
removed shall be stated in the tender.
20. SURGE MONITOR

Each LA shall be provided with a recording type surge monitor vertical mounting. The surge
monitor will register when a lighting surge passes through the LA. The number of discharges
recorded by the monitor shall be visible through an inspection window.
Each surge monitor shall have terminals for connections with the earthing lead of LA and so
arranged as to enable the incoming and outgoing connections to be made with minimum
bands. Materials for connecting surge monitor to the LA shall be supplied by the tenderer.
Grounding terminal of the surge counter shall be suitable to accommodate steel having
current carrying capacity equivalent to 0.4 sq. mm inch copper equivalent.
ACSR conductor, proper functioning of the surge monitors with Las shall be guaranteed by
the supplier. The price of the surge monitors is to be quoted, separately.

21. MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
All material used in manufacture of equipment shall be of the best quality obtainable of their
respective kind and the whole of the work shall be highest class well finished and approved
design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes, flaws, cracks and other defects and
shall be smooth, close grained and of true from dimension. All machined surface shall be true
and smooth finished.
22. DRAWING
In addition to any drawing that the tenderer may like to supply the following drawing shall be
enclosed with the tenderer.
a) Drg. showing the outline of complete

b) Drg. showing the sectional view of the LAs
c) Drg. showing the details of pressure relieving device.
d) Drg. showing clearance from ground object and between two adjoining poles of light arrestors
required at various height of LAs
e) Drg. showing the mounting details.
f) Drg. showing the details of terminals .
g) Drg. showing the details of surge monitors
Descriptive literature explaining action of the LAs and principles of operation of the surge
monitor shall be enclosed with the tender.
23. INSPECTION AND TESTS
The equipment and material shall comply with the requirement of the type test and be
subjected to/acceptance routine tests as specified in the governing standards except where
other wise agreed under this specification. All charges for the test shall be covered in the
prices quoted for the equipment and nothing extra shall be intimated by the contractor in
advance to enable the purchaser to arrange for inspection during manufacture, if so desired.
The contractor shall also notify the readiness of equipment for final inspection by the
purchaser, unless otherwise agreed, all equipment shall be inspected and all acceptance and
routine tests witnessed by the purchasers representative before despatch of consignments
from manufacturers works. The test reports should be submitted in quadruplicate all rest
reports whether for the type test on for the routing/acceptance tests, shall be got approx. from
the purchaser before the despatch of equipment.
A) TYPE TESTS :
The surge arrestors shall comply with the requirement of following type tests as per latest
amendment of IEC draft specifications IEC-37 WG-4 part 3
a) Insulation withstand tests

b) Residual voltage tests.
c) Current impulse withstands tests.
d) Pressure relief tests.
e) Artificial pollution tests.
f) Temperature cycle test on porcelain housing
g) Galvanizing tests on exposed steel metal parts.
h) Visual examination
i) Porosity test for porcelain components.
j) Operating duty tests.
The type tests reports of all the tests carried out on similar type of arrestors shall be furnished
with tender in support of guaranteed technical particulars. Reports of additional type tests for
extra over voltage to prove withstand capability of the surge arrestor, pollution test earth
quake withstand capability test and HV test etc. shall also be enclosed with the tender.

The tenderer shall have to carry out type tests at his own cost and get these approved from
the purchaser, if any such test have not been carried out on the arrestor of similar design in
the past or if the test report furnished for any type test is not found acceptable by the
purchaser. Further, more, the purchaser may like to get some of the type tests to be
otherwise repeated. As such, the charges for conducting the after mentioned additional type
tests as well all the type tests as per IEC-37 WG-4 part 3 shall be indicated in the bid
separately for each tests.
B) ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The purchaser intends to get the following acceptance tests as per IEC-37 WG-4 part 3
carried out and reserve the right to witness the same without additional charge. The
satisfactory working of the testing kit of the surge monitor shall also be demonstrated at the
time of inspection.
i) Measurement of power frequency voltage at reference current.

ii) Lighting impulse residual voltage test.
iii) Special stability thermal test.
C) ROUTINE TESTS.
The following routine tests as per provision of latest amendment of IEC-37 WG-4 (part3)
covering on all completed arrestors and/or proportionate prorated units shall be carried out
on completed arrestors or its individual unit on the selected Nos. of samples in presence of
purchasers representatives if so desired and no additional payments shall be admissible for
carrying our routine tests and repeating these tests on the arrestor during inspection whether
at the suppliers own or their sub-contractors premises.
i) Measurement of reference voltage on units

ii) Residual voltage test
iii) Ratio interface test.
D) TYPE TEST ON SURGE MONITORS
Type tests report on surge monitor shall be submitted with the tender.
The supplier will be responsible for proper functioning of the surge monitor with the surge
arrestor. Test certificates of testes conducted to prove that the surge counter will register
every impulse which caused arrestor to ignite and that installation of surge counter with
current monitor will have practically no effect on the arrestor spark over voltage and will
residual voltage shall be submitted for approval of the purchaser
Before despatching the equipment. With the monitor connected in series with the arrestor
and the rated voltage applied across it, the reading of the current meter will be checked to
ensure that the meter reads the grading current of the arrestors.
Tenderer shall clearly state the testing facilities available at their or the manufacturers work
for routine, acceptance and type test.
24. INSTRUCTION PLATE AND CHARGING
All name plate, instruction plates, warning signal and any marking what so ever on the
equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in English language. In order to facilitate
sorting and erection at site, every arts of the equipment shall be suitable marked.

9 KV -LIGHTENING ARRESTER 11 kV
1. SCOPE
This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturers works

packing and F.O.R. delivery of metal oxide (gap less) surge Arresters for 11 kV system and
other accessories as per Schedule of quantities.
1.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and construction of
surge arresters. However, surge arresters shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
design and workmanship and be capable of performing in continues commercial operation
upto tenderers guarantee in a manner acceptable to purchaser, who will interpret the
meaning of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work or
material which in his judgement are not in accordance there with. The arresters offered shall
be complete with all parts, necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such
components shall be deemed to be within the scope of tenders supply, irrespective of whether
they are specifically brought out in the commercial order or not.
2. STANDARDS
Lighting arresters shall conform to the latest edition available at the time of supply of the
standards listed below: -
i) IEC-99-4 : Specification for surge arresters without gap

for AC system.
ii) ISS-3070/93 part 3 : Specification for lighting arresters for

alternating current system.
iii) ISS-4759 : Hot-dip zinc coating on structural steel and

other allied products.
iv) ISS-2633 : Method for testing uniformity of coating on

zinc coated particles.
v) IS-5621 : Specification for large hollow porcelain for

use in electrical installation.
vi) ISS-5561 : Electrical power connectors
vii) ISS-8704 : Method for artificial pollution tests on high

voltage insulators for use on AC system.
For the purpose of this specification all the technical terms used, shall have the meaning as
per IEC/BIS specification
2.1 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure
equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where
the equipments offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of
difference between the standards adopted and the specified standards shall be clearly
brought out in the tender. Four copies of the reference standard in English language shall be
furnished alongwith the offer.

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions
i) Temperature
a) Maximum 50 Deg C
b) Minimum - 2.5 Deg C
ii) Relative humidity

a) Maximum 100%
b) Minimum 26%
iii) Isocerounic level 45

iv) Approx. no of rainy days/year 120 days nearly
v) Average rain fall/year 900 mm
vi) Altitude above mean sea level Below 1000 meters
vii) Maximum wind pressure 195 kg/m2
viii) Average number of dust storm days per annum 35
The reference ambient temperature may be taken as 50o C
4. TERMINAL CONNECTORS
The lighting arresters shall be provided with appropriate number of terminal connectors
conforming to ISS 5561, suitable for conductors of size 0.2 sq. inch copper equivalent
ACSR conductors. Each terminal clamp shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal
connection of the transmission line conductor. Each equipment shall further be provided with
two number of grounding terminal connections suitable for 50 x 6-mm size steel flat for
grounding connection.
5. MOUNTINGS
All LAs shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures. The necessary flanges, foundation
bolts or clamps nuts etc. for the base of the lighting arresters, shall be supplied and these
shall be galvanized. The tenderer shall supply the requisite information and data for the
design of supporting pedestal structures: -
6. METAL PARTS
All ferrous parts of lighting arresters shall be heavily hot-dip galvanized. The bolts, nuts,
screws, pins etc. used on these equipment shall be galvanized. All current carrying parts shall
be non-ferrous metal alloys and shall be designed to avoid sharp points, edges and sharp
faces.
7. NAME PANEL
The arrester shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name-plate indelibly marked with the
following information:
i) HVPN.
ii) Purchase order no.
iii) Manufacturers name of trademark and identification of the supplier arrester.
iv) Rated voltage.
v) Maximum continuous operating voltage.
vi) Type
vii) Rated frequency
viii) Nominal discharge current.
ix) Long duration discharge class
x) Pressure relief current in kA (rms.)

xi) Year of manufacture.
8. PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES : -
Surge arresters shall be fitted with efficient pressure relief devices and arc diverting parts and
suitable for relieving internal pressure, preventing explosive shattering of porcelain housing
and providing path for flow of the rated fault currents in the event of Arrester failure. The
pressure relief device shall be of Class A of 40-kA rms. as per table VI of IEC-99-4
specification. Tenderer shall enclose detailed information and literature of pressure relief
device. Surge arresters without pressure relief device shall not be accepted.
Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in
these specification but which are useful or otherwise necessary for the proper operation of the
equipment shall be deemed to have been included in the contract.
10. TYPE AND INSTALLATION
These surge arresters shall be self-supporting type and suitable for out door installation
without any protection against rain, dust and direct rays of the sun. The arresters shall be of
modern design having non-linear metal oxide resistors connected in series and or in parallel
without any integrated series or parallel spark gaps. Grading impedence, in particular, grading
capacitors connected in parallel to one single or to a group of non-linear metal oxide resistors
to grade voltage distribution along the arrester stack shall be provided. The arresters shall be
station class heavy-duty type.
Surge arresters shall be mounted on raised steel structures to provide adequate ground
clearance. The tenderer shall supply the requisite information and data for the design of
supporting structures, which will be arranged by the purchaser. Necessary connecting
materials such as fixing bolts, nuts, washers etc. for mounting the equipment on the
supporting structures shall be included in the scope of supply. The minimum safety clearance
of ground end of the arresters shall be 2.5 meters. Data regarding minimum recommended
phase to phase spacing between arresters and the clearance between ground objects
required at various heights of arresters shall be mentioned in the tender.
11. SYSTEM PARAMETERS
1) System Three phase AC supply neutral effectively

earthed.
2) Nominal system voltage 11 kV
3) Highest system voltage 12 kV
4) System frequency 50 1.5 C/S
5) Minimum prospective symmetrical fault
current for 1 second at arrester location 25 kA rms.
6) 1.2/50 micro second wave impulse voltage
with stand level of :
i) Transformers 75 kV(P)
ii) Other equipment and lines to be protected 75 kV(P)
7) Connection Phase to earth.
12. RATINGS
The surge arresters shall have the following principal parameters: -
i) Rated arresters voltage 9 kV (station class)

ii) Nominal discharge current with 8/20 micro
second wave shape 10 kA

iii) High current impulse withstand 4/10 micro
second wave shape 100 kA (P)
iv) Max. Continuous operating voltage 7 kV rms.
v) Max. Residual voltage for nominal discharge
current 10 kA with 8/20 micro second wave. 28 kV (P)
vi) Max switching surge protective level voltage
at 500 amps 21 kV (P)
vii) Max residual voltage for steep fronted
current impulse of 10 kA 25 kV (P)
viii) Minimum thermal discharge capability As per class 1
ix) Minimum total creepage distance arrester
housing 300 mm
x) Pressure relief class Class A 40 kA (rms.)
xi) Long duration current As per class I
13. EQUIPMENT OF TO BE PROTECTED
The lightning arrester shall be used for protection against lighting and switching surge on
isolating switches, circuit breakers, current transformers, power transformers and other sub-
station equipment, basic insulation level of transformer and other sub-station equipment have
been given in clause 11 (6)
14. GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENT
The surge arresters shall be designed according to the latest technique and developments
incorporating the most modern design features such as thermally stable non-linear resistors
and internal voltage grading resistors and capacitors. The characteristics of the non-linear
metal oxide resistors shall be properly coordinated so as to ensure satisfactory operation of
arresters under switching and line discharge surges. Number and rating of units per phase as
well as number and rating of non-linear resistor per unit shall be clearly stated.
The arresters shall be designed to provide maximum possible protection against lighting and
switching surges and shall have ample capacity to discharge repeatedly such transient
voltage, likely to reach the sub-stations. It is essential that energy of these transients shall be
satisfactorily dissipated and that there shall be no possibility of the arresters reflecting or
resonating the transient back on the protected equipment of line.
The arrestors shall be capable of repeated successful operations for discharging transmission
line and shall be capable of satisfactory operation within stipulated limits against lighting and
switching surges.
The arresters shall be of single-phase construction and shall have fittings made of corrosion
proof material. Special care shall be taken in the design of arresters to avoid stresses due to
large variations of temperature at site.
15. MAGNITUDE OF EARTH RESISTANCE
Earth resistance of the common sub-station ground mats to which the grounding leads of LAs
shall be connected may be upto 2 ohms.
16. PORCELAIN HOUSING
The insulating casting of the arresters shall be made of wet process electrical porcelain free
from cavities and other flaws etc. and properly vitrified. The shade design shall be such as to
minimize surface contamination by nature action of wind and rain. The creepage distance
shall be large enough to ensure that the resulting surface contamination under site conditions
does not adversely effect the arrester operation. The creepage distance shall be as per
clause 12.00 corresponding to heavily polluted atmosphere.

The radio interference level shall be negligible. The with stand strength regarding power
frequency and impulse voltage of the porcelain housing when the characteristics elements of
the arresters are removed shall be stated in the tender.
17. TESTS AND INSPECTION
No surge arrester shall be dispatched without inspection and testing. The inspection may be
carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The tenderer shall grant free
access to the purchasers representative at reasonable time when the work is in progress.
Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this specification by the purchaser, shall
not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the
specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if the equipment is found to be
defective.
The supplier shall carry out all the routine tests as per relevant IEC/ISS (latest edition) on
each LA and shall submit the test results alongwith their internal inspection report prior to
offering the material for inspection
.
17.1 TYPE TESTS
All the type tests specified in IEC-99-4/ISS-3070-3/93 specification and mentioned below shall
be carried out by the supplier in the presence of purchasers representative. Unit rate for each
test shall be quoted. In case type tests have already been conducted on similar type of units
at Govt. Testing laboratory or at any other reputed testing laboratory acceptable to purchaser,
copies of the test report shall e submitted by the tenderer alongwith the offer. The tenders
offering the equipment without supporting type test certificates are liable to be rejected. The
purchaser reserve the rights to request the supplier to carry out one or all the type tests, if felt
necessary: -
i) Insulation withstand test.

ii) Residual voltage tests.
iii) Current impulse withstand test.
iv) Operating duty tests.
v) Pressure relief tests.
vi) Artificial pollution tests.
vii) Tests of arrester disconnection.
17.2 ROUTINE ACCEPTANCE TESTS : -
Following routine acceptance tests as per provision of the latest amendment of IEC-99-4/ISS-
3070-3 shall be carried out on complete arresters or its individual unit on the selected nos. of
sample in the presence of purchasers representative and no additional payments shall be
admissible for carrying out these tests on the arrester during inspection whether at the
suppliers own or their sub-contractors promises.
i) Measurement of reference voltage.

ii) Residual voltage tests.
iii) Satisfactory absence from partial discharges and contact noise shall be checked on
each unit.
iv) Leakage test on arrester units with sealed housing.
v) Visual examination.
17.3 All the routine test certificates as per relevant ISS of the insulators used for LAs shall be
submitted at the time of inspection.

18. DRAWINGS
The tenderes shall furnish one set of following drawings alongwith their offer:
i) General outline drawings of the complete arrester with technical parameters.

ii) Drawing showing clearance from grounded and other live objects and between
adjacent poles of surge arresters required at various heights of arrester.
iii) Drawing showing details of pressure relief devices.
iv) Mounting details of surge arrester.
v) Details of line terminal and ground terminals.
vi) The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing such as internal diameter,
outer diameter, thickness and insulator details such as height, profiles of petti coats
angel of inclination and gap between successive petti-coats total creepage distance
etc.
The successful tenderer shall within four weeks of placement of order submit four sets of final
version of all the above said drawings for purchasers approval. The purchaser shall
communicate his comments/approval on drawings to the supplier within a period of 4 weeks.
The supplier shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of the
modified drawings for purchasers comments which will be approved within 15 days. After
receipt of purchasers approval and supplier shall submit 4 sets of drawings and the literature
containing erection, operating and maintenance instructions per set (of 3 no) of LAs for the
reference of four field organization. A set of reproducible of the approved drawings too will be
supplied for purchasers use.
Dispatch instructions shall be given only after receipt of above drawings and literature.
18.1 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.
18.2 Approval of drawings by purchase shall not relieve the supplier of any of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the
requirement of latest revision of applicable standards of engineering, design and
workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of supply and purchaser
shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgement is not in
accordance therewith.
19. GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : -
The guaranteed and other technical particulars as called for in Annexure A shall be furnished
alongwith the tender. The particulars, which are subject to tolerance, shall be clearly marked.

Annexure A
TECHNICAL AND GUARANTEED PARTICULARS FOR LIGHTING ARRESTERS
1. Name of the manufacturer

2. Country of origin
3. Standard specification on which performance is eased.
4. Manufacturers type designation
5. Rated voltage (rms.) kV
6. Continuous operating voltage kV
7. Reference voltage kV
8. Watt-loss at continuous operating voltage Watt/kV
9. Watt-loss at rate voltage Watt/kV
10. Leakage current at C.O.V mA
11. Leakage current at rated voltage mA
12. Nominal discharge current (8/20 micro second wave) kA
13. Reference current A
14. Max. residual voltage for 8/20 micro second discharge
current
a) At 0.5 times nominal discharge current kV (peak)

b) At nominal discharge current kV (peak)
c) At twice the nominal discharge current kV (peak)
15. Max. switching surge protective with level voltage at 500

amp kVP
16. Steep front current impulse residual voltage test with 1
micro second front time current wave of 10 kA peak kVP
17. High current impulse withstand (4/10 micro second
wave) kAP
18. Long duration current impulse rating
a) Peak current A
b) Virtual duration of peak Micro second.
c) Line discharge class of arrester
19. Power frequency voltage withstand of arrester insulation

(rms)
a) Dry kV
b) Wet kV
20. Total creepage distance mm

21. Lightning impulse withstand voltage of arrester kVP.
22. Type of non-linear resistor disc size (dia, height)
23. No of non-linear discs section of arrester.
24. No of sections in one arrester
25. Material of retainer used inside lighting arrester bakelite,
ceramic rubber or other material.
26. Is pressure relief device provided, if so, its class ?
27. Overall dimensions :
a) Height mm
b) Diameter mm
28. Net weight kg.

29. Cantilever strength kg. M.
30. Are the live and earth ends of arrester suitable for
jumper/flats as specified?
31. Any other technical data.

32. Temporary power frequency over voltage with-stand
capability for arresters :
For 0.1 second
For 1.0 second
For 10.00 seconds
For 100.00 seconds.

INSTUMENT TRANSFORMERS 72.5 KV T/F, LINE, INCOMER AND NEUTRAL CTs&11 kV NCTs)
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacturer, testing of outdoor
instrument transformer alongwith terminal connectors for protection and metering services
1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and construction of
equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be in a manner acceptable to the purchaser,
who will interpret in a manner the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have the
power to reject any work or material which in his judgement is not in accordance therewith.
The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of suppliers
supply, irrespective of whether theses are specifically brought out in this specification and/or
the commercial order or not.
2.0 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification the rating as well as performance
and testing of the instrument transformers shall conform but not limited to the latest revisions
and amendments available at the time of placement of order of all the relevant standards as
listed hereunder.
2.1 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
Sl no. Standard No. Title
1. IS : 2165 Insulation Coordination for equipment of 100 kV and

above.
2. IS : 2705 (I to IV) Current Transformers
3. IS L 2099 Bushing for alternating voltages above 1000 volts.
4. IS : 3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushing
5. IS :2071 Method of High voltage testing
6. IS :335 Insulating oil for transformers and switchgears
7. IS: 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for low
voltage switchgear and control.
8. IS: 2633 Method of testing hot dipped galvanized articles.
9. IS :4800 Enamelled round winding wires.
10. IS :5561 Terminal connectors
11. IS :11065 Drawings
12. IEC- 185 Current transformers
13. IEC-270 Partial discharge measurement (or IS: 11322)
14. IEC-44(4) Instrument transformer measurement of PDs
15. IEC-171 Insulation co ordination
16. IEC-60 High voltage resting techniques
17. IEC- 8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators.
18. Indian electricity rules 1956
2.2 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure
equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered.
When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of
difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall
be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic
translation in English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
3.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions
i) Location In the state of Haryana

ii) Max. ambient air temp (Deg. C) 50
iii) Min. ambient air temp (Deg C) -2.5
vi) Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
vii) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq.m) 195
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.8 G
Note Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The climatic
conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in
the atmosphere. Heavies lightning also occur during June to October.
The instrument transformer covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements
listed hereunder.
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
Sl Item SPECIFICATION
No 72.5 kV 36 kV 12kV
1. Type of CT/ Installation Single phase oil filled hermetically
sealed out door type.
2. Type of mounting Steel structures
3. Suitable for system frequency 50 Hz
4. Highest system voltage (kV rms.) 72.5 36 12
5. Minimum neutral CT insulating voltage (kV) 15 15 8.66
6. Current ratio A/A
a) Line 600-300- 300-150/5 -
150/1-1-1
b) I/C transformers 1000- 600-300- -
500/0.577- 150
1-1-1 0.577-5-5
c) Transformer 150-
75/0.577-1-
1
d) NCT 150-75/1 & 600-300- 900-450/5
1000-500/1 150/1

8. Rated continuous thermal current (A) 125% for all taps
9. Ratio taps Either on primary or on secondary side.
10. Acceptable limit of temperature rise above the As per IS : 2705
specified ambient temperature for continuous
operation of rated current
11 Accept partial discharge level at 1.1 times the As per IS : 11322 1985
rated voltage
12. 1.2/50 micro-second lighting impulse

withstand voltage (kVp)

a) CTs 325 170 -
b) NCTs 95 95 75
13 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand
voltage primary (kV rms)
a) CTs 140 70 -
b) NCTs 38 38 28
14. Power frequency over voltage withstand 3 3 3
requirement for secondary winding (kV rms.)
(for 1 minute)
15. Min. creepage distance porcelain housing
(mm)
i) CTs 1815 900 -

ii) NCTs 440 440 250
16. Rated short time withstand current (kA rms)
For 1 second 31.5 16 18.4
17. Rated dynamic withstand current (kAp) 78.75 40 46.0
18. Seismic acceleration (Horizontal) As specified against clause 3.1 (x)
19. Max. creepage factor 4.0
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
5.1 The insulation of the instrument transformer shall be so designed that the internal installation
shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation. The designed
dielectrics withstand values of external and internal insulation shall be clearly brought out in
the guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in this
specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.
5.2 Porcelain Housing:
5.2.1 The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelains shall be furnished by the
supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain
of high mechanical and dielectric strength, blazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark
brown colour with a smooth surface arrange to shed away rain water or condensed water
particles (fog).
5.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the offer.
5.3 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize possible
locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made out of mild steel/stainless
steel/aluminium alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in horizontal plan is to be
avoided as welding at this location may give away due to vibrations during transport resulting
in oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any horizontal
welding used in the bottom tank.
5.4 Surface finish
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanized or shall be coated with
at least cost of zinc rich epoxy painting. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be made out of
stainless steel.
5.5 Insulating oil
Insulating oil required for first filing of the instrument transformer shall be covered in suppliers
scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition IS: 335

5.6 Prevention of oil leakage and entry of moisture :
5.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is properly achieved. In
this connection the arrangement provided by the supplier at various locations including the
following ones shall be described, supported by sectional drawings.
i) Locations of emergency of primary and secondary terminals

ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tanks
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.
5.6.2 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain housings for taking out
terminals shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.
5.6.3 For gaskets joints, wherever used nitrite butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The gasket shall
be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the gasket
under compression.
5.7 Oil level indicators
Instrument transformers supplied with nitrogen cushion for compensation of oil volume
variation shall be provided with prismatic type oil sight window at suitable location so that the
oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observed standing at ground level. If metal
bellow is used for the above purpose a group glass window shall be provided to monitor the
position of metal bellow.
5.8 Earthing
Metal tank of instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate terminal for bolted
connection to 50 x 8 MS flat to be provided by the purchaser for connections to station earth
mat.
5.9 Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement, to lift the entire
unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawing.
Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way as to avoid any damage to
the porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/ transport. Necessary string
guides if required shall be offered which shall be of removable type.
5.10 Name plate
The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive legible nameplate with the
information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In addition to these
the following specific points shall also be marked on the name plate.
i) PO No. with date and (item no. if any)

ii) Connection diagram
iii) Rated continuous thermal current
iv) General knee point voltage formula.
v) Actual secondary resistance of the particular CT.
vi) Actual knee point voltage corresponding to the above actual RCT. The size of name plate and
its location on the equipment should be such that it is clearly readable with naked eyes while
standing on ground.
5.11 Suitable terminal connectors for connecting ACSR conductor of size 0.4 square inch Zebra for
all instrument transformers shall be supplied. Suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing
connections shall also be provided.

5.11.1 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements
1. Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS : 5561
2. All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp
edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
3. No part of a clamp shall be less than 12 mm thick
4. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2636
5. For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness shall be cast integral
wit aluminium body.
6. Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/aluminium sheets.
7. All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact
resistance
8. Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements

stipulated in IS : 5561
5.12 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be either polyvinyl acetate type or amide emide
type and shall meet the requirements of IS : 4800. Polyester enamel shall not be used.
Double cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in
contact with oil.
5.13 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum temperature rise
specified in IS2705. However, the permissible temperature rise is for a maximum ambient
temperature of 50 Deg C.
5.14 The CT shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site within the allowable
transport limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitations so demand.
5.15 For compensation of variation in the oil volume due to ambient variation and to take care of
internal abnormal pressure nitrogen cushion or stainless steel bellows shall be used. The
bidder shall technically justify the other type of pressure relief device.
5.16 The CT secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal box. The
terminal box shall be provided with removable gland plate and gland/s suitable for 1100 volt
grade, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed multicore 4 sq. mm. Stranded copper conductor cable.
The number glands shall be as follows : -
1. For all the NCTs one cable gland suitable for 2 core, 4 sq mm stranded copper cable to be
provided.
2. For TFs CTs cable gland suitable for 6 core sq. mm stranded copper cable to be provided.
3. 72.5 kV T/F I/C CTs two cable glands each suitable for 4 core 4 sq. mm stranded copper
cable to be provided.
The terminal box shall be dust and vermin proof. The dimensions of the terminal box and its
openings shall be adequate to enable easy access and working space with use of normal
tools.
5.17 Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each primary and secondary terminal. Facility shall be
provided for short-circuiting and grounding of the secondary terminals inside the terminal box.

5.18 The instrument transformer shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and thereafter
hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent oil and moisture from entering the
tanks. Oil filling and /or oil sampling cocks if provided to facilitate factory processing, should
be permanently sealed before despatching the equipment. The method adopted for hermetic
sealing shall be described in the offer.
5.19 The casting of base, collar etc. shall be diecast and tested before assembly to detect cracks
and voids, if any.
5.20 The instrument security factor of metering core shall be low enough and less than 5. This
shall be demonstrated on all the ratios of the metering core, in accordance with procedure
specified in IEC-185 or IS-2705. In case the instrument security factor of less than 5 is not
possible to be achieved on higher ratios, auxiliary CTs of ratio 1/1 and1 accuracy class shall
be deemed to be included in the suppliers scope of supply. This shall also be specifically
brought out by the supplier in his offer.
5.21 Primary winding
The design density for short circuit current as well as conductivity of the metal used for
primary winding shall meet the requirement of IS: 2705. The supplier shall in his offer furnish
detailed calculations for selections of winding cross sections.
5.22 Secondary winding
Suitably insulated wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary winding. Type of
insulation used shall be described in the offer. For multi ratio design, suitable tappings shall
be provided either on primary or on secondary winding.
5.23 The exciting current of the CTs shall be as low as possible. The suppler shall furnish
alongwith his offer the magnetization curves for all the core/s. The cores shall be high grade,
non-aging electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysterisis loss and high permeability to
ensure high accuracy at both normal and over current.
5.24 Primary terminals
Each primary terminal including the inter linking terminals (if provided) of all 66 kV NCTs
(ratio 1000 500/1 A) and 11 kV NCTs shall be made out of rods of not less than 30 mm dia
copper or equivalent as per IS and 66 kV NCT (ratio 150-15/1A) shall be made out of rods not
less than 20 mm diameter copper or equivalent as per IS.
5.25 Any deviation from the specification shall be clearly brought out separately. In the absence of
any specific mention, it shall be implied that the equipment offered is entirely according to this
specification
5.26 The instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable test tap for measurement of tests
such as partial discharges etc. in factory as well as at site. Provision shall be made of a screw
on cap for solid and secured earthing of the test tap connection, when not in use. A suitable
caution plate shall be provided duly fixed on the cover of the test tap and necessity of its solid
earthing as per prescribed method before energizing the equipment.
6.0 TESTS
6.1 Type tests
6.1.1 All the equipment offered should be fully type tested as per the relevant standards. In case
the equipment of the type and design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall
furnish four sets of the type test reports alongwith the offer. The purchaser reserves the right
to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchasers
representatives.

6.2 Acceptance and routine tests
All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by
the supplier in presence of purchasers representative.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
7.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organization (ISO) A series of drawing
sheet/Indian standards specification IS: 11065. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for
microfilming. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I. units.
7.2 List of drawings and documents
The supplier shall furnish four sets of following drawing alongwith his offer:
a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.

b) Graphs showing the performance of equipment in regard to magnetization characteristic, ratio
and phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves.
c) Sectional views showing.
i) General constructional features
ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
iii) The insulation of the winding arrangements, method of connection of the
primary/secondary winding to the primary/secondary terminals etc.
d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connections studs provided.

e) Name plate.
f) Schematic drawing.
g) Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature.
h) Terminal connector drawings.
7.3 The successful supplier shall submit four sets of final version of all the above drawings.
Except (7.2(b) above (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for
purchasers approval. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the
drawings to the supplier. The suppler shall if necessary modify the drawing and resubmit four
copies of the modified drawings for purchasers approval within two weeks from the date of
purchasers comments.
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All
the drawing shall be at the suppliers risk.
7.5 After receipt of purchasers approval, the supplier shall submit following drawings/documents
prior to dispatch of equipment.
a) Set of approved drawings i.e. 1 set per CT, 3 sets per NCT.
b) Nicely printed and bound volumes of operation maintenance and erection manuals in
English.,1 copy per CT and 3 copies per NCT.
7.6 Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and
the time to ordering,

DETAILS OF ANNEXRES
1. 72.5 kV transformer CT 150-75/0.577-1-1

2. 72.5 kV transformer incomer CT 1000-500/0.577-1-1-1
3. 72.5 kV line CT 600-300-150/1-1-1
4. 72.5 kV neutral CT 150-75/1
5. 72.5 kV neutral CT 1000-500/1
6. 12 kV neutral CT 900-450/5

Annexure
(Instrument Transformer)
COREWISE DETAILS OF INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS

REQUIREMENTS FOR 72.5 kV TRANSFORMER CT
(150-75/0.577-1-1)
No. Of cores = 3
Core Application Current Current Accuracy Formula for min. Max. ALF/ISF
at 150 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Differential 150- - PS 40 (RCT+1) 30 AT

protection 75/0.577 Vk/4
2. REF- protection 150-75/1 - PS 20(RCT+1) 30 AT ISP-5

Vk/2
3 Over current 150-75/1 25 5P - - ALF-10

protection

Annexure

REQUIREMENTS FOR 72.5 kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT
(1000-500/0.577-1-1-1)
No. Of cores = 4
at 1000 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Differential 1000-500 - PS 40 (RCT+2) 30 AT

protection /0.577 Vk/4
2. REF- protection 1000- - PS 14(RCT+2) 30 AT

500/1 Vk/2
3 Over current & 1000- 15 5P - - ALF 10

earth fault 500/1
protection
4. Metering 1000- 15 1.0 - - ISP < 5

500/1

Annexure

REQUIREMENTS FOR 72.5 kV LINE CT
(600-300-150/1-1-1)
No. of cores = 3
at 300 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Distance 600-300- - PS 110 (RCT+11) 80 AT

protection 150/1 Vk/4
2. Over current & 600-300- 15 5P - - ALF 10

earth fault 150/1
protection
3. Metering 600-300- 20 1.0 - - ISP < 5

150/1

Annexure

REQUIREMENTS FOR 72.5 kV NEUTRAL CT
(150-75/1)
No. of cores = 1
Application Current Accuracy Formula for min. Max. Min.

ratio (A) class as knee point voltage exciting insulation
per IES at CT secondary current voltage
185 resistance at 75o C (mA) (k)
at 150 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF protection 150-75/1 PS 20(RCT+1) 30 AT 15

Vk/2

Annexure

REQUIREMENTS FOR 72.5 kV NEUTRAL CT
(1000-500/1)
No. of cores = 1

at 1000 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6
REF protection 1000- PS 14(RCT+2) 30 AT 15

500/1 Vk/2

Annexure

REQUIREMENTS FOR 12 kV NEUTRAL CT
(900-450/5)
No. of cores = 1

at 900 A tap (volt)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Ref protection 900- PS 95(RCT+1) 75 AT 8.66

450/5 Vk/2

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
(To be filled in by the supplier separately for each type and voltage rating)
1. Type/installation
2. Manufacturers name and country of manufacture
3. Conforming to standard
4. Rated voltage
5. Rated primary current
6. Details of cores Core no. 1, II, III, IV
6.1 Purpose of cores
6.2 Rated secondary current
6.3 Class of accuracy
6.4 Accuracy limit factor
6.5 Formula covering minimum knee point voltage at CT secondary
resistance corrected to 75 Deg C.
6.6 Instrument security factor
6.7 Secondary limiting voltage
6.8 Max. secondary resistance corrected to 75o C
6.9 Rated burden
6.10 Exciting current for differential core at 25% of knee point voltage
and for distance protection core at 100% of knee point voltage.
7. Rated short time withstand current (kA rms) for 1 second
duration.
8. Rated dynamitic withstand current (kAP)
9. Rated continuous thermal current (pu)
10. One minute power frequency withstand voltage (kV rms)
a) Dry
b) Wet
11. 1.2/50 micro-second impulse withstand voltage (kVP)

No of cores as per applicability for a particular type of
instrument transformer.
12. One minute power frequency withstand voltage of secondary
winding (kV rms)
13. Minimum creepage distance (mm)
14. Maximum creepage factor
15. Weight of oil (kg)
16. Quality of oil (ltrs)
17. Total weight (kg)
18. Maximum shipping weight (kg)
19. Mounting details.
20. Over all dimension
21. Maximum permissible temperature rise of winding when
referred to maximum ambient temperature of 50o C in terms of
clause 7.2 (table 2 of IS : 2705) part 1-1992 (o C)
22. IS to which the oil conform
23. Whether tap provided on primary secondary or primary and
secondary both (details to be elaborated).

72.5 KV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacturer, testing of outdoor

instrument transformers alongwith terminal connectors for protection and metering services.
It is not the inter to specify completely herein all details of the design and construction of
equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be acceptable to the purchaser, who will
interpret in a manner the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have the lower to
reject any work or material which in his judgement is not in accordance therewith. The
equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of suppliers
supply, irrespective of whether theses are specifically brought out in this specification and/or
the commercial order or not.
2.0 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification the rating as well as performance
and testing of the instrument transformers shall conform but not limited to the latest revisions
and amendments available at the time of placement of order of all the relevant standards as
listed hereunder.
Sl no. Standard No. Title
1. IS : 3156 (part-I to Part-III) Voltage transformer

2. IS : 3156 (part-IV) Capacitor voltage transformer
3. IS : 2099 High voltage porcelain bushing
4. IS : 3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings
5. IS :2071 Method of High voltage testing
6. IS :335 Insulating oil for transformers and switchgears
7. IS: 2165 Insulation Co-ordination for equipment of 100 kV and above
8. IS :2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for low voltage switchgear and
control.
9. IEC-186 Voltage transformers

10. IEC-186A First supplement of IEC publication 186
11. IEC-270 Partial discharge measurement
12. IS :5561 Terminal connectors
13. IS :4800 Enamelled round winding wires
14. IEC-44(4) Instrument transformer measurement of PDs
15. IEC-171 Insulation co ordination
16. IEC-358 Coupling capacitor divider
17. IEC-60 High voltage testing techniques
18. IEC- 8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators.
19. IS:9348 Coupling capacitor and capacitor dividers
20. IS :2633 Method of testing hot dipped galvanized articles.

21. IS :11065 Drawings
22. Indian electricity rules 1956
23. IS:5621 Hollow porcelain insulators
Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure
equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered.
When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of
difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall
be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic
translation in English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.
3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory

continuous operation under the following tropical conditions

ii) Max. ambient air temp (deg. C) 50
iii) Min. ambient air temp (deg C) -2.5
vi) Average annual rainfall (mm) 900
vii) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq.m) 195
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g
Note Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The climatic
conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in
the atmosphere. Heavy lightning also occur during June to October.
The capacitor voltage transformer and potential transformer covered in this specification shall
meet the technical requirements listed hereunder
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
Sl Item SPECIFICATION
No 72.5 kV
1. Type/ Installation Single phase oil filled, self cooled,
hermetically sealed out door type
2. Type of mounting Steel structures
3. Highest system voltage (kV rms) 72.5
4. Suitable for system frequency 50 Hz
5. Voltage ratio 15
a) Rated primary voltage (kV rms) 66/3
b) Secondary voltage (volts0
i) CVT Core I
110/3
ii) PT Core I,II
110/3
7. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse 325
withstand voltage (kVP)
8. 1 Minute dry and wet power frequency 140
withstand voltage primary (kV rms)

9 Min. creepage distance of porcelain housing 1815
(mm)
10 Creepage factor (max) 4.0
11 Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds
12 Equivalent capacitance at power frequency 8800+10%
for carrier coupling for CVT (pf) -5%
13 Resultant high frequency capacitance for 8800 in carrier frequency range of 40 kHz
CVP (pf) to 500 kHz with variation in capacitance
as contained in IEC-358 (ie 20% and
+50%)
14 One minute power frequency withstand 3.0
voltage for secondary winding (kV rms)
15 Max. temp. rise over ambient of 50 deg C As per IS:3156 or equivalent IEC
5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
5.1.1 Common for all CVTs and PTs
5.1.1.1 The insulation of the instrument transformer shall be so designed that the internal installation
shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation. The designed
dielectric withstand values of external and internal insulations shall be clearly brought out in
the guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in this
specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.
5.1.1.2 Porcelain Housings
5.1.1.3 The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain shall be furnished by the
supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain
of high mechanical and dielectric strength, glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark
brown colour with a smooth surface arrange to shed away rain water or condensed water
particles (fog).
Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the offer.
5.1.1.4 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize possible
locations of oil leakage. The metal tans shall be made out of mild steel/stainless
steel/aluminium alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in horizontal plan is to be
avoided as welding at this location may give away due to vibrations during transport resulting
in oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any horizontal
welding used in the bottom tank.
5.1.2 Surface finish
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanized or shall be coated with
at lest cost of zinc rich epoxy painting. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be made out of
stainless steel.
5.1.3 Insulating oil
Insulating oil required for first filing of the instrument transformer shall be covered in suppliers
scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition IS : 335 or equivalent
IEC.
5.1.3.1 Prevention of oil leakage and entry of moisture :
5.1.3.2 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is properly achieved. In
this connection the arrangement provided by the supplier at various locations including the
following once shall be described, supported by sectional drawings.

i) Locations of emergency of primary and secondary terminals
ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tanks
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.
5.1.3.3 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for taking out
terminals shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.
5.1.3.4 For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrite butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The gasket
shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the
gasket under compression.
5.1.3.5 Oil level indicators
Instrument transformers shall be provided with prismatic type oil sight window at suitable
location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observed standing at
ground level.
5.1.4 Earthing
Metal tank of instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing terminal for
bolted connection to 50 x 8mm MS flat to be provided by the purchaser for connections to
station earth mat.
5.1.4.1 Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement, to lift the entire
unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawing.
Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way so as to avoid any damage
to the porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/ transport. If necessary,
string guides if required shall be offered which shall be of removable type.
5.1.4.2 Name plate
The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name plate with the
information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In addition to these
P.O with date, item no. of P.O and connection diagram shall also be marked in rating plate
5.1.4.3 Suitable terminal connectors for connecting ACSR conductor of size 0.4 square inch (Zebra)
shall be supplied. suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be
provided.
5.1.5 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements
Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS : 5561 or equivalent IEC.
All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp
edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
No part of a clam shall be less than 10 mm thick
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming to IS:2633 or equivalent IEC
For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness shall be cast
integral with aluminium body.
Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/aluminium body.
All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact
resistance
Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in IS : 5561 or equivalent IEC.
5.1.6 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyvinyl acetate type and shall meet the
requirements of IS : 4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double
cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with
oil.

5.1.7 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum temperature rise
specified in IS3156 or equivalent IEC.. However, the permissible temperature rise indicated
is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg C.
5.1.8 The instrument transformer shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site
within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitation so
demand.
5.1.9 The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and thereafter
hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture from entering the
tanks. Sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be provided with facility to reseal
the same. The method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer.
5.1.10 Suitable arrangement shall be made to accommodate the expansion and contraction of oil
due to temperature variation. The pressure variation shall be kept within limits which do not
impair the tightness of the instrument transformer. A pressure relief device capable of
releasing abnormal internal pressure shall be provided.
5.2 Capacitor Voltage Transformer (Cvt)
5.2.1 The CVTs comprising of the capacitor divider unit and electromagnetic unit shall be single
phase, oil filled hermetically sealed, self cooled, outdoor type and suitable for direct line
connections without any fuse and isolation switches. Theses CVTs are required to be used on
interlinking substation in Haryana power system for the purpose of protection, synchronizing,
interlocking, carrier coupling and metering. CVTs shall be suitable for connecting the carrier
terminals to single circuit and double circuit transmission lines for phase to phase coupling for
power line carrier, voice communication, tele-metering and tele-printing services.
5.2.2 The secondary terminals of potential unit, high frequency coupling terminal and the earthing
terminals shall be brought out separately and hosed in a water proof cabinet outside the main
steel chamber.
5.2.3 The capacitor voltage transformer shall be suitable for simultaneous use us measuring unit,
for feeding voltage supply to protective relays and as coupling capacitor for carrier
transmission i.e, for voice communication, carrier protective relays, tele-metering, tele-
printing services over one or more carrier channels in the frequency range of 40 to 500 kHz.
5.2.4 The capacitor shall be designed for wide frequency band and low dielectric loss. Their natural
frequency shall be considerable higher than the carrier frequency range of 40 kHz to 500 kHz.
5.2.5 The unit capacitor shall be so designed that no damage to internal elements or change in
electrostatic capacitance is resulted by the application of impulse voltage.
5.2.6 Each C VT including its emvt unit shall be filled with insulating oil conforming to IS:335 or
equivalent IEC and shall be hermetically sealed against moisture and dust.
5.2.7 The electromagnetic voltage transformer unit of CVT intended for outdoor installation whose
primary is to be fed by the inter-mediate design and shall be suitable for metering, relaying
and synchronizing services. The core of this transformer shall be of high grade, nonageing,
cold rolled, laminated electrical sillcon steel of low hysteresis loss and of high permeability so
as to ensure high accuracy at normal and high voltages. The primary winding shall be
connected through a compensating reactor to compensate the voltage increase at inter
mediate tapping, whatever is the load within range of rated burden.
5.2.8 The design shall be free from corona effect to keep noise level of carrier frequency link very
low. Use may be make of grading rings of electrostatic screen for this purpose if required.

5.2.9 The design shall be suitable for rapid reclosing of the circuit and shall be capable of accurate
and proportionate transmission of sudden variation in the primary voltage.
5.2.10 Each CVT shall be provided with a suitable damping device so that ferro resonance oscillation
due to saturation of iron core of transformer or any inductance connected in parallel with it
and initiated by either over voltages on the net work side or by opening of the short circuited
primary or secondaries, shall be practically zero. Oscillations of the secondary voltages
which may arise as a result of breakdown of primary voltages due to short circuits shall not
affect the proper working of protective relays. This shall conform to provisions of clause 42 of
IEC recommendations 186-A.
5.2.11 Design of potential units of the CVT shall be base on the following requirement in connection
with protective relaying.
i) They must transmit accurately sudden drops of primary voltage.
ii) The CVTs must not enter into sub-harmonic resonance and transient oscillations
during energization. They must be damped out with sufficient rapidness.
iii) They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from secondary.
5.2.12 A device shall be incorporated in capacitor voltage transformer for the purpose of limiting over
voltages which may appear across one or more of its components and/or to prevent sustained
ferro resonance.
The device may include a spark gap and may be located in several different ways according
to its nature (clause 2.12 of IS:3156 (part-IV)-1978 of IEC-186A clause 37.12)
5.2.13 Suitable terminal boxes with removable gland plate for facilitating the entry of HF cables and
VT control cables shall be provided at an accessible position.
5.3 Voltage Transformer (Pt)
5.3.1 The voltage transformer shall be oil immersed, sealed type and self cooled, suitable for the
services indicated and conforming to the modern practices of designs and construction. The
core shall be of high grade, non ageing, electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysteresis
loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over voltage.
5.3.2 The primary winding of voltage transformer will be connected phase to ground.
5.3.3 All the fuses and the links shall be provided at the VT terminal boxes.
5.3.4 The design of PT shall be base on following requirements.
i) They must transmit sudden drops of primary voltages

ii) They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from secondary
5.3.5 The secondary terminals of the PTs except 36 kV PTs (having three cores) shall be brought
out in a weather proof terminal box and it shall be provided with a removable gland plates
6. TESTS
6.1. Type tests
6.1.1 Type testes of potential transformers (PTs)
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type and
design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of type test
reports alongwith the offer. The type test reports should not be more than seven years old,

reckoned from the date of bid opening and the type test should have been carried out in
accordance with ISS-3156 (1992)/equivalent IEC form govt/govt approved test house.
However, temperature rise test although covered under type tests will be got conducted by
the supplier on one piece of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in the
presence to the inspecting officer of the purchase, without any extra charges. The purchaser
reserves the right to demand repetition of same or all the type tests in the tests in the
presence of purchasers representative.
6.1.2 Type tests of capacitate voltage transformers (CVTs)
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type and
design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of type test
reports of the following tests alongwith the offer.
Tests as per clause no. 12.1, 1.2 and 14 of IEC-358 (1990) and clause 10.1 (b), 10.1(d), 10.1
(e), 10.1(f), 49,51, 52 & 53 of IEC-186(1987) latest addition of IECs to be considered.
The type test reports should not be more than seven years old, reckoned form the date of bid
opening and the type test should have been carried out in accordance with IEC-358(1992)
and IEC-186 (1987) form Govt/Govt. approved test house
However, temperature rise test although covered under type tests will be got conducted by
the supplier on one piece of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in the
presence of the inspecting officer of the purchaser, without any extra charges. The purchaser
reserves the right to demand repetitions of some or all the type tests in the presence of
purchasers representative.
6.2. Acceptance And Routine Tests
i) All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by
the supplier in presence of purchasers representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the
purchaser.
ii) Immediately after finalization of the programme of routine/acceptance testing, the supplier
shall give sufficient advance intimation to the purchaser to enable him to depute his
representative for witnessing the testing.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
7.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards (ISO) A series of drawing sheet/Indian
standards specification IS : 11065. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro
filming. All dimensions and data shall be in SI units.
7.2 List of drawings

a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.
b) Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to magnetisation
characteristic,
c) Sectional views showing.
iv) General constructional features
v) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
vi) The insulation and the winding arrangements, method of connection of the
primary/secondary terminals etc.
vii) Porcelain used and its dimensions..
d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connections studs provided.

e) Name plate.
f) Schematic drawing .

7.3 The successful supplier shall submit four sets of final version of all the above drawings.
Except (7.2(b) above (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for
purchasers approval within 15 days of date of receipt of acceptance of offer from the
purchaser. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the
supplier within one month of date of receipt of above drawings. The suppler shall if necessary
modify the drg. and resubmit four copies of the modified drgs. for purchasers approval within
two weeks from the date of purchasers comments.
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All
the drawing shall be at the suppliers risk.
7.5 After receipt of purchasers approval, the supplier shall submit following drawings
/documents within two weeks
Sl No Equipment No of sets of drawings No. of nicely printed and bounded

volumes of operation, maintenance
and erection manual in English.
1 66 kV CVTs 3 sets per CVT 3 sets per CVT
2 66 kV PTs 1 set per PT 1 set per PT
7.6 Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relive the supplier of his responsibility and
the time to ordering.
Note : In case the equipment offered by the supplier doses not meet with the requirement of
technical specification the offer of the firm shall not be considered.

Annexure IC(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5 KV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)
5. Capacitance (minimum) 8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
6. Rated voltage (volts) 110/3
7. Application Protection and measurement
8 Accuracy 1/3P
9. Output burden (VA) 50
10 Percentage voltage error and phase As per ISS/IEC

displacement (minutes) for respective
specified accuracy class

Annexure IC(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5 KV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS (PT)
Secondary I Secondary - II
5. Rated voltage (volts) 110/3 110/3
6. Application Protection and Protection

measurement
7 Accuracy 1/3P 3P
8. Output burden (VA) 250 25
9 Percentage voltage error and phase As per ISS/IEC

displacement (minutes) for respective
specified accuracy class
Note Each winding shall fulfill its respective specified accuracy requirement within its specified
output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of any value from zero
to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156
(part-2 and part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.

Annexure IIA
CAPACITATE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
1. Name of manufacturer
2. Type of mode
3. Rated voltage (kV)
4. Capacitance
a) Primary capacitance C1 (pf)
b) Secondary capacitance C2 (pf)
c) Equivalent capacitance C(pf)
5. Number of secondary windings

6. Rated secondary voltage
a) Winding-I (volts)
b) Winding-II (volts)
7. Rated secondary burden

a) Winding-I (VA)
b) Winding-II (VA)
8. Accuracy class of each secondary

a) Winding-I
b) Winding-II
9. Rated voltage factor with rated burden

10. One minute power frequency withstand test (dry)
voltage (kv rms)
11. One minute power frequency withstand test
(wet)voltage (kV rms)
12. 1.2/50 micro second impulse wave withstand
test voltage (kV rms)
13. One minute power frequency withstand voltage
one secondaries (kV rms)
14. Total creepage distance (mm)
15. Creepage factor (mm)
16. Is CVT suitable for carrier frequency in the range
of 40 to 500 kHz (Yes/No)
17. Natural frequency of coupling capacitors
18. Rated primary burden of potential devices (VA)
19. Temp. rise at 1.2 times rated voltage with rated
burden (deg C)
20. Guaranteed value of temp. coefficient (percent
per Deg Celsius)
21. Guaranteed value of radio interference voltage
in micro-volts at different voltages
22. Guaranteed sealing test. The pressure at which
sealing test is to be carried out.
23. Guaranteed values of the HF capacitance and
equivalent series resistance at different
frequencies in the frequency range of 40 to 500
kHz
24. Weight of oil and the standard to which in
conforms
i) In capacitor unit (kg/IS)
ii) In measuring unit (kg/IS)

25. Total weight (kg)
26. Over all dimensions (mm)
27. Mounting flange dimensional details.
28. Whether CTs are suitable for
a) Carrier communication
b) Carrier protection
c) Carrier telemetering and
d) Carrier teleprinting services
e) Metering relaying protection,
f) Synchronizing and
g) Interlocking purposes.
29. Do the CVTs contain built it compensating

reactors and damping devices in P.T portion ?
(yes/no)

Annexure- IIB
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
1. Manufacturers type and designation.
2. Type
3. Rated frequency
4. Rated primary voltage
5. Number of secondary windings
i) Winding-I
ii) Winding-II
iii) Winding -III
7. Class of accuracy
i) Winding-I
ii) Winding-II
iii) Winding -III
8. Limits of errors
A) Winding-I
i) Percentage voltage ratio error
ii) Phase displacement (minutes)
B) Winding-II
C) Winding -III
9. Rated burden
i) Winding-I
ii) Winding-II
iii) Winding -III
10. Rated voltage factor and time

11. Temp. rise at 1.2 times rated voltage when applied
continuously with rated burden (deg C)
12. Insulation class
i) Primary windings
ii) Secondary windings
13. One minute power frequency (dry) withstand test

voltage (kV)
14. One minute power frequency (wet) withstand
test voltage (kV)
15. 1.2/50 micro seconds impulse withstand test
voltage (kV peak)
16. One minute power frequency withstand voltage
on secondaries (volts)
17. a) Creepage distance
b) creepage factor
18. Standard to which the equipment conforms
19. Standards to which the oil conforms
20. Total weight of the PT
21. Over all dimensions
22. Mounting details weight of the coil
23. Total shipping weight

72.5 kV BUS POST INSULATORS
1. SCOPE
This specification provides for the design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection
and testing before supply, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 72.5 kV outdoor type bus
post insulators and its clamps as per quantities given in the Schedule of quantities for use on
the 66 kV grid substations to support the bus bar at various switchyards
It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of the
insulator. However, the insulator shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation upto the Bidders guarantee in a manner acceptable to purchaser. The
equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply
irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification or not. All similar
parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.
2. STANDARDS
The post insulators and their hardware shall comply as regards general requirements, test
voltages, and test with the latest edition of IS-2544/1973 IS-5350(P-II) 1973 IS-5350(P-III)
1971/IEC-168/1979 except in so far as the same may be modified by this specification.
3. TYPE AND RATING
The 72.5 kV and 36 kV Bus Post insulators are required for out door system conforming to IS
2544/1973 or latest version thereof suitable for heavily polluted atmosphere. The post
insulators shall be specifically suitable to meet the particular requirements of ultimate
torsional strength and cantilever loads etc. which they will be called upon to resist during
service at the rated voltage.
The principal rating of bus post insulators shall be as under.
Sl No Particulars Unit
1 Nominal system voltage KV 66
2 Highest system voltage KV 72.5
3 Rated frequency 501.5 Hz
4 Min. creepage distance mm 1815
5 One minute power frequency withstand KV (rms) 140
voltage
6 Impulse withstand voltage (+ve & -ve) KV(peak 325
)
7 Min. visual discharge voltage level KV (rms)
(extinction)
8 Radio interference voltage (Micro volt at Micro >500
1 MHz) at a system voltage of 156 kV volt
9 Cantilever strength (upright) Kg 400
10 Torsion strength Nm 2000
11 Bending strength N 4000
12 Tensile strength N 35000
13 Compressive strength N 70000
14 Applicable standard IS:5350,
IS:2544, IEC :
168
15 Pitch circle dia
16 a. Top mm 127

17 b. Bottom mm 127
18 Height of insulator mm 7701
No. of insulator per stack No 1
4. CLIMATIC CONDITION
humid and to hot. The relative humidity may vary from 26% to 100% and the temperature may
vary from 2.5 deg C to 500 deg C with maximum to minimum condition of humidity stated
above.
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:

ii) Max. ambient air temp. 50 deg C
iii) Min ambient air temp. -2.5 deg C
iv) Daily average temp. 35 deg C
v) Average number of dust storm days per annum 45
vi) Max. relative humidity 100%
vii) Min. relative humidity 26%
viii) Average annual rail fall 900 mm
ix) Max. wind pressure 195 kg/sq mt.
x) Max altitude above mean seal level 1000 mt
xi) Isoceraunic level 45
xii) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g
xiii) Average number of rainy days per annum 120 days
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The climate
conditions are also prone to wind variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in
the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs form June to October.
5. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
72.5 kV bus post insulator shall be either solid core or polycon type insulators complete with
all fittings and accessories required for holding single bus bar conductor ACSR 0.4 sq inch
zebra. The bus post insulator pedestal shall be suitable for fixing on the supporting structure
to be provided by the purchaser.
The bus post insulator shall be provided with a completely galvanised steel base designed for
mounting on the support structure to be provided by the purchaser. The base and mounting
arrangement shall be such that the insulator shall be rigid and self supporting and no guying
or cross bracing between phases shall be necessary.
Cap to be provided on top of the insulator shall be of high grade cast iron or malleable steel
casting. It shall be machine faced and hot dip galvanized. The cap shall have four nos. of
tapped holes spaced on a pitch circle diameter to accommodate the terminal clamp for
supporting the purchasers busbars. The holes shall be suitable for bolts with threads having
anticorrosive protection. The effective depth of threads shall not be less than the nominal
diameter of the bolt.
The post insulator clamps are to be fitted on the top of the bus post insulator for holding single
conductor ACSR Zebra tightly and rigidly. The clamps shall be made of aluminium alloy and
shall comply with relevant ISS. The clamps shall be supplied with galvanised steel studs of
the suitable size and maintain the requisite pressure to ensure good and tight joint of low
resistance.
The insulators shall be entirely fee from sharp edges ridges or points and shall not exhibit
appreciable corona formation during services.

Castings shall be free from blow holes, flaws, cracks and other defects and shall be smooth,
close grained and of true forms and dimensions.
The porcelain shall be white, finished brown glazed, non-porous of high dielectric, mechanic
and thermal strength, free from defects and thoroughly verified. Cement used shall be of high
quality, durable and high strength Portland cement. Cement is not to be treated as an
adhesive medium between the porcelain and metal ports of an insulators. Preference will be
given to a fixing medium of an approved metal alloy.
Cement shall be a replenishment material for filling gap between the porcelain and metal
parts to fix them.
6. GALVANIZING
All the ferrous metal parts shall be hot dip galvanized smoothly, as per IS 3638 (as amended
upto date), IS 2633 or any other equivalent authoritative standard. The material shall be
galvanized only after shop operations upon it have been completed. The metal parts before
galvanizing should be thoroughly cleaned of any paint, grease, rust scales or alkalis or any
foreign deposit which are likely to come in the way of galvanizing process. The metal parts
coating shall withstand minimum four for one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per
IEC-168
The bus post insulator unit shall be assembled in a suitable jig to ensure correct positioning of
the top and bottom metal fittings relative to one another. The faces of the metal fittings shall
be parallel and at right angles to the axis of the insulator and the corresponding holes in the
top and the bottom metal fittings shall be in a vertical plane containing the axis of the
insulator.
All necessary nuts, bolts, spring washers etc. required for the assembly of the complete
insulator stack shall be in tenderers scope of supply. The bolts and nuts shall be not dip
galvanised and shall be of high strength generally conforming to IS-136 or any other
equivalent international standard.
7. TESTS
7.1 Type Tests

All the equipments offered, shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards, in case the
equipment of the type and design offered, has already been type tested, the tenderer shall
furnish four sets of the type test reports alongwith the offer. The purchaser reserves the right
to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchasers
representative. For any change in the design/type, already type tested viz-a-viz the
design/type offered against this specification the purchaser reserves the right to demand
repetition of test without any extra cost. In case the equipments have not been type tested
earlier, all the type tests as per relevant standards shall be carried out by the successful
tenderer in the presence of purchasers representative without any extra cost.
7.2 Acceptance and routine tests.

7.2.1 All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by
the supplier in the presence of purchasers representative. No material shall be despatched
without the approval of test certificates.
8. INSPECTION
The inspection may be carried out by the purchaser at any stage of manufacture. The
successful tenderer shall grant free access to the purchasers representative at a reasonable
time when the work is in progress. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this
specification by the purchaser, shall not relieve the supplier of his obligation of furnishing

equipment in accordance with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if
the equipment is found to be defective.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance, about the manufacturing
programme so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the
bought out items.
9. GUARANTEED DATA
Guaranteed technical particulars and other technical data in respect of equipment/material

offered shall be furnished duly signed alongwith the tender in the performa attached as
annexure A. Any other particulars considered necessary may also be given in addition to
those listed in the schedule.
10. DRAWING AND LITERATURE

The successful bidder shall submit the equipment drawing(s) in quadruplicate, to the CE/D&P
HVPNL for his approval. Such drawings will be commented/approved by HVPNL within four
weeks of their receipt. The successful bidder will re-submit such drawings duly reflecting the
purchasers comments within 2 weeks of their receipt, which will be approved by the
purchaser within 2 weeks. The successful bidder shall supply 6 copies each of the approved
drawing and descriptive literature containing handling, erection and maintenance instruction
to the CE/D&P HVPL for distribution amongst field organisation. Reproducible of the
approved drawings will also be supplied by the successful bidder.
Also a copy each of the drawings and descriptive literature will accompany the equipment for
use by the stores/field offices drawing it for application on Nigams power system.
11. MARKING
Each porcelain insulator unit legibly and indelibly be marked to show the following :
a) Name or trade mark of the manufacture.

b) Month and year of manufacture
c) Country of manufacture
12. PACKING AND FORWARDING

12.1 The equipments shall be packed in crates suitable to withstand handling during transport and
outdoor storage during transit. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit, due to improper and inadequate packing. The easily damageable
material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbols.
Wherever necessary , proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be
provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier
without any extra cost.
12.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following
information.
a) Name of the consignee

b) Details of consignment
c) Destination
d) Total weight of consignment
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate
f) Handling and unpacking instructions
g) Bill of material indicating contents each of package.

Annexure A
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS & OTHER

TECHNICAL DATA
72.5 kV
1. Height mm
2. Power frequency dry one minute withstand
voltage kV
3. Impulse withstand voltage rms
4. Total creepage distance kV
5. Protected creepage distance Peak
6. Cantilever strength inverted mm
7. Cantilever strength upright mm
8. Tensile strength kg.
9. Torsional strength kg.
10. Compression strength N
11. Bending strength Nm
12. Type and make N
13. Total weight N
14. Pitch circle diameter
a) Bottom kg
b) Top mm
15. Max. diameter of insulator mm
16. Drawing reference no. mm

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
1. SCOPE
1.1 The specifications provides for design, manufacture, engineering, inspection, stage testing
and before despatch, packing and delivery F.O.R. destination of steel cored aluminium
conductor specified herein for its satisfactory operation on various Transmission lines and
substations of the state
1.2 ACSR Zebra conductor is to be used as power conductor on single circuit and double circuit
220 kV transmission lines of the owner.
2. STANDARDS
2.1 The power conductor shall conform to the following Indian Standards, which shall mean
latest revision, amendments/charges adopted and published, unless otherwise specified
herein before.
Sl No. Indian Standards Titles
1. IS:209 Specification for Zinc

2. IS:398 Part I to V
(as relevant) Specification for aluminium conductors for overhead
transmission purpose.
3. IS:1778 Reels and drums for bare conductors
4. IS:1521 Method for tensile testing of steel wires.
5. IS:2629 Recommended practice for Hot Dip Galvanizing of Iron and
Steel.
6. IS:2633 Method for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated
articles.
7. IS:4826 Hot dipped galvanized coating on round steel wires
8. IS:6745 Methods of determination of weight of zinc coating of zinc
coated iron and steel articles.
9. IS:1841 EC grade aluminium rod produced by rolling.
10. IS:5484 EC grade aluminium rode produced by continuous casting
and rolling.

ii) Max. ambient air temperature deg C 50
iii) Min. ambient air temperature deg C (-) 2.5
iv) Average daily ambient air temperature deg C 32
v) Max. relative humidity (%) 100
vi) Average rainfall per annum (mm) 900
vii) Max, altitude above mean sea level (metres) 1000
viii) Isoceraunic level (days/annum) 45
ix) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq. m) 195
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3 G

4. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
4.1 The detail of conductor are tabulated below.
a) Standing and wire diameter 54/3.18 mm Al.

7/3.18 mm Steel
Code Name ZEBRA
b) Number of strands :
Central steel wire 1
1st steel layer 6
st
1 aluminium layer 12
2nd aluminium layer 18
3rd aluminium layer 24
c) Sectional area of aluminium (sq. mm) 428.9

d) Total section area (sq. mm) 484.50
e) Overall diameter (mm) 28.62
f) Approximate weight (kg/km) 1621
g) Calculated max. d.c.resistance at 20 Deg.C (ohm/km) 0.06868
h) Minimum UTS (kN) 130.32
i) Modulus of elasticity (GN/sq meter) 69
j) Coefficient of linear expansion (per deg C) 19.3x10-6
4.2 The details of aluminium strand are as follows :
a) Min. breaking load of strand before stranding (kN) 1.29

b) Min. breaking load of strand after stranding (kN) 1.23
c) Max. D.C. resistance of strand at 20 deg C (ohm/km) 3.626
d) Diameter mm (standard/Max/Min) 3.18/3.21/3.15
e) Mass (kg/km) 21.47
The details of steel strand are as follows:
a) Min. breaking load of strand before stranding (kN) 10.43

b) Min. breaking load of strand after stranding (kN) 9.91
c) Diameter mm (standard/max/min) 3.18/3.24/3.12
d) Zinc coating testing 3 dips of 1 min each
e) Minimum weight of zinc coating 250 gm/sq. m
f) Mass of strand at normal diameter of strand (kg/km) 61.65
5. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
5.1 The ACSR conductor shall be suitable for being installed directly in air supported on
suspension insulator strings or anchored through tension insulator strings at the power cross
arms of single circuit and double circuit transmission line towers.
5.2 The conductor shall therefore be suitable for satisfactory operation under the tropical climatic
conditions listed under the clause 3.0. The applicable design particulars of the conductor to
be used on the lines is furnished in Annexure I. System Particulars
5.3 Physical constants of materials.
5.3.1 Physical constants for Hard-drawn aluminium.

5.3.2 Resistively
The resistively of aluminium depends upon its purity and its physical conditions. For the
purpose of this specification the max. value permitted is 0.028264 ohm. Sq. mm/ mt at 20 deg
C and this value has been used for calculation of the max. permissible value of resistance.
Note : It is not intended to check the resistivity from the measured values of resistance.
5.3.3 Density
At a temperature of 20 deg C the density of hard drawn aluminium has been taken as 2.703
g/cub cm.
5.3.4 Constant-Mass Temperature co-efficient of resistance
At a temperature of 20 deg C the constant mass temp co-efficient of resistance of hard drawn
aluminium measured between two potential points rigidly fixed to the wire, the metal being
allowed to expand freely, has been taken as 0.004 per degree Celsius.
5.3.5 Co-efficient of linear expansion
The co-efficient of linear expansion of hard drawn aluminium at 0 deg C has been taken as
23.0 x 10-6 per deg C. This value hold s good for all practical purposes over the range of
temperature from 0 deg.C to highest safe operating temperature.
5.4 Physical constants for galvanized steel wires
5.4.1 Density
At a temperature of 20 deg C the density of galvanized steel wire is to be taken as 7.80 g/cub
cm.
5.4.2 Co-efficient of linear expansion
In order to obtain uniformity in calculations a value of 11.5x10-6 per deg.C may be taken as
the value for the co-efficient of Linear Expansion of galvanised steel wires used for the cores
of steel-reinforced aluminium conductors.
5.5 Materials
5.5.1 The conductor shall be manufactured from EC grade aluminuum rods suitably hard drawn on
wire drawings machines. The aluminium rods used shall comply with IS:1841-1978 and
IS:5484. The mechanical and electrical properties of aluminium wires shall comply with the
requirements given in relevant standard. The aluminium wire shall be manufactured from not
less than 99.5% pure electrolytic aluminium rods of EC grade.
5.5.2 Galvanized steel wire shall be drawn from high carbon steel rods produced by either acidic or
basic open hearth process, electric furnace process or basic oxygen process. The mechanical
and electrical properties of wire shall comply with the requirements given in relevant standard.
The chemical composition of high carbon steel wire is given below for guidance only.
Element Percentage composition

Carbon 0.50 to 0.85
Manganese 0.50 to 1.10
Phosphorus Not more than 0.035
Sulphur Not more than 0.045
Silicon 0.10 to 0.35

5.5.3 The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic high grade zinc not less than 99.95 percent
purity . it shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1979. Galvanizing may be
done either by hot process or electrolytic process. Neutral grease may be applied between
the layers of wires.
Note L Lithium soap grease corresponding to Grade II of IS:7623-1974 (specification for

lithium soap greases) is suitable for such application.
5.6 Freedom from defects.
5.6.1 The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as spills, spills, slag inclusion,
die marks, scratches, fittings, blow-hotels, projections, looseness, overlapping of strands,
chipping of aluminium layers etc. and all such other defects which may hamper the
mechanical and electrical properties of the conductor. Special care should be taken to keep
away dirt, grit etc. during stranding.
5.7 Wire sizes
5.7.1 Normal size

The aluminium and galvanized steel wires for the stranded conductor covered by this
standard shall have diameters specified in clause 4.1. The diameter of the steel wire shall be
measured over the zinc coating.
5.7.2 Tolerance on normal size
5.7.2.1 Aluminium wires

A tolerance of 1% is permitted on the normal diameter of Zebra conductor.
5.7.2.2 Galvanized steel earth wire

A tolerance of 2% is permitted on the nominal diameter. The variations from the weights
shall not be more than 5%.
Note : In order to maintain the circularity of the wires the tolerance allowed in 5.7.2.1 and
5.7.2.2 shall apply to both the measurements at right angles taken at the same cross-section
as per clause 2.2 of IS: 398 (part II) (second revision with latest amendments)
5.8 Joints
5.8.1 Aluminium wires
No joints shall be permitted in the aluminum wires in the outermost layer of the ACSR
conductor. Joints in the inner layers are permitted, in addition to those made in the based rod
or wire before final drawings, but no two such joints shall be less than 15 meters apart in the
complete stranded conductor. Such joints shall be made by cold pressure but welding.
Note L joints are not permitted in the outermost layer of the conductor in order to ensure a
smooth conductor finish and reduce radio interference levels and corona losses on the extra
high voltage lines.
5.8.2 Galvanized steel wires
There shall be no joints except those in the base rod or wires before final drawing, in steel
wires forming the core of the steel reinforced aluminium conductor.
Note L Joints have not been permitted in the steel wires after final drawing in order to avoid
reduction in the breaking strength of the conductor that may occur as a result of failure of the
joints

5.9 Stranding
5.9.1 The wires used in the construction of galvanized steel reinforced aluminium conductor shall
before stranding. Satisfy all the relevant requirements of this specifications.
5.9.2 The lay ratio of the different layers shall be within the limits given in the table below.
LAY RATION OF ZEBRA ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS,

GALVANIZED STEEL REINFORCED
No. of Ratio of aluminium Lay ratios for Lay rations for aluminium wires
wires wire dia meter to steel core (6
Al St steel wire diameter wire layer) Outerside Layer Innermost
layer immediately layer of
beneath conductor
outside layer with 3 Al wire
layers
Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
54 7 1.0 13 28 10 14 10 16 10 17
Note : For the purpose of calculation, the main ration shall be taken as the arithmetic mean of the
relevant minimum and maximum values given in this table.
5.9.3 In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the outermost
layer being right handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded.
5.9.4 In conductors having multiple layers of aluminium wires, the lay ratio of any aluminium layer
shall not be grater than the lay ratio of the aluminium layer immediately beneath it.
5.10 Standard length
5.10.1 The standard length of the conductor shall be 1100 meters. A tolerance of 5% on the
standard length shall be permitted. All lengths outside this limit of tolerance shall be treated
as random lengths.
5.10.2 Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard length
specified and the total quantity of such random lengths shall not be more than 5% of the total
quantity ordered.
5.10.3 Supplier shall also indicate the max single length above the standard length, he can
manufacture, in the guaranteed technical particulars. This is required for special stretches like
river crossing etc. The purchaser reserves the right to place orders for the above length to the
extent of 5 % of the total ordered quantity on the same terms and conditions applicable for the
standard lengths during the pendency of the contract.
6. TESTS
6.1 The type, acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture, shall be carried out on
the conductor. For the purpose of this clause:
6.1.1 The tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out to prove the process of
manufacture and general conformity of the material to this specification. These tests shall be
carried out on samples prior to commencement of commercial production against the order.
the supplier shall indicate his schedule for carrying out these tests in the activity schedule.
6.1.2 Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on samples taken from
each lot offered for pre-despatch inspection, for the purposes of acceptance of that lot.

6.1.3 Routine testes shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on each strand/spool/length
of the conductor to check requirements which are likely to vary during production.
6.1.4 Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out during the
process of manufacture and end impaction by the supplier to ensure the desired quality of the
end product to be supplied by him.
6.1.5 Samples for individual wires for tests shall be taken before standing from not less than ten
percent of the spool in the case of aluminium wires and ten percent of the coils in the case of
steel wires. If samples are taken after stranding, they shall be obtained by cutting 1.2 meters
from the outer end of the finished conductor from not more than ten percent of the finished
reels.
6.1.6 The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed against them .
6.1.7 For type and acceptance tests. The acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by the
supplier in the proforma for Guaranteed Technical Particulars, furnished in the Annexure-II
or the acceptance value specified in this specifications, whichever is more stringent for that
particular test.
6.2 Acceptance tests
a) Visual and dimension check

b) Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and lengths of conductor
c) Dimensional check on steel and aluminium strands
d) Check for lay rations of various layers
e) Galvanized test on steel strands
f) Torsion or elongation test on steel strands.
g) Breaking load test on steel and aluminium strands
h) DC resistance test on aluminium strands
Note : All the above tests shall be carried out on aluminium and steel strands after stranding
only.
6.3 Routine tests
a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification.

b) Check that there are no cuts, etc, on the strands.
c) Check that drums are as per specifications.
d) All acceptance tests as mentioned in clause 6.2 above shall be carried out on each coil.
6.4 Testing expenses
6.4.1 The testing charges for the type tests specified shall be indicated separately in prescribed
schedule.
6.4.2 The supplier shall indicated the type test charges for each type test separately.
6.4.3 In case of failure in any type, the supplier is either required to modify the design of the
material or repeat the particular type test three times successfully at his own expenses. The
decision of the purchaser in this regard shall be final binding.
6.4.4 Suppliers shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests. They
shall ensure that the tests can be completed in these laboratories within the time schedule
guaranteed by them in the appropriate schedule.
6.4.5 The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture
specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of conductor, except for
the expenses of the inspector/purchasers representative.

6.5 Additional tests.
The purchaser reserves that right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at suppliers premises, at site, or in any place in additional to
the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests, to satisfy himself that the material comply
with the specifications.
6.6 Sample batch for testing
6.6.1 The supplier shall offer at least three (3) drums for selection of samples required from each
batch of 500 km for conducting all the tests.
6.6.2 The supplier is required to carry out all the acceptance tests successfully in the presence of
purchasers representative before despatch.
6.7 Test reports
6.7.1 Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six(6) copies alongwith one original.
One copy shall be returned duly certified by the purchaser only after which the material will be
despatched.
6.7.2 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the supplier at his works for periodic
inspection by the purchasers representative.
6.7.3 Test certificates of tests conducted during manufacturer shall be maintained by the supplier.
These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the purchaser. .
6.8 Test facilities
6.8.1 The following additional test facilities shall be available at suppliers works.
a) Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment including tensile testing machine,
resistance measurement facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer etc.
b) Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.
c) Finished conductor shall be checked for length verification and surface finish on separate
rewinding machine at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 meters per minute). The
rewinding facilities shall have appropriate clutch system and shall be free from vibrations,
jerks etc. with transverse layering facilities.
7. INSPECTION
7.1 The purchasers representative shall, at all times, be entitled to have access to the works and
all places of manufacture where conductor shall be manufactured and the representative shall
have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the suppliers work, raw materials and process
of manufacture and conduiting necessary tests as detailed herein
7.2 The suppler shall keep the purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the
progress of manufacture of conductor in its various stages so that arrangements can be made
for inspection.
7.3 No material shall be despatched form its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily
inspected and tested, unless the inspection is waived off by the purchaser in writing. In the
later case also, the conductor shall be despatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests
specified herein has been completed and approved by the purchaser.
7.4 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the supplier of any of his
responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification, and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

7.5 At lest 5% of the total number of drums subject to minimum of two in any lot put up for
inspection, shall be selected at random to ascertain the length of conductor by the following
method.
At the works of the manufacturer of the conductor, the conductor shall be transferred from
one drum to another at the same time measuring its length with the help of a graduated pulley
and cyclometer. The difference in the average length thus optioned and as declared by the
supplier in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the conductor is found short
during checking.
8. DOCUMENTATION
8.1 Six sets of type test reports, duly approved by the purchaser shall be submitted by the
supplier for distribution, before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of acceptance
and routine test certificates, duly approved by the purchaser shall accompany the despatch
consignment.
8.2 Approval of drawing/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and
standards, rules and codes of practices. The material shall conform in all respects to high
the time of ordering and purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or material which
in his judgement is not in full accordance therewith.
9. PACKING AND FORWARDING
9.1 The conductor shall be supplied in non returnable, strong wooden drums provided with
lagging of adequate strength capable of withstanding displacement during transit, storage and
subsequent handling and stringing operation in the field. The drums shall generally conform to
IS:1778-1980 except otherwise specified hereinafter.
9.2 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for jetting off the conductor under a
minimum controlled tension of the order of 5 kN
9.3 The supplier shall submit the proposed drum drawings alongwith the bid. However, the same
shall be in line with the requirements as stated herein. After placement of the letter of award,
the supplier shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum he wishes to
supply, for purchasers approval before taking up manufacturing of conductor. After getting
approval from the purchaser, the supplier shall submit 30 more copies of the approved from
the purchaser, the supplier shall submit 30 more copies of the approved drawings to
purchaser for further distribution and field use at purchasers end.
9.4 All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from defects
that may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative treatment for
anti-termite/ antifungus (Aldrime/Aldruse) shall be applied to the entire drum with
preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor.
9.5 The flanges shall be of tow/three ply construction with each ply at right angles to the other
and nailed together. The nails shall be driven from the inside face flange, punched and then
clenched on the outer face. The tolerance in thickness of each ply shall be +3 mm only. There
shall be alteast 3 nails per plank of ply with maximum nail spacing of 75 mm. where a slot is
cut in the flange to receive the inner end of the conductor, the entrance shall be in line with
the periphery of the barrel.
9.6 The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of segmental type.
These shall be nailed to the barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be
closely butted and shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface. The edges of the
battens shall be rounded or chamfered to avoid damages to the conductor.

9.7 Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The flanges shall be holed and barrel
supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length on either
end, sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing flanges at the
required spacing. Barrel studs should be tack-welded with the nuts for fixing flanges at the
required spacing. Barrel studs should be tack welded with the nuts after tightening.
9.8 Normally the nuts on the studs shall stand proud of the flanges. All the nails used on the inner
surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be countersunk. The ends of barrel shall
generally be flushed with the to of the nuts.
9.9 The inner check of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall be painted with a bitumen based
paint.
9.10 Before reeling, card board of double corrugated or thick bituminize waterproof bamboo paper
shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges or the drum by means of the suitable
commercial adhesive material. The paper should be dried before use. Medium grade kraft
paper shall be used in between the layer of the conductor. After reeling the conductor, the
exposed surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped with thin polythene sheet
across the flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and damage during transportation
and handling and also to prevent ingress of rain water during storage/transport.
9.11 A minimum space of 125 mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the external
protective layer and outer layer of the conductor.
9.12 Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the flange edges with
at least 2 nails per end. The length of the nail shall be less than twice the thickness of the
battens. The nail shall not protrude above the general surface and shall not have exposed
sharp edges or allow the battens to be released due to corrosion.
9.13 Outside the protective layer, three shall be a minimum of two binders consisting of hoop
iron/galvanized steel wire. Each protective layer shall have two recess to accommodated the
binders.
9.14 The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the help of U-nails. The
composite conductor shall be hinged by use of galvanized steel wire/aluminium wire at three
locations al least 75 mm apart or more covered with PVC adhesive tape so as to avoid
loosening of conductor layers in transit and handling.
9.15 Only one length of conductor shall be wound on each drum.
9.16 Marking
The drum shall have the following information stenciled on it in indelible ink alongwith other
essential data.
a) Purchase order number .

b) Name and address of consignee
c) Manufacturers name and address
d) Drum number
e) Size of conductor
f) Length of conductor
g) Gross weight of drum with conductor
h) Weight of empty drum with lagging
i) Arrow marking for unwinding
10. QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENT
Quantity and delivery requirement is set out in Schedule of quantities

11. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
The guaranteed technical particulars duly signed are required to be furnished by the bidder
alongwith the tender as per annexure-II

ANNEXURE-I
SYSTEM PARTICULARS
Electrical system data
a) System voltage (kV rms)

b) Max. voltage (kV rms)
c) Lighting impulse withstand voltage (dry and wet) (kVp)
d) Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) (kV rms)
e) Short circuit level (kA) and duration

ANNEXURE-II
(TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SUPPLIER)
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CONDUCTOR
1. Code word.
2. Makers name, address and country
a) Aluminium wire
b) Steel wire
c) Complete conductor
3. Stranding wire diameter. (standard/max/min) mm
a) Aluminium
b) Steel
4. Standard nominal copper area in sq. mm
5. Calculated equivalent aluminium area in sq mm.
6. Actual aluminium area in sq mm
7. Standard area of cross section in sq mm
a) Aluminium strand
b) Steel strand
c) Conductor
8. Diameter of complete conductor in mm
9. Minimum ultimate tensile stress of strand in kg/sq. mm
a) Aluminium strand
b) Steel strand
10. Guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of conductor in kg.
11. Minimum breaking load in kg for.
a) Aluminium strand
b) Steel strand
12. Purity and aluminium rods in %
13. Zinc coating of steel strand.
a) Thickness of coating number and duration of dips (precess test)

b) Minimum weight of coating in gms/sq mtr
14. Maximum working tension
15. Weight in kg per km (maximum / minimum )
a) Aluminium
b) Steel
c) Conductor

16. Maximum resistance in ohms per kM at 20 deg C
a) Aluminium strand
b) Conductor
17. a) Continuous max. current rating of conductor in still air at 45 deg C ambient
temperature (amps)
b) Temperature rise for the above current (deg C)
18. Lay ratio Max. Min.
Steel core 6 wire layer

Aluminium 12 wire layer
18 wire layer
24 wire layer
19. Whether the drum on which the conductor is wound conforms to the specification and whether
the detailed dimensioned drawing submitted with the tender.
20. Modulus of elasticity of
a) Aluminium strand kg/sq cm

b) Steel strand kg/sq cm
c) Conductor kg/sq cm
21. Co-efficient of liner expansion per degree centigrade of
a) Aluminium strand :

11KV CROSS LINKED POLY ETHYLENE INSULATED PVC SHEATHED SINGEL CORE 630 mm2
CABLES
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the manufacture, testing inspection at manufacturers work, supply
and delivery F.O.R destination of single core XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cable suitable for
solidly grounded system as per Schedule of Quantities .
2. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM

The cable shall be suitable for use on 50 cycles, 3 phases solidly earth neutral system and for
working voltage of 11 kV.
3. STANDARDS
The cable covers under this specification shall conform in all respect with the latest editions of
IS-7098 (part-2) 1985 and IS-8130-1984 and IEC:502 of the latest version thereof .
4. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS :
11 kV, single core under ground XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cable suitable for working
pressure of 11 kV on earthed system manufactured in accordance with IS:7098 (part-2_ 1985
with latest amendments. The aluminium conductor shall comply with requirements specified
in IS:8130-1984. The insulation shall be chemically cross linked poly ethylene confirming to
the physical, electrical and ageing properly as required in latest edition of IS-7098 (paft-2)
1985. Cable shall be provided both conductor screening and insulation screening. The
conductor screening shall be non-metallic and shall be consisting of either semi-conducting
tape or a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound or combination of two. The insulation
screening shall consist of non metallic semi-conducting tape of extruded semi-conducting
compound layer in combination with nonmagnetic metallic shield. Armouring shall be
arranged over the core and it shall be of non-magnetic material. The material for the
armouring shall be as per relevant ISS. Over the armouring the cable shall be provided with
extruded PVC outer sheath. The completion of PVC compound shall be type ST-2 of IS-5831-
1984. The colour of outer sheath shall be black or grey.
5. SIZE
The size of the cable shall be single core 630 mm2
6. TESTS
The type, acceptance routine tests shall be carried out as per IS-7098 (part-ii) 1985 with latest
amendments. A photo copy of type tests carried out from Govt./Recognised house should be
submitted with the tender as otherwise the tender is liable to be rejected.
7. INSPECTION
The material shall be inspected and tested before despatch by an authorized representative
of the board in respect of quality.
The inspecting officer shall also satisfy himself about the correctness of length of cable as
provided in Instruction N-208 of EB manual of instruction 1969 edition amended vide HSEB
O/O No. G/BD-33(57)75 dated 18.4.75
In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works, such tests
may got carried out by him at any Govt. recognized test agency at him own expense.

8. TEST CERTIFICATES
The supplier shall supply test certificates from a recognised Govt. agency in respect of quality
as IS:7098 (part-II) 1985 with latest amendments thereon for approval of purchaser.
9. PACKING
The cable shall be supplied in non----turnable wooden drums as per IS : 10418 : 1982 so
constructed as to enable the cable to be transported on each drum. The cable wound on such
drum shall be one conditions length. The ends of cable shall be sealed by means non-
hygroscopic sealing material
10. MARKING
The marking on the drum shall have the following information :
a) Reference to Indian Standard and Cable Code.
b) Name of the manufacturer and trade name
c) Nominal cross-section area of the conduction for the cable
d) Number of core.
e) Type of the cable and voltage for which it is suitable.
f) Length of cable on the drum.
g) Approximate gross weight
h) Net weight of the cable
i) Drum identification number
j) P.O. No & date.
k) Consignees name with destination
l) Year of manufacture
Note : Cable should be marked with ISI certification mark.
11. DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUAL

The tenderer shall supply the following drawings with the tender :
i) Detailed drawing of the cable showing conductor, screening insulation, armouring, outer
sheath etc.
ii) Detailed drawing showing jointing of cable and sealing and boxes.
Copies of instruction and maintenance of cables, shall also be submitted with the offer for
reference of the purchaser.
12. SEQUENTIALLY MARKING

The power cable wound on wooden drums would be sequentially marked at an interval of 1
(one) meter each beginning from its start end to finishing end.
GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

These must be furnished strictly as called for in Annexure A

ANNEXURE A
Sl No. Particulars Unit
1. Names of manufacturer
2. Type of cable
3. Voltage rating kV
4. Applicable standard
5. Conductor
6. a) Material
b) Num- cross sectional area No
c) No of strands
d) Min no of wires in each strand
e) Dia of each wire in strand No
f) Shape
7. Conductor screen
a) Material mm
b) Thickness
8. Insulation
a) Material mm
b) Thickness
9. Insulation screen
a) Non-metallic part
i) Material
ii) thickness
b)
i) Metallic part
ii) Material
10. Armour
a) Material
b) Non dia/Thickness
11. Outer sheath
a) Material
b) Non Thickness mm
12. Approx. overall dia of cable mm

13. Standard packing length meter
14. Approx. Weight of cable kg/100 m
15. Min bending radius
16. Max DC resistance of conductor at 200 ohm/km
17. Approx. AC resistance of conductor at maximum operating
temperature
18. Approx reactance at 60 H ohm/km
19. Approx capacitance per phase mfd/km
20. Continuous current carrying capacity under standard
conditions

a) In air at 40 deg C amps
b) In ground at 40 deg C amps
c) In duct at 30 deg C amps
21. Derating factor for variation.
a) In ambient air temp 0 deg C

b) In ground temp factor
22. Maximum permissible conductor temperature
a) At rated current
b) At short circuit conditions
23. Short circuit rating of conductor one second kA

UNARMOURED COPPER CONTROL CABLES
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the manufacture testing supply and delivery of PVC insulated PVC
sheathed unarmoured copper control cables The reliability and long life of control cable is
therefore, of paramount importance. All the control cables offered against this specification
must bear ISI certification mark.
2.0 STANDARDS
Copper control cable to be supplied shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed unarmoured for
indoor and outdoor applications in air, in ground, in water and in concrete trenches. The
control cables shall conform in all respects to the requirements of IS-1554 (part-I) 1988 ad its
subsequent amendments, if any
3.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
The insulated cores shall be provided with inner sheath unarmoured but provided with an
outer sheath as specified in IS-1554 (part-I) 1988 amended upto date. The control cable
offered shall be suitable for use in system upto 1100 volts.
The conductors shall be composed of plain annealed high conductivity copper which before
stranding shall be approximately circle in selection, smooth, uniform in quality and free from
scale, in-equalities, spills, splits and other defects. The conductors shall conform to
appropriate dimensions and resistance as per I.S. 1554 (Part-I) 1988.
4.0 INSULATION
The basic material employed as insulating compound shall consist of compound polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) or suitable co-polyment of which major consistent shall be vinyl chloride or
mixture of polyvinyl chloride and suitable co-polymers which have been suitably compounded
and proceed so as to comply with the requirements of IS 1554 (part-i) 1988. To prove the
general qualities and design of the control cable would be forwarded with the bid. The board
may ask any or all the bidders to get their cables type tested at his (their) own cost. In case
any of the bidder would like the board
The PVC compound going into the formation of insulation shall also comply with the provision
IS-5831-1970 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cable. The insulation shall withstand the
rigours of climate and site conditions and shall not crack or retract in normal use.
The colour code of the cores of control cable shall be as per clause 10.1 of ISS-1554 (par-1).
However the outer PVC sheath shall be black or grey. The colour coding as employed in the
formation of the cables for individual cores and sheath shall be indicated in the bid. The
PVC/co-polymer compounds going into the formation of the outer sheathing shall afford
degree of mechanical protection besides being oil and weather resistant.
5.0 MATERIAL
All the material used in the manufacture of the cables shall be of the best the available quality
with regard to strength durability and shall also be manufactured according to best
engineering practices.
6.0 PACKING
The cable shall be supplied in reels so constructed as to avoid any damage to the cable.

The reels should be able to withstand rough handling during the transportation and storage.
Any loss on account of improper design of reels shall be borne by the supplier. The bidders
shall clearly state the standard lengths in which the cable shall be supplied alongwith
tolerance, if any, in their quotations. The cable wound on one drum shall be of continues
length and minimum length of control cable per drum shall be 500 metres.
7.0 TEST AND INSPECTION
7.1 Type test : -
All/unarmoured control cables would comply with the requirement of type tests as laid down in
para 15.1 IS-1554 (part-I) 1988 read with its subsequent amendments, if any, reports of type
tests to defray the charges on account of above testing, he may clearly state so in his bid.
The board may ask any or all the bidder to get their cables type tested at his (their) own cost.
In case any of the bidder would like the board to defray the charges on account of above
testing, he may clearly state so in his bid.
7.2 Acceptance test :
The control cables would be subjected to tests laid down in para 15.2 of IS-1554 (part-I)1988
before accepting a lot at the time of inspection.
7.3 Routine tests:-
Tests laid down in para 15.3 of IS-1554(part-I)1988 would be carried out in the presence of
Boards representative and the tests reports would be submitted to the chief Engineer/Design
& Procurement, HSEB, Hisar for approval before effecting dispatch of unarmoured control
cables.
8.0 QUANTITY
The required quantity of the cable is as per the Schedule of quantities to the specification.
The length of the cable may be increased or decreased by 10% at the time of placement of
purchase order or thereafter but in any case before the expiry of the contract. this contractor
shall supply such additional cable lengths on the same rates, terms and conditions.
9.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
The bidder shall give in his bid the guaranteed technical particulars of the cables as per
Appendix A attached. Any additional information considered necessary by bidder, with a
view to high light the technical aspects of his offer, may also be supplied under this head. The
bidder shall clearly state the current rating factors applicable to control cables as per item 21
of appendix A
10.0 LIST OF REFERENCES :

List k of reference of similar cables already supplied with complete details shall be furnished.
11.0 DEVIATION FROM THE SPECIFICATION

This should be clearly listed and brought out.
12.0 LIMATE CONDITIONS

The control cables are required to operate satisfactory under the following site conditions.
i) Max. temp. 50 deg C

ii) Min temp. -2.5 deg C
iii) Max relative humidity 100%
iv) Min relative humidity 26 %

v) Isoceraunic level 45
vi) No of rainy days per year 120
vii) Average rainfall per year 900 mm
viii) Altitude Below 1000 m above mean sea
level
13.0 MARKING
Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with indelible ink or with suitable weather resistant
paint and shall bear the following particulars.
i) Manufacturer name and trade mark, if any

ii) Purchase order no. and date
iii) Year of manufacture
iv) Nominal sectional area of conductor of the cable
v) No of cores
vi) Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable
vii) Length of cable on the drum
viii) Gross weight of the drum
ix) Weight of tare
x) Direct of rolling the drum
14.0 DELIVERY
The successful bidder would be required to commence the delivery of unarmoured control
cables within three months of the award of contract and complete if three months thereafter.
15.0 INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE

Detailed instructions in regard to safe and proper storage of unarmoured control cables in our
storage would be made available by the successful bidder well before commencing despatch
of the material.

APPENDIX A
(to be filled in separately for each size of the unarmoured control cable)
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Year of manufacturer
3. No of cores
4. Cross section of cores
5. No and diameter of wires
6. Shape of conductor
7. Material of conductor
8. Current carrying capacity
9. Insulation thickness and material
10. Insulation resistance
11. Thickness and material of inner sheath
12. Nominal dia over inner sheath
13. Conductor resistance
14. Colour scheme of cores
15. Thickness and material outer sheath
16. Test voltages, both AC and DC
17. Length of cable per drum
18. Net weight per drum length
19. Gross weight per drum
20. Current rating factors based on
a) Variation in ground temperature
b) Variation in ambient air temperature
c) Groups laid direct in ground in horizontal formation
d) Groups laid direct in ground in tier formation
e) Depth of laying in ground
f) Group laid in covered trenches in horizontal formation.
21. Standard

11 KV SWICHGEAR PANELS VACCUM TYPE
1. SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturers

works before dispatch, supply delivery F.O.R. destination as per schedule of requirement.
2. STANDARDS :
The switchgear panels shall comply in all respects the requirement laid down in the latest
edition of IS: 13118-1991, IS: 3427 & IS: 3231
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions.
Max. temperature 50 Deg C

Min. temperature -2.5 Deg C
Max. relative humidity 100%
Min. relative humidity 26%
Average number of rainy days per annum Nearly 120 days
Average annual rainfall 900 mm
Average number of dust storm days per annum 35
Isoceraunic level 45
Max. Wind pressures 195-kg/sq. Mt.
Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 Mts.
4. TYPE AND RATING
The 11 kV switchgear panels shall comprise of 11 kV vacuum type circuit breakers,

instrument panels and instrument transformer etc. suitable for indoor use. The equipment
shall be totally enclosed in a metal clad cubicle, dust and vermin proof with necessary
isolation arrangement. Each panel shall be easily extensible on either side and should be
complete with necessary internal copper connections, small wiring, LT fuses and supporting
framework with bolts to secure it to the floor.
The breakers shall have the following ratings: -

1.1 Type Vacuum
1.2 No of poles 3
1.3 Nominal system voltage 11 kV
1.4 Highest system voltage 12 kV
1.5 Rated frequency 50 1.5 Hz.
1.6 Rated continuous current rating at an

ambient temp. as specified in IS L 13118
1991 (latest edition) 1250 amp. for incoming and 400 amp
for outgoing feeders
1.7 Symmetrical breaking capacity 350 NVA
1.8 Impulse withstand test voltage 75 kV (peak)

1.9 One minute power frequency withstand
test voltage. 28 kV (rms)
1.10 Short time current rating Not less than 18.4 kA current corresponding
to 350 MVA for 1 sec.
1.11 System neutral Solidly earthed.
5. GENERAL DESIGN OF SWITCHGEAR PANELS
5.1 Operating Mechanism
The vacuum type circuit breaker shall be draw out type and trip free. The VCBs shall be
suitable for operation from 110 VDC auxiliary supply. The operating mechanism shall be
motor operated spring charged type. There shall be provision(s) for manual charging of
closing spring and emergency hand trip. The motor used for the purpose will be suitable for
240 V Ac as well as for 110 V DC . The operating mechanism shall work satisfactorily at 85%
- 110% of rated supply voltage. The VCB shall have 2 normally open and 2 normally closed
auxiliary contacts over and above the ones required for various controls and supervision
circuits.
5.2 Instrument Panels
Each unit shall have its own instrument panel provided at the tope and complete with small
wiring connections from relays, instrument transformers, metering instruments, indicating
instruments, selector switches and circuit breaker control switch. All wiring shall be carried out
by using stranded single annealed copper conductor insulated with polyvinyl chloride
insulation suitable for 650 V service and in accordance with IS: 732 1963. CT/PT circuit
shall used wire of not less 2.5 mm2 X-sectional are whereas control/alarm/supervision circuit
shall used wire of not less than 1.5 mm2 X-sectional area. All wires will be continuous from
one terminal to the other and, also will have no Tee-junction enroute. The connection shall be
securely made with the help of connecting lugs duly crimped on to the copper conductor. The
meters and relays shall be mounted in a convenient position so as to be readily accessible for
inspection or repair. The terminal board provided in the instrument panel of VCBs will be
made of moulded dielectric having brass studs, washers, holding nuts and locking nuts. All
holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connection studs shall project 6 mm from
the lock nut surface. NO OTHER TYPE OF TERMINAL BOARD IS ACCEPTABLE. The
panels shall have a degree of protection of I.P.H 6. The leads from metering CTs shall be
directly terminated at TTB and there from at the kWH meter with a provision to seal TTB and
kWH meter. The said CT leads will be concealed to prevent their tempering enroute. Similar
PT leads from secondary box of the PT to TTB and there from to energy meter including inter
panel PT leads will also be concealed to prevent their tempering. The made and extent of
concealing the metering leads of CTs and PTs to prevent their tempering (by unscrupulous
operating personnel) will be discussed and mutually agreed upon with the successful
bidder(s). TTB used on the instrument panel should be suitable for front connection.
Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the relays/switches mounted on the
instrument panel and a suitably sized copper conductor shall do metal enclosed switchgear.
Earth bus made of 25 x 3-mm bare copper flat will be extended through entire length of 11 kV
switchboard with suitable provision to connect it to the sub-station earth at the extremities.
The earthing arrangement will meet with the requirements laid down in IS: 3427 read with its
latest amendment.
5.3 Instrument Transformers
The secondary voltage and current rating of the instrument transformers shall match the
metering or protective equipment. The CTs shall have ratio and accuracy class as mentioned
in the schedule of equipment. The CTs shall be wound/ring type in accordance with their
ratings. The terminal boards associated with differential CTs, REF CTs and over-current/

earth fault protection CTs will be of disconnecting type having short circuiting facility and thus
facilitate testing of concerned protective secondary relay without disturbing the associated
small wiring interchangeability of housing of CTs from one panel to another must be ensured.
A resin cast potential transformer of ratio 11000/ 3 110/ 3 volts having 100 VA output per
phase with accuracy class 1.0 as per ISS : 3156 (part-II)-1965 shall be provided on the
incoming side of each panel set and shall be star/star connected. It shall be provided with HT
and LT fuses.
The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers shall be
earthed to the main earth bus referred to in the concluding paragraph of clause 5.2 multiple
earthing of any instrument transformers shall be avoided.
5.4 Bus
All the panels shall be provided with insulated copper bus-bars of 1250 amps continuous
current rating for all switch boards and these shall be connected in a separate moisture and
vermin proof sheet metal chamber.
The bus bars connections and insulator supports shall be mechanically strung and rigidly
supported so as to withstand the stresses generated by vibrations, variations in temperature
and due to server short circuits.
The bus bars shall be supported on insulators at short intervals keeping adequate clearance
between bus bars and earth. The bus bar chamber shall be provided with inspection covers
with gaskets and bus bar shutters. Provision shall be made for future extension of bus bar
and switchboard.
5.5 Limit of Temperature Rise
The temperature rise of the current carrying parts shall not exceed the permissible limits
above the ambient temperature as per relevant standards (latest edition).
5.6 Bushing Insulators
These shall comply with the latest issue of IS: 2099 in all respects.
5.7 Disconnectors Of Circuit Breakers And Their Interlocks
All disconnectors (isolators) of the 11 kV VCBs and interlocks between different pieces of
apparatus provided for reasons of safety and for convenience of operation of switchgear shall
meet with the requirement of IS:34271969 read with its latest amendment.
5.8 Cable Boxes
Each 11 kV incoming VCB shall be provided with cable boxes complete with jointing kits and
sealing material suitable for receiving 2 sets of cable each comprising 3 nos 630 mm2 , 11 kV
single core XLPE, outer PVC sheathed cables. The outgoing 11 kV VCBs including 11 kV
capacitor controlling VCB shall be provided cable boxes suitable to receive 3 core, 11kV
XLPE PVC sheathed cable of size upto 300 mm2 (panel with CT ratio 300- 150/5 A), upto 185
mm2 (panel with CT ratio 200/100/5A). The 11 kV station transformer VCB shall be provided
with cable boxes ( EPOXY RESIN TYPE) suitable to receive 3 core, 11 kV, PILCDSTA cables
of size upto 50mm2 (panel with CT ratio 60-30/5A). Each cable box shall have vertical entry
from below. These cable boxes shall be complete in all respects including cable glands of
requisite size.

5.9 Supervision Scheme
Instrument panels on each of the 11kV VCB covered by this specification shall be provided
with the following indicating lamps/relay: -
Circuit breaker open Green

Circuit breaker close Red
Auto trip White
Circuit breaker spring charged Blue
For monitoring of trip circuit both in pre-close and post close position of the circuit breaker, 1
no. Automatic trip circuit supervision relay will be provided on each of the 11 kV (incoming)
instrument panel. In case of trip circuit becoming faulty, the operation of this relay shall be
accompanied by visual and audio annunciation in accordance with clause.5.10.1 of the
specification.
However, the trip circuit of each of the 11 kV outgoing/capacitor/Stn. VCB will be monitored
on demand with the help of an indicating lamp and a push button both when the VCB is
OPEN &CLOSED. The lamp shall be amber colour.
5.10 Alarm Scheme :
5.10.1 Non Trip Alarm Scheme
Each of 11 kV (incoming) panel will be provided with a non trip alarm scheme comprising
suitable auxiliary relay (rated for 110V DC), accept push button, reset push button and a
buzzer. It will cater to non- trip condition such as trip circuit faulty and PT secondary fuses
blow off. The non-trip alarm scheme will meet with the following requirements: -
i) The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be accompanied by a
flag indication on the concerned auxiliary relay.
ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp, which will not reset until the fault
has cleared.
iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing accept push button. If after
cancelling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault persists the
buzzer shall be suppressed.
iv) If after cancelling the alarm but before resetting visual signal some other fault takes
place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate auxiliary relay shall take
place.
v) If after cancelling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same fault appears
or some other fault take place, the alarm, flag indication and non trip lamp indication
shall reappear as usual.
vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of a push button and resetting of
visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button.
vii) Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at frequent
intervals.
viii) The equipment shall be suitable for 110 volts DC operation.
5.10.2 Trip Alarm Schemes
Trip commands due to operation of protective relay on any of 11 kV VCB constituting the
switchboard will trip the concerned VCB. Its auxiliary contract will actuate a bell (provided in
each of the 11 kV incoming VCB) and will be cancelled by the associated circuit breaker
control handle. Auto trip lamp will glow on the concerned 11 kV VCB and there will be flag
indication on the concerned protective relay.

5.11 PT Fuse Fail Alarm Scheme
Each of the11 kV (incoming) instrument panel is to be provided with a relay to monitor the
fuses on the secondary side of 11 kV metering PT the failure of any of secondary fuse on
the11 kV PT will be accompanied by visual and audio indication in accordance with clause
5.10.1 of the specification. Non of the 11 kV outgoing/capacitor/Stn. VCB will be provided with
fuses and inter-circuit PT leads may run from one bus wire board to the other.
5.12 Metering Scheme
5.12.1 Each of the 11 kV VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed ammeter (additional dials, if
any, required to cover all the taps of the CTs shall be included at the time of bidding) with a
selector switch facilitating measurement of phase currents as well as unbalance current. The
coil of ammeter shall be rated for 5 amp. The instrument shall be of moving iron spring
controlled type of industrial grade A classification having accuracy class 1.0 and shall
conform to IS:1248 (1968).
5.12.2 Each of the 11 kV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed voltmeter with a
selector switch. The selector switch shall facilitate the measurement of phase to phase and
phase to neutral voltage of all the three phases one by one. The coil of the voltmeter shall be
of moving iron spring controlled type of industrial grade A classification with accuracy class
1.0 and shall conform to IS : 1248 (1968)
5.12.3 Each of the 11 kV VCB except the 11 kV capacitor VCB will be equipped with a three phase
four wire kWH meter. The kWH meter shall be rated for 5A CT secondary and 110 V/ 3
(phase to neutral) available from 11kV PT mounted on each of the incoming VCB. The
instrument shall be iron cored dynamometer type having accuracy class 1.0.
5.12.4 Each of the11 kV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a power factor meter. The PF meter
having a range of 0.2 lag zero 0.2 lead shall be of 2 element type suitable for use on three
phase three wire unbalanced system. It shall be rated for 5 amp CT secondary and 110 V (
phase to phase) available form 11 kV PT mounted on each of the 11 kV incoming VCB
incoming VCB. The instrument shall be iron-cored dynamometer type having accuracy class
1.0.
N.B : Routine test certificates of all the indicating and integrating instruments will be submitted
alongwith the routine test certificates of 11 kV switchgear.
5.13 Control Scheme
5.13.1 The instrument panel of each of the 11 kV VCB will be equipped with a circuit breaker control
handle of pistolgrip type with spring return to neutral position and having bell alarm
cancellation contracts. The control handle shall be so designed that after being operated to
close a VCB the operation cannot be repeated until the control handle has been turned to
trip position making it impossible to perform two closing operation consecutively.
5.13.2 The rating of the control handle shall be suitable for the duty imposed by the closing and
opening mechanism of VCB. The moving and fixed contacts shall be of such a shape and
material to ensure good contact and long life under services operating duty. All contacts shall
be readily renewable.
5.13.3 The bidder keeping in view the requirements of this specification will decide the number of
contacts in the control handle. Two pairs of contacts shall be kept spare. The total number of
contacts proposed to be provided shall be stated in the bid.
5.13.4 Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch on the control handle shall be ensured.

5.14 Protection Scheme
5.14.1 For Incoming Panels :
Each incoming instrument panel shall be provided with a single pole restricted earth fault
relay suitable for 5 amp CT (secondary) with a setting rate of 10% to 40% of 5 amp. The relay
shall be housed in draw cut flush mounting case. The back up protection shall be in the form
of a combined over current and earth fault relay (two over current and one earth fault). This
shall be triple pole having inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic with a 3/10
time current curve i.e., the relay operating time shall be 3 second at 10 times the plug setting
at TMS1. The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and
shall have a setting range of 50-200% of 5 amp. ( The relay for station transformer shall have
setting range of 20-80% of 5 amp) and adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug
board. The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 20-
80% of 5 amps, adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of plug board (for station
transformers panels, the setting range shall be 10-40% of 5 amp) Each of the three elements
shall be fitted with shunt reinforcing unit with hand reset operation indicator.
5.14.2 For Outgoing Feeders Panels :
Each outgoing feeder panel shall be provided with a triple pole IDMTL type combined over
current and earth fault relay (two over current and one earth fault element) conforming to the
technical specification stated in the clause 5.14.1 above and one set of triple pole
instantaneous relay in the form of two over current and one earth fault element.
The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and shall have a
setting range of 500-2000% of 5 amp. (The relay for station transformer shall have a setting
range of 200- 800% of 5 amp) and adjustable in suitable steps.
The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 200-80% of
5 amp) the relay for station transformer shall have setting range of 100-400% of 5 amp)
adjustable in suitable steps.
The relay shall have low transient over reach with a high pick up/drop of ratio. The relay will
be connected in series with the triple pole combined over current and earth fault relay referred
to above and shall be so wired so as to take this (instantaneous) out, if so desired by the
purchaser at any time during operation of the equipment.
5.14.3 For Capacitor Panels
Each capacitor panel shall be provided with the following relays for protection of capacitor
banks:
i) Triple pole non-directional IDMTL type combined over current and earth fault relay (two over
current and one earth fault element) conforming to the technical specification stated in clause
5.14.1 above.
ii) 1 no. IDMTL type over voltage relay with setting range 110% to 170% of 110 V available from
11kV PT mounted in the 11kV (incoming) VCB alongwith auxiliary transformers (for external
mounting) ratio 110/103.5 to 116.5 volts (in step of 1 volt) to be used for compensating the
error of over voltage relay.
iii) 1 no. Inverse time under voltage relay with setting range of 50% to 90% of 110 v (phase to
phase connections).
iv) 1 no. Neutral displacement relay with settings 5.4, 7.5, 12.5 and 20 volts and to be fed from
open delta winding of three phase 11000/110 v. Residual voltage transformer. (residual
voltage transformer is not a part of this specification)
v) 5-minute timer to ensure that the capacitor bank is fully discharged once it has been switched
OFF before it can be switched ON again.

NB: All protective relays covered by the specification shall be of draw out type mounted on the
from of each instrument panel in a flush pattern case. The relay shall conform to IS L 3231
(latest edition) and will be suitable for 110 V DC auxiliary supply. The relay cover and case
shall be dust proof, water proof and vermin proof. Operation indicators shall be provided on al
protective relays/on their immediate auxiliary units to indicate the type of fault and
phase/phases involved. It shall be possible to reset the operation indication without opening
the relay case. The routing test certificates of all protective and auxiliary relays will be
submitted alongwith routine test certificates of 11 kV switchgear by the specification.
5.15 DC Fail Alarm Scheme
A suitable relay for monitoring the DC supply to the 11 kV switchboard shall be mounted on
each of the 11 kV incoming instrument panel. The operation of DC fail scheme shall be
accompanied by visual (indicating lamp on the instrument panel) and auto (ringing of hooter)
annunciation. It shall be possible to silence the hooter by pressing the accept push button
while the lamp shall continue to glow till the fault has been attended to and DC supply
restored. A DC fail Test push button may be provided to test the lamp circuit of the scheme.
6. SPARE PARTS
A list of spares required for 5 years of normal operation for each switchboard alongwith unit
price of each item shall be furnished with the tender for consideration.
The quantity of spare CTs for incoming and outgoing panels shall be 15% and 10%
respectively of the total quantity of individual CTs ordered in respect of all the 11 kV switch
board.
7. TESTS
All type and routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 131181991 (latest
edition thereof)
The type test certificates shall be supplied as per IS:131181991, in quadruplicate, alongwith
to judge the adequacy of the equipment by the bidder. In case the offered equipment vary in
its details vis-a-vis the certified copy of the drawing annexed with the type test report, the
bidder (s) will be required to submit fresh type test report whose date of testing/proving the
equipment will be within 5 years from the date of opening of bids against this specification.
TENDER WITHOUT TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES OF OFFERED EQUIPMENTS ARE
LIABLE TO BE REJECTED.
Voltage transformers and current transformers shall comply with the type tests as stipulated in
the latest version of IS 3156 and IS 2705 respectively. The reports of all type tests conducted
shall be supplied alongwith the tender. Tenders without type test certificate of CTs and PTs
are liable to be rejected.
The 11 kV VCB and associated CTs and PTs shall be subjected to routine tests as specified
in the latest version of the relevant ISS in the presence of purchasers representative, if so
desired by the purchaser. The routine test certificates of bought out components such as
relays, switches, indicating instruments and kWH will also be presented to purchasers
inspecting officer who will forward them to the purchaser alongwith his inspection report for
the main equipment. All test reports should be got approved from the purchaser before
dispatch of equipment.
8. DRAWINGS
In addition to any other drawing which the tenderer may like to furnish to explain to the merits
of his proposal, following drawings shall be submitted with the tender in quadruplicate: -
i) Principle dimensional detail of 11kV switchgear.
ii) General arrangement of --- panel 11 kV switchboard including its foundation details.

iii) Schematic drawings of control, metering and protection circuits in respect of 11 kV incoming
VCB, 11 kV outgoing VCB including station transformer VCB and 11 kV capacitor VCB.
iv) Drawing showing height of 11kV bus bar and arrangement of bus bar.
v) Vacuum interrupter drawing.
Four copies of the descriptive literature in respect of 11kV switchgear, relays, kWH meters,
voltmeters, ammeters, selector switches etc. proposed to be used shall also be supplied.
The successful bidder shall submit the above drawings in quadruplicate on A-3 size paper to
purchasers design and procurement, S/Stn. design for approval. The purchaser shall
communicate his comments/approval on/to the drawings to the successful bidder within a
period of four weeks. The supplier shall, if necessary modified the drawings and resubmit four
copies of the modified drawings for purchasers approval within two weeks from the date of
receipt of purchasers comments. The purchaser will approve the modified drawings within 15
days of their receipt. After receipt of purchaser approval to drawings, a set of reproducible of
approved drawings and five sets of all the approved drawings and operating manuals
containing, erection, operation and maintenance instructions per 11kV switchboard shall be
supplied to purchasers design wing for use by various agencies of the purchaser. However,
one set of drawings and operating manual will be dispatched alongwith each 11 kV
switchboard. The 11kV switchgear will not be fabricated without getting the drawing approved
from the purchaser.
In order to ensure timely receipt of all the drawings literature and reproducible etc. the
purchase section of design wing will issue despatch instruction for despatch of 11kV
switchgear.
9. SPECIAL TOOLS
The tenderer shall separately quote for a set of special tools, if so required, for erection and
maintenance of the switchgear panels
10. DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATIONS

Should the tenderer wish to deviate from the provisions of the specification either on account
of manufacturing practice, or any other reasons, he shall draw attention to the proposed point
of deviation in the tender and submit such full information drawing and specification so that
merits of his proposal may be fully understood. The specification shall be held binding unless
the deviations have fully recorded as required above.
11. TRAINING FACILITIES

The successful tenderer(s) may be called to arrange for training of purchasers
engineer/Technicians at their works so as to make them familiar with the manufacture and
assembly process of the equipment covered by the specification. Two to three
engineers/Technicians may be sent for a period of 2 weeks and full-training facilities shall be
made available to them.
12. GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure-A. Any deviation from this
specification shall be clearly brought out separately.

Annexure A
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1. Makes name and country of manufacturer.

2. Type
3. Nominal system voltage
4. Highest system voltage
5. Frequency
6. Normal current ratings
a) As ref. ambient temp. as per relevant standard
b) At site conditions.
7. Symmetrical breaking capacity.

8. Asymmetrical breaking capacity
9. a) Symmetrical breaking current
b) Short time current rating for 1 sec.
10. Making capacity

11. 1.2/50 micro second impulse wave withstand test
voltage.
12. One-minute power frequency withstands test voltage.
13. No. Of poles.
14. No of breaks in circuit per pole.
15. Length of break per phase
16. Opening time
17. Making time
18. Arc duration
19. a) Type and material of main contracts
b) Material and thickness of plating of contacts.
20. Type of arcing contacts and/or arc control device.

21. a) Whether the circuit breaker is trip free
b) Whether it is with look out preventing closing?
22. Nominal voltage of closing mechanism.

23. Power required to close circuit breaker at nominal
voltage.
24. Minimum clearance in air
a) Between phases.
b) Between live parts and earth
25. Minimum clearance in vacuum

a) Between phases.
b) Between live parts and earth
26. Total weight of complete breaker

27. Dimensions and mounting details
28. Standard to witch conforms
29. Details of reference drawings attached.
B. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
i) CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
1. Rated primary current

2. Rated secondary current
3. Rated transformation ratio
4. VA output at rated current and accuracy.

6. Rated over current factor with time in seconds.
7. Type of CTs (whether wound or bar type)
9. 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstands voltage.
10. Standard to which conform
ii) VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
1. Rated primary voltage

3. Rated burden
5. Rated voltage factor and time
7. 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstands voltage.
C. RELAYS
1. Type and make

2. Setting range
3. Other details
D. BUS BAR
1. Material
2. Normal current rating
3. Nominal area per phase
4. Shape
5. Type of insulation
E. VACUUM INTERRUPTOR BOTTLE
1. Name of manufacturer.
2. Whether imported or indigenous
3. Manufacturers type, normal amps and rupturing
capacity for vacuum bottles used on incoming panel.
capacity for vacuum bottles used on outgoing panel.
capacity for vacuum bottles used on capacitor control
panel.
6. Degree of vacuum inside the vacuum interrupters.
7. Number of full shot circuit operation, as per test duty 1to
5 of IEC-56 which the vacuum bottle offered can safely
withstand.
8. Whether the vacuum bottles used on incoming and
outgoing panels are same or different.
9. Whether the operating mechanism is imported or
indigenous.

415 VOLTAGE LT SWITCH BOARDS FOR 66 kV GRID SUB-STATION
1 SCOPE
This specification covers the manufacturer testing supply and delivery at site of all equipment
listed in the Schedule of Quantities alongwith the associated sundries to complete the job.
2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
humidity to hot. The relative humidity may vary from 26% to 100 % and the temperature may
vary from 2.5o C to 50o C with maximum to minimum conditions of humidity stated above.
The equipment is required to be operated satisfactorily under the following conditions
Temperature
i) Max. temperature 50 Deg C
ii) Min. temperature -2.5 Deg C
Relative humidity
i) Max 100 %
ii) Min 26%
iii) Isoceraunic level 45
iv) Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 mtrs
Climatic Conditions
i) Average no. of rainy days per annum Nearly 120 days
ii) Average annual rainfall 900 mm
iii) Average no of dust storm day per annum 35
iv) Max wind pressure 196 kg/m2 .
3 STANDARD
The material clad (preferably sheet metal) air break switch to be supplied against this
specifications shall meet with the requirements laid down in IS-4064-0978 (part I & II) (latest
edition). The HRC fuses shall comply with the IS-2208-1962 (latest amended). All other
equipment shall also comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the respective
Indian Standards.
4 MANUFACTURER AID WORKMANSHIP
All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and the whole of the work shall be of the highest class,
well finished and of approved design and make.
All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.
5 INTERCHANGEABILITY
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be
interchangeable in every respect.
6 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION
Should the tenderer wish to depart from the provisions of this specification either on account
of a manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw attention to the proposed

points of departure in the tender and submit such full information, drawings and specifications
so that the merit of his proposal may be fully understood.
In the even of this specification and the contractor drawings, specification tables etc. being
found to disagree during the execution of the contract, this specification shall be held as
binding unless the departure have been fully recorded as required above.
7 DRAWINGS
The tenderer shall submit with his tender dimensioned drawings of the equipment offered
alongwith illustrated and descriptive literature for the plant. Schedule of tender drg. shall be
given.
8 FOUNDATION AND FIXINGS
All plants and equipment shall be approved with a complete set of foundation holding down
bolts, washers units plants and other fixtures as may be required and these shall be supplied
by the contractor. Those fittings shall be fixed by the purchaser on the foundations unless
otherwise specified..
9 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES
All gauge, motors, instrumentation etc. shall have dials of scales calibrated in metric system
of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on
the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English language using idioms,
words and meaning as current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall be
suitably marked.
10 PAINTING
The whole of the plant expect bright parts, valves and such portion as are finished shall be
painted with two painting coats of approved rust resisting paint in plain colours for packing
and the parts not so painted shall be protected from deterioration during transit. All the ferrous
parts shall be painted. With battle ship grey paint by means of spray painting. The painting
should be as per relevant ISS. All the non-ferrous parts including the bus bars, thimbles,
jumpers shall be tinned plated and sleeves of proper thickness and size shall be provided on
all the jumpers. After erection at site every painted part shall be well cleaned filled and topped
and shall then receive two coats of best oil pint of approved colour, to be supplied by the
contractor without any extra charges.
11 TESTS
All plants and equipment shall comply with the requirements of the type tests and shall be
subjected to the routine testes specified in the relevant Indian Standard (latest editions) to
which the plant and equipment are manufactured. Type test certificates from some approved
Govt. Test House shall be submitted by tenderer with his tender.
Quadruplicate copies of the manufacturers test certificates for routing tests and of type tests
issued by the approved test house shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval as soon
as the tests are completed
12 INSTRUCTION BOOKS
Applicable parts, lists, catalogues and operating instructions in English language specially
prepared to cover all the equipment furnished under this specification which may be needed
or prove useful in operation, maintenance, repair, dismantling or assembling and for the repair

and identification of parts for ordering replacement shall be assembled under a common
cover and submitted in duplicate for each unit to the purchaser free of cost.
13 REPRODUCIBLE DRAWINGS
The contractor shall supply two sets of full size reproducible drawings (approved by the
purchaser) alongwith detailed drawings of various major components/accessories etc.
(showing sectional view, wherever necessary) on oil cloth to prove useful in the erection,
operation maintained and repair or of the equipment. He shall also supply twenty sets of azo
prints of the above mentioned drawings for use in field and design offices.
14 PARTICULARS OF SYSTEM
The equipment shall be suitable for 415 volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase 4 wire system with neutral
solidly earthed.
15 RISE IN TEMPERATURE
o
The equipment shall be operated at maximum ambient temperature of 50 C and as such the
temperature rise of its parts should be proportionately below the figure provided in respective
standards.
16 EACH SWITCH SHALL COMPRISE OF
Metal clad floor mounting combination fuse switch board consisting of a suitable bus bar of
300 amps rating for 15 ckts three phase and neutral bus bar chamber, mounted on a high
floor stand arranged and equipped for the circuits given in the schedule of requirement and
mounted above and below the bus bar chamber to form a suitable arrangement. The bus bar
chamber shall have provision for adding two more switch units as given in the schedule at a
later date. The switches shall be quick make and break type.
The switch boards shall be installed indoors. The enclosing chambers shall be dust tight and
vermin proof.
The details of equipment required for each switch board has been given in the schedule of
requirement.
17 BUS BARS
The bus bar shall be made of high conductivity copper or aluminium and shall have adequate
cross section so as to be capable of carrying 300 amp. in phases and 150 amp in neutral.
The bus bar shall be so designed and mounted in the separate chamber such that their
expansion or contraction does not subject either the bus bars or their insulation supports to
any stresses.
The bus bar shall be properly spaced so as to provide easy access during maintenance and
inspection etc. There should be not joints in the bus bars.
The current density for copper and aluminium bus bars must not exceed 116 A/cm2 and 87
A/cm2 respectively.
18 CONNECTIONS
All the connections for the tees from the bus bars shall be bolted type and suitable spring
washers shall be provided to ensure proper jointing and material of the bolts shall be of
suitable metal. All the connections shall be provided with thimbles of suitable rating.

19 METERING EQUIPMENT
Metering equipment for the station transformer/incomer shall be located between the LT side
of the transformer and LT bus bar. The metering equipment shall include 300/5 amps
CTs having burden 15 VA with accuracy class 1 and 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced load
integrating watt hour meter. A 100 mm dial flush mounted MISG (moving iron spring
controlled) voltmeter and a 100mm dial flush mounted MISC ammeter both with phase
selector switch shall also be provided on each switchboard to indicate the bus bar voltage and
total load on the station transformer/ incomer feeder. All the meters shall be enclosed in
separate chamber to have a flush pattern type appearance. The meters shall be dust tight.
20 EARTHING
Two separate earths shall be run and each and every metallic parts of the stand/switches/bus
bar chamber shall be earthed at two different places independently. The size of the earthing
conductor for the switches and individual parts shall not be less than no. 8 SWG copper
conductor and size of the main for earthing shall not be less than no. 3 SWG copper
conductor.
21 BUS BAR CHAMBER
The bus bar chamber shall be made out of angel iron of suitable size (to be specified) and will
be fabricated out of the 16 SWG mild steel sheets.
22 LABLES
Earth switch shall be provided with suitable labels painted on hard plastic sheet and duly held
in boss framed of the size 3 x 2 for the incomings and outgoings feeders. The hard plastic
sheet shall be of white colour and it will be painted in black for the outgoing feeders where as
it shall be painted in bright red for the incoming feeders.
23 INTER LOCKING
Interlocks mush be provided to ensure that the switch cover cannot be opened when the
switch is in the closed position. It should however, be possible for competent examiner to
over-ride this interlock and operate the switch with enclosure open.
24 FIRE HAZARDS
The switch and its associated apparatus shall be arranged to minimize fire hazards.
25 CLEARANCES
The clearances between phases and between phases and earth shall be as per IS-3072-1975
with latest amendments.
26 CONTACTS
All live contacts of the switch shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental contact
when the equipment is either in the isolated or normally closed position and shall be silver
plated of suitable thickness. The fixing contacts of the fuse switch unit shall be fully shrouded
with arc resistant material. Material needs to be specified in the tender.
27 CABLE AND BOXES
The incoming switch and outgoing switches shall be provided with cable and boxes of suitable
size, capacity and rating suitable for PVC cables. Typical drawings showing the cable entries

frame mounting arrangements is enclosed. Suitable clearing arrangement shall also be
provided for the cables entering the switch fuse units in the top tier.
The cabling arrangement shall be such that cables outgoing from an isolator unit can be
connected or disconnected easily and safely .
28 REPUTING CAPACITY
The rupturing capacity of the busbar switchgear/cartridges shall not be lower than 2 MVA at
415 volts.
The individual fuse switch unit shall be provided in such a way that they can be removed from
the front of the switchboard for servicing and maintenance.
All the opening in the bus bar chamber or otherwise provided for taking out connection etc.
shall be sealed with suitable glands so as to make the bus bar chamber and switches
insect/vermin proof.
29 MARKING
All the switches shall be clearly marked with the following particulars.
a) Reference to the standard.

b) Rated voltage
c) Rated normal current
d) Rated marking capacity
e) Breaking capacity
f) Type of fuse/links to be used.
30 OTHER PARTICULARS
The tenderer should clearly furnished the following information in their offer : -
a) Material and plating of the contacts

b) Current density assumed
c) Temperature rise under continuous full load over the ambient temperature of 50 deg C
d) Temperature rise under short circuit conditions.
e) Guaranteed technical particulars as required in Appendix A
List of references if similar LT switch board already in service/supplied with complete details
shall be furnished.

Appendix A
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULAR :
1. STANDARDS
The specific standard to which the switches are

designed.
2. PARTICULARS OF SWITCHES
a) Number of phases
b) Service voltage
c) Normal current
d) Frequency
e) Type of contacts
f) Material of contracts of switches and their
plating
g) clearance between phases
h) between live parts and earth
3. PARTICULARS OF BUS BARS
a) Material
i) Phases
ii) Neutral
b) Normal current rating
c) Area
i) Phases
ii) Neutral
d) Shape
4. BUS BAR CHAMBER
a) Whether vermin proof

b) Thickness of sheet steel
c) M.S angel size
5. Rupturing capacity of bus bar

switchgear/cartridges.
6. Temperature rise, under continuous load in Deg C
7. Thickness of the sheet for :

a) Main board
b) Metering chamber
8. Current density assumed for current conducting

components.
9. Rated short circuit making capacity of switches

at 415 v in kA
10. Current transformers for metering

i) VA burden
iii) Accuracy class
iv) Instrument security factor.

11. Make of :
i) Switch board
ii) Switches
iii) Selector switch
iv) HRC fuses
v) CTs
vi) KWH meter
vii) Voltmeter
viii) Ammeter
12. Details of type test supplied

13. Details of drawings supplied
14. List of references to which similar switch fuse
units have been in service.

110 VOLTAGE 200 AH DC BATTERY AND BATTERY CHARGER ALONGWITH DISTRIBUTION

BOARD
1 SCOPE
This specification covers the manufacturer testing supply and delivery at site of all equipment
listed in the Schedule of quantities alongwith the associated sundries to complete the job.
2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
humidity to hot. The relative humidity may vary from 26% to 100 % and the temperature may
vary from 2.5o C to 50o C with maximum to minimum conditions of humidity stated above.
The equipment is required to be operated satisfactorily under the following conditions: -
i. Max. temperature 50 Deg C

ii. Min. temperature -2.5 Deg C
iii. Relative humidity
a) Max 100 %
b) Min 26%
iv. Isoceraunic level 45

v. Number of rainy days per year Nearly 120 days
vi. Average rainfall per year 900 mm
vii. Altitude Below 1000 Mts.
a. Above mean seal level
viii. Max temp. of air in shade 45 Deg C.
3 STANDARD
All material and equipment shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the latest
edition of the relevant Indian Standard IS: 16511970 latest edition.
4 MANUFACTURER AID WORKMANSHIP
All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and the whole of the work shall be of the highest class
well finished and of approved design and make. Casing shall be free from blowholes, flaws
and of the true form and dimension.
All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.
5 DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
The storage batteries are required for providing on independent and reliable source of 110
volt DC supply for control, protection, alarm and indicating circuit of the high voltage
switchgear in various attended type sub-stations. The batteries shall be kept in a state of
floating trickle charge and provision made for rapid charging the batteries when so required.
The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independent 4 core cable
connection from an AC 50 cycle 3 phase 415 10% volts switchboard fed from a station

transformer. DC distribution shall be through fuse protected rotary switches mounted on a
separate distribution board.
6 TYPE OF EQUIPMENT
All equipment shall be located indoors. The batteries are to be installed in rows apart and laid
out for this purpose and rectifier panel and DC distribution panel are to be mounted on the
floor in the control room adjacent to the battery room.
The battery charging equipment and all switchgear shall be of the panel-mounted type. The
panel on which the equipment is to be mounted shall be of sheet metal fabrication with
suitable angle /channel construction.
1. Instruction card.
2. Box container and arrangement for mounting the thermometer and the hydrometer.
7 ITEM NO:2 BATTERY CHARGER
The battery charging equipment shall be housed in a sheet steel cabin finished in stove
enamelled light grey color conforming to shade 681 specification. The charger cabin shall
have thickness of 14 gauge or batter with adequate ventilation and it should be vermin proof
as far as possible. The charging equipment shall be provided with separate float charger and
boost charger as per following specifications
FLOAT CHARGER
The float charger shall be suitable for operation from a 3 phase AC supply of 415 10% volt,
50 cycle and suitable for floating 110 lead acid cells, at 2.16 volt per cell while simultaneous
supplying a continuous load of 5 amp at an ambient temperature of 50 C. The output of the
float charger shall be stabilized within 1%of the floating voltage for an input voltage variation
of 10% frequency of stand simultaneously load variation of 0-100%
The ripple content of the output of the float charger shall be limited to 3%. The float charger
shall comprise the following components
1. AC ON/OFF triple pole rotary 1 no.

2. HRC fuses with fittings 3 nos.
3. Indicating non lamps 3 nos.
4. Double wound impregnated natural air cooler
3 phase mains transformer 1 no
5. Boost transformer, if required 1 no.
8 CELL TERMINAL
Terminal posts of double cell should be clearly stamped as positive and negative and they
should be made clearly distinguishable. Two pairs of battery terminals should be provided, so
that a spare cell may be connected before the previous cell in series is removed for over-haul
9 GROUNDING
All metal parts shall be grounded according to Indian Electricity Rules. The purchaser shall
provide Bus main ground. The supplier on the charging equipment shall provide special
grounding lugs of adequate size.
10 INTERCHANGEABILITY
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be
interchangeable in every respect.

11 DRAWINGS
The tenderer shall submit with his tender dimensioned drawings of the equipment offered
alongwith illustrated and descriptive literature for the plant. Schedule of tender drawings shall
be given.
The following drawings shall be supplied with the tender.
i) Outline drawing of all apparatus showing sufficient details to enable the purchaser to
determine whether the design proposed can be installed satisfactorily or not.
ii) Wiring diagram of battery charger.
12 FOUNDATION AND FIXINGS
All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding down
bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixtures as they may be required and the contractor shall
supply those. Those fittings will be fixed by the purchaser in the foundations. All foundation
bolts fixtures etc. shall be supplied as soon as possible after drawings have been approved.
13 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES

All gauge, motors, instrumentation etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system
of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on
the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English language using idioms,
words and meaning as in current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and protection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall
be suitably marked.
14 TROPICAL TREATMENT AND PAINTS
All corrodible parts and surfaces shall be of such material and shall be provided with such
paint or other protective finishing that no part of the installed equipment shall be injuriously
effected by the atmospheric moisture, heat and fumes. The panels shall be finally painted with
light gray paint having shade no 631 of IS: 5 with stove enamelled finish.
15 PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION
The tenderer shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection of
the various portions of the work included in the tender.
The purchaser or his duly authorized agent shall have access to the contractors or sub
contractors work at any time during working hours for the purpose of inspecting the
manufacture and testing of material, equipment and completed plant and the contractor shall
provide the necessary facilities for inspection.
16 TESTS
All plants and equipment shall comply with the requirements of the type tests and shall be
subjected to the routine testes specified in the appropriate Indian Standard to which the plant
and equipment are manufactured.
Quadruplicate copies of the manufacturers test certificates for/ routine test and of type tests
issued by the appropriate authority shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval as soon
as the tests are completed

17 INSTRUCTION BOOKS : -
Applicable parts, lists, catalogues and operating instructions in English language specially
prepared to cover all the equipment furnished under this specification which may be needed
or prove useful in operation, maintenance, repair, dismantling or assembling and for the repair
and identification of parts for ordering replacement shall be assembled under a common
cover and submitted in sextuplicate for each station to the purchaser free of cost.
18 REPRODUCIBLE DRAWINGS
The contractor shall supply two sets of full size reproducible drawings (approved by the
purchaser) alongwith detailed drawings of various major components/accessories (showing
sectional view, wherever necessary) on oil cloth to prove useful in the erection, operation
maintained and repair or of the equipment. He shall also supply ten sets of prints of the above
mentioned drawings for use in field and design offices.
19 SPARE PARTS
The tenderer shall quote separately in his tender for spare parts as he would recommend for
maintenance and operation of the equipment for a period of five years A detailed list of such
spare parts with itemized prices shall be given under schedule of requirements and prices.
The purchaser may order spares subsequently as may be finally decided upon at the rates
given in the tender. All spare parts shall be interchangeable and shall be of same make
material and workmanship as the corresponding parts furnished with the main equipment.
20 DETAILS OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND SPECIFICATION
Detail of the technical particulars and specification required have been given in appendix A
any other particular considered necessary by the supplier may also be given in addition to the
above linked in annexureB
21 COMPLETION OF EQUIPMENT
Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which have not been specifically mentioned in the
specifications but which are usually necessary in the equipment shall be deemed to be
included in the contract and shall be supplied by the contractor without extra cost.
22 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION
Should the tenderer wish to depart from this specification either on account of a
manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw special attention to the proposed
points of departure in the tender and submit such full information, drawings and specification
highlighting the merit of this proposal to be appreciated.
In the event of contractor drawings, specification tables etc. disagreeing with this specification
during the execution of the contract, this specification shall be held biding unless the
departure have been fully explained as required above.

Appendix A
1 110 VOLTS DC BATTERY AND ACCESSORIES
110 volts lead acid type consisting of 110 cells having a capacity of 200 Amp. Hours at 10
hour rate of discharge to 1.85 volts per cell at 27o C strictly conforming to IS Specification
1650/1991 (latest edition) (dry and uncharged) complete with following accessories: -
a) Double row double tier stand constructed of teak wood coated with antiacid black paint
complete with cell number plates and fixing pins 2 nos. per set.
b) Insulator cell
c) Insulator stand
d) Inter tier connector
e) Inter row connector
f) Separate electrolyte for first filling per set (non returnable container, including 5% of the acid
to be supplied spare)
g) Distilled water.
2. ACCESSORIES
1 no cell testing voltmeter 3-0-3 having the accuracy as per industrial grade A instrument of
IS: 12481958 (latest edition) and shall have high resistance.
1 no on load battery tester.
1 no hydrometer capable of indicating specific gravity reading in steps of .002 on other
desired range
1 no pair of rubber gloves.
1 no thermometer with separate gravity correction chart (0o C 100o C)
2 jugs made of glass 2 pints of capacity
1 no battery logbook
1 no rubber aprons
1 no. Tools Box containing
1 level testing tube.
1. Instruction card.
2. Box container and arrangement for fixing the thermometer and the hydrometer
ITEM NO A BATTERY CHARGER
The battery charger equipment shall be sound in a sheet steel cabin finished in stove
enamelled light grey colour conforming to shade specification. The character cabin shall have
thickness of 14 gauge or batter with adequate ventilation and it should be vermin proof as far
as possible, louvers shall be provided with for ventilation. The charging equipment shall be
provided with a separate float charger and boost charger as per following specifications
FLOAT CHARGER
The float charger shall be suitable for operation from a 3 phase AC supply of 415 10%, 50
cycle and suitable for floating 110 lead acid cells at 2.16 per cell while simultaneous supplying
a continuous load of 5 amp at an ambient temperature of 50 C. The output of the float charger
shall be stabilized within 1% of the floating voltage for an input voltage variation of 10%
frequency of 1% and simultaneously load variation of 0-100%
The ripple content on the output of the float charger shall be limited to 3%. The float charger
shall comprise the following components
1. AC ON/OFF triple pole rotary 1 no.

2. HRC fuses with fittings 3 nos.

3. Indicating neon lamps 3 nos.
4. Double wound impregnated natural air cooler 3-
phase mains transformer 5 Boost transformer, if
required 1 no.
6. Motorized variac to give stepless control of DC
output voltage from 1 RV to 2.4 V per coil with
automatic run down facility in case of failure of
supply/overload tripping 1 no.
7. Constant potential controller to stabilizer the DC
output voltage within 1% of floating voltage 1 no.
8. Auto/manual change over switch and raise/lower
push buttons. 1 set
9. 3 phase full wave bridge connected silicon rectifier
stock compete with heat sink 1 set
10. Current transformer for sensing the load limiting
current and to make the float charger output droop
down 1 no
11. Moving coil ammeter of suitable range and size 96
mm sq. 1 no
12. Double pole ON/OFF rotary switch for float
charger DC output 1 no.
13. HRC fuses with fittings for the above. 2 nos
BOOST CHARGER
The boost charger shall operate off a 3 phase AC supply of 415 V 10%, 50 cycles and shall
be suitable for charging 110 lead acid cells from 1.80 V to 2.70 V per cell at a maximum
charging current of 110 amps. In ambient temperature of 45o C. The boost charger shall
comprise the following components: -
1. AC triple pole on/off rotary switch 1 no.

2. HRC fuses with fittings for the above 3 nos
3. Indicating neon lamp 3 nos
4. AC contactor provided with suitable arrangement as
required by the specification 1 no.
5. Ballast chocks to give tapered charge and also to
minimize the variations in charging current consequent
on the fluctuations of the main supply. 1 no
6. Double wound impregnated cooled 3-phase mains
transformer with taps at 5% from 415 V on the primary 1 no.
7. Triple pole 4 position rotary switch to give 15 step control
of the DC output voltage during charging 2 nos
8. 3 phase full wave bridge connected silicon rectifier stock
complete with heat sink 1 set
9. Moving roll centre zero charge/discharge ammeter of
range 20-0-20 amp of size 960 mm sq 1 no
10. DC on/off rotary switch 1 no
11. HRC fuses with fittings for fittings for above 2 nos
The charging equipment shall also be provided with following component: -
1. Triple pole battery isolating switch 200 amp rating 1 no.

2. HRC fuses with fittings 3 nos
3. Keyed push button so that boost charger can be used as
float charger in case of float failure 1 no
4. DC contractor of suitable rating provided on the positive
bus bar actuated by the AC contactor on the boost
charger incoming 1 no.

5. The boost charger should be provided with automatic
run down facility in case of failure of supply/over load
tripping
6. Silicon blocking diode connected to 84th cell of the
battery bank 1 no
7. Moving coil voltmeter of 96 mm sq. with a selector
switch for measuring various voltages 1
8. Suitable other provision and components to specify
various annunciation scheme for giving visual indication
and common audible alarm at the incidence of the
following faults 1 set
a) Battery under voltage
b) Battery earth leakage circuits complete with millimeter,
relay resistance, switch etc.
c) Float charger failure
d) DC over voltage.
Normally, the load charging will meet the requirement of the constant load. During boost
changing the full battery voltage should not be reflected on the bus bars, that is, it should be
ensured that the constant voltage is available on the DC bus bars irrespective of the fact
whether the battery is on float or on boost charge and at the same time all battery cells are
charged thus eliminating the problems of end cells cutting method of battery charging. In the
even of failure of the automatic features of the regulator, the regulator shall be capable of
being operated manually. Adequate protection should be incorporated to prevent excessive
current drawn from the discharged battery. Also due care with necessary alternative provision
should also be made wherever possible so that the due to failure of any one component, the
DC power to the bus bars is not interrupted. The changing equipment should be complete
with the various components listed above but not necessarily limited to the same. The
changes shall also be complete with wiring, rating plates, glands and fixing bolts etc.
ITEM NO. 3: DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
The DC distribution board shall be housed in a sheet steel cubicle with adequate ventilation
and it should be vermin proof as far as possible and should be provided with louvers for
ventilation backed by fine wire mesh. The DCDB shall match with the battery changing
equipment and should be complete with bus bars of suitable capacity, wiring rating plates,
glands and fixing bolts. The current density for copper and aluminium bus bar must not
exceed 116 A/cm2 and 87A/cm2 respectively. The following components shall be provided on
the DC distribution board.
1 Double pole ON/OFF rotary switch of 200 amps rating

with 2 nos HRC fuses of 200 amps 1 set
2 Moving coil ammeter of 96 mm sq. and of range 0-200
amps for measuring the load on the bus. 1 no.
3 CHANGE OVER CONTACTOR
a) 10 amps separate change over contactor AC/DC for

switching indication over to DC. On failure of AC
supply and also for emergency pilot light in situation
in the even of AC failure. 1 no.
b) 10 amp HRC fuses for pilot light 2 nos
4 Double pole DC rotary switches with HRC fuses for each

of following feeders
a) 66 kV closing supply 50 amps capacity 1 no.

b) 11 kV closing supply 100 amps capacity 1 no.
c) Spare 100 amp capacity 2 nos

d) Spare 50 amps capacity 2 nos
5 Double pole DC battery switch of 10 amps rating with 10

amp HRC fuses for each of the following feeders .
a) 11 kV tripping supply 10 amp capacity 1 no.

b) 66 kV tripping supply 10 amp capacity 1 no.
c) Carrier telephone, 10 amp capacity 1 no.
d) 33 kV relay and board 10 amp capacity 1 no.
e) 66 kV relay and board 10 amp capacity 1 no.
f) spare 10 amp capacity 3 nos
All the instrument shall be of flush mounted type. The rotary switches shall also be flush
mounted except for the protruding protection in the panels. All switches shall be mounted on
the front panel and all the HRC bases together with their fuse fittings on the front panel but
within a chamber that can opened by half doors to occasions accessibility to the fuses. The
various components shall be of the best quality and from reputed manufacturers. The lay out
of components, wiring workmanship, reliability etc. shall be of the best quality. Adequate room
should be provided within the charger/DC distribution board cubicles for easy accessibility of
components and also be facilitate ventilation.
ITEM NO. 4 ELECTRIC WATER STILL
Electric water still to work on 230 volts AC single phase and having an output of 5-6 liters of
distilled water per hour fitted with stainless steel condensing tube with a heat resisting
aluminium paint finish. On electric water still is required for each battery set.

Appendix -B
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULAR
A) Information to be furnished by the supplier for 200 amp hour battery set.
a) Capacity of battery at the 10 hour ratio.

b) Capacity of battery at the 1 hour rate
c) Manufacturers name
d) Call designation in accordance with Indian Standard
Specification no. 1651-1970 with the latest amendment.
e) Type of negative plates
f) Size and materials of connection and method of
connection between cells, that is whether bolted or burnt
(bolted connection would be preferred)
g) Recommended starting and finishing rate of discharge.
h) Voltage per cell at the end of charge at the finishing rate.
i) Recommended trickle-charging rate.
j) Clearance between the edge of the plates and the inner
surfaces of the container.
k) Clearance between bottom of the negative plates and
bottom of the container.
l) Clearance between top of the negative plates and top of
the container.
m) Thickness, type and material of the separators
n) Material of container.
o) Thickness of container
p) Amount and specific gravity of electrolyte per cell
required for first filling.
q) Recommended specific gravity of electrolyte at the end
of full charge.
r) Expected specific gravity of electrolyte at the end of
discharge at 10 hour rate.
s) Over all dimensions of each cell
t) Distance between the centers of cells when erected.
u) Weight of cell complete with acid.
v) Max. no of charge/discharge cycles the cells can
withstand.
w) Size of cable recommended for connection of battery
bank with the charging equipment/DC distribution board.
B) Information to be furnished by the supplier for each 200 AH battery charger.
a) Manufacturers name
b) Rated DC voltage
c) Rated output
d) Rating class
e) Rated 1 min. overload capacity
f) Class of insulation employed for
(i) Rectifier transformer.
(ii) Smoothing reactors.
g) Max. Permissible temp. (50 C)

(i) Rectifier transformer.
(ii) Reactors.
(iii) Rectifier cells
h) Type of connections of transformers

i) Whether single way or double way
j) Float charging current.

k) Boost charging current
l) Boost charging voltage
m) Inherent voltage regulation from no load to rated load.
n) Whether automatic voltage regulator is offered.
o) Percentage regulation with AVR
p) Whether any safety device provided to avoid voltage rise
during no load.?
q) Whether taps are provided on rectifier transformer
r) Float charging voltage.
s) Type of rectifier coil
t) Current rating of each cell
u) No of rectifiers in parallel/ limb
v) Method of cooling adopted for
(i) Rectifier coil and stack.
(ii) Transformer.
w) Method of voltage control

x) Rating of diodes.
y) Size of cable required for connection of the charger to
AC incoming cabinet.
z) Make and type of instruments may be indicated as per
details below.
Sr no. Description of switch/instruments Make Type Range/capacity

(Indicated
separately
For float boost
Charger)
1. AC On/OFF rotary switch

2. Double wound transformer
3. Ballast chokes
4. Silicon rectifier
5. Triple pole 4 way rotary switch
6. Voltmeter
7. DC ON/OFF rotary switch
8. AC contactor
9. Moving coil center zero ammeter
10. Variac
11. DC output rotary switch
12. HRC fuses with fittings
13. Indicating lamps
C INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED BY THE SUPPLIER FOR DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
a) Size of cables required for connection of the battery

charger to the distribution board
b) Size of sheet steel (SWG) of the DC distribution board
cabinet.
c) Make and type of instruments may be indicated as per

details below : -
Sl no. Description of instruments Make Type Range/capacity
1. Incoming rotary switch

2. Voltmeter
3. Ammeter

4. Ammeter/voltmeter for detecting earth leakage
a) Under voltage relay To be provided in charger cabinet
b) Over voltage relay
a) Earth leakage relay
b) Float charger failure relay
7. Change over contractor

8. Outgoing feeder switches of rating 200A, 100A, 50A,
10A
9. HRO fuses with fitting
a) Material of bus bars

b) Size of main bus bar
c) Size of negative bus bar.

PLCC EQUIPMENTS
1. GENERAL
1.1 The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered should have designed, manufactured,
tested, supplied and commissioned PLCC panels for the specified voltage level.
PLCC panels manufactured by the manufacturer meeting the requirements at the clause
above except that the PLCC panels manufactured, tested and supplied by them is not in
operation for the stipulated period can also be offered provided the manufacturer furnishes an
undertaking jointly executed by hem and his collaborator, who in turn fully meet the
requirement specified above as per the format enclosed in the bid document for successful
performance of the equipment offered.
1.2 Since PLCC equipment at both ends of transmission lines is required to be identical for the
sake of technical compatibility. The bid shall include the cost of supply and delivery of PLCC
material for both ends as included in the bill of quantities, together with complete erection,
testing and commissioning of the equipment at the end covered in the contract. the evaluation
of the bid will be carried out on this basis.
It is intended that the contractor should erect, commission and test the PLCC equipment at
the other end also (if other end is ready) and perform the commissioning tests details in para
14 of Technical specification.
If the other end is not ready, then the following test on the equipment relating to the other end
shall be carried out by using dummy load at the same end :
a) Composite loss and return loss on coupling device using dummy load.
b) Composite loss (attenuation) for HF cable + coupling device.
c) Adjustment of Rx/Tx levels on PLCC equipment as per test schedule
d) AF frequency response (end to end) for the entire 4 kHz bandwidth for speech and
tele-protection and other data channels
e) Transmission time for tele-protection and other data channels
f) Observation of Tx/Rx levels (test tone) for each channel at both ends by sequential
switching on/off the parallel channels using dummy load.
g) Observation of end to end & trunk dialling performance.
h) Levels and other load adjustments (on dummy load)
i) Test for loading by parallel channels with dummy line load
j) Protection signalling under local loop test (dummy load)
For this purpose, the optional charges should be quoted in the schedule of prices as under : -
OPTION-I Complete erection, testing and commissioning of equipment at the other end (if
the other end is ready)
OPTION-II: Only testing of the other end equipment as per the details of tests given above (if
other end is not ready)
Above stated option I & II shall be exercised at the time of erection and shall not be a basis
for the evaluation of bids.
2. STANDARD
All the PLCC equipment covered under the package shall conform to the requirements of the
latest edition of the relevant IEC/IS specifications or equivalent national standards, except to
the extent modified by this specification

3. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
The PLCC equipment as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the
transmission lines.
4. FREQUENCY PLANNING.
4.1 For planning frequency and output power of carrier terminals, bidders may plan for a
minimum receive signal to noise ratio of 25 dB for the speech channels without commanders
and 15 dB for protection signalling and 29 dB for data transmission. The details of line, tower,
conductor shall be furnished to the supplier to carryout the assessment of signal attenuation.
IEC/CIGRE specification/guidelines shall be adhered to
4.2 Frequency and output power of PLCC terminals for protection shall be planned such that the
protection signal is received with full reliability even when one of the phase is earthed or is on
open circuit on the line side causing an additional minimum loss of 6 dB.
4.3 Successful bidder shall be fully responsible for the coordination required with concerned
state Electricity Board for finalizing the frequency plan.
4.4 The frequency plan will be referred to wireless Adviser/DOP Department for clearance and in
case any change in the Contractors recommended carrier frequency and power output is
proposed by these authorities, the Contractor shall have to modify his proposal accordingly.
Change of power output shall however, not involve repeater stations.
5. PROPOSED ARRANGEMENT
5.1 The power line carrier communication equipment required by the Employer is to provide
primarily efficient, secure and reliable information link for carrier aided distance protection and
direct tripping of remote-end breaker and also for speech communication between sub-
stations. It shall included separate carrier terminals of multipurpose type for speech and
protection purposes. Provision for super imposing telex and data signals shall be made on
speech terminals. All carrier terminals including those for protection shall be suitable for point
to point speech communication also. Carrier aided protection is not being provided on 132 kV
and below transmission line in HVPN.
5.2 For security reasons each transmission line shall be protected by main-I and main-II
protection or main & backup protections.
5.3 The requirement of carrier information on each link covered under this specification is for
speech communication and protection signalling.
5.4 The equipment for protection signals shall have high degree of reliability and speech. It shall
be guaranteed to function reliably in the presence of noise impulse caused by isolator or
breaker operation. It shall also be possible to effect direct tripping of breaker at one end when
the other end breaker opens out either manually or by relays such as bus fault relays such as
Bus fault relay etc.
5.5 The time intervals between receipt of a trip command on the transmit side, its transmission
over the carrier link, reception at the far end and giving command to the trip relays at the
distant end shall not exceed 20 m.sec. for permissive inter tripping and 30 m.sec for direct
inter tripping even for the longest line section. The above timings are inclusive of operating
time for auxiliary relays and interposing if any, included in the PLCC equipment.
5.6 The requirement of protection signalling channel is such that security against incorrect signals
being received shall be at least two to three orders higher than reliability against a signal not
being received.

5.7 The planning of frequencies for the PLCC terminals shall be done considering the existing
PLCC Network as well as full communication channel requirement detailed above so that
there is no problem of frequency allocation at a later date when the subsequent section
communication requirements come up.
5.8 For reasons of security and reliability, phase to phase coupling for S/C lines and inter-circuits
coupling for D/C lines shall be employed.
5.9 The parameters of the equipment quoted shall be such that the mode of wave propagation on
transmission line shall not impose any limitation on the efficient and reliable performance of
information link from protection or communication point of view.
5.10 The bidder shall submit curves illustrating incorrect tripping and failure to trip probability
plotted against corona noise level, in the presence of impulse noise due to switching of
isolator and circuit breaker etc. details of field tests and laboratory tests for successful
operation of his equipment, under such adverse conditions shall be furnished by the bidder.
These are to be related to end to end signalling and shall take into account the type of
communication link.
6. COUPLING DEVICE (LINE TURNING UNIT)
6.1 The coupling devise shall be interposed between the capacitor voltage transformer/coupling
capacitor and coaxial line to the PLCC transmitter/receiver, and in conjunction with the
capacitor voltage transformer/coupling capacitor shall ensure :
a) Efficient transmission of carrier frequency signals between the carrier frequency

connection and the power line.
b) Safety of personnel and protection of the low voltage parts and installation, against
the effects of power frequency voltage and transient over voltage.
6.2 The coupling device, in conjunction with the CVT/CC shall form an electric filter of band pass
type.
a) It shall match characteristic impedance of HT line to impedance of the carrier

frequency connection. Impedance matching between power line and the carrier
frequency connection may be done by a transformer or and auto transformer.
b) Galvanic isolation between primary and secondary terminals of the coupling device
shall be performed by the above mentioned transformer.
c) Power frequency currents derived by the CVT may be drained to the earth by a
separate inductance termed drain coil of suitable rating or through primary of the
above transformers.
d) Voltage surges coming from the power line at the terminals of the coupling device
shall be limited by a non linear surge arrestor of suitable rating in the primary side.
Requirement of gas type voltage arrester in secondary side of the coupling device
shall have to be fully justified.
The surge arrester shall have power frequency spark over voltage coordinated with
the equipment ahead of it.
e) For direct and efficient earthing of its primary terminals the coupling device shall be
equipped with an earthing switch. The coupling device shall be designed such that it
shall not be possible to remove the cover before the earthing switch is operated to the
earthed position. Further the earth switch shall be available for earthing of CVTHT
terminals when the compiling filter units are removed from circuit for maintenance

replacement. The design shall take due regard of requirements for safety in
accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules.
6.3 Two number phase to earth type coupling filters shall be used to achieve in secure phase to
phase/inter-circuit coupling. Connection between secondaries of the two phase to earth type
coupling devises shall be through a balancing transformer/hybrid such that reliable
communication shall be ensured even when one of the coupled phase is earthed or open
circuited on the line side.
6.4 Coupling device shall conform to IEC-481/.IS-8997 and shall have the following carrier
frequency characteristics as applicable to a phase to earth type coupling device:
a) Nominal line side impedance 400 ohm for Ph-E and 600 ohm for Ph-Ph.
b) Nominal equipment side impedance 150

ohms (balanced)
c) Composite loss Not more than 2 dB
d) Return loss Not less than 12 dB
e) Bandwidth Shall suit the frequency plan between 36

and 500 kHz.
f) Nominal peak envelope power Not less than 650 watt (for inter-modulation
product 80 dB down)
6.5 The coupling device shall be suitable for outdoor mounting. Temperature of metallic
equipment mounted outdoor is expected to rise upto 65 deg C during the maximum ambient
temperature of 50 deg C specified. The equipment offered by the bidder shall operate
satisfactory under these conditions.
6.6 The elements of coupling devise shall be fitted on a base plate and enclosed in a metal box.
The HT terminal of coupling device shall be connected to HT terminal of the CVT by means
of 6 mm sq copper wire with suitable lugs and taped with 11 kV insulation by the contractor.
6.7 Coupling device shall have at least two terminals for carrier equipment connection. Bidder
shall confirm that such a parallel connection to coupling device directly will not result in any
additional attenuation.
6.8 Type test : Coupling device
The coupling device included the drainage coil, surge arrester and earthing switch shall
conform to type tests and shall be subject to routine tests as per IEC-481/IS:8998.
years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of following test, carried out in
accordance with ISS 8998, 8997 and IEC-481, from Govt/Govt approved test house shall be
submitted alongwith bid :
i) Distortion & inter modulation test

ii) Impulse voltage test
iii) Test on arrestors
iv) Test on the drain coil or matching T/F winding.
The remaining type test report of clause 6.8 and 6.9 of relevant IEC/IS if not submitted with
the offer, shall be submitted by the successful bidder within three months of the issue of letter
of intent. The failure to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.

Bidder shall furnish, alongwith his bid copies of all type and routing test conducted earlier on
similar coupling device is accordance with relevant standards.
7. HIGH FREQUENCY CABLE
7.1 High frequency cable shall connect the coupling device installed in the switchyard to the
PLCC terminal installed indoor. The high frequency cable to be offered by the bidder shall be
suitable for being laid directly in trenches or in ducts.
7.2 The cable shall be tinned copper braided and steel armoured and its outer covering shall be
protected against attack by termites. Bidder shall offered his comments on method employed
by him for earthing of screen and submit full justification for the same with due regard to
safety requirements.
Bidder must enclose in his bid a detailed construction drawing of the cable being offered, with
mechanical and electrical parameters.
7.3 Impedance of the cable shall be such as to match the impedance of the PLCC terminal on
one side and to that the coupling device on the other side over the entire carrier frequency
range of 40-500 kHz. The HF cable (150 ohms balanced) shall meet the following
parameters.
a) Overall diameter of HF cable shall be between 20-25 mm

b) The mutual capacitance at 1 kHz of the HF cable shall be 30 pF (nominal)
c) Conductor resistance of cable shall not exceed 12 ohm per km
d) The HF cable shall be capable of bending at an angel of 90 deg C without any
damage.
e) Loop resistance of HF cable will not exceed 30 ohms per km at 20 deg C. The HF
cable should be arranged to be laid on a separate rack in the trench.
7.4 The cable shall be designed to withstand test voltage of 4 kV between conductor and outer
sheath for one minute.
7.5 Bidder shall specify attenuation per km of the cable at various carrier frequencies in the range
of 40 to 500 kHz. The typical attenuation figures for HF cable shall be in the range of 1 to 5
dB/km in the frequency range of 40-500 kHz.
7.6 Type tests

The HF cable shall conform to type tests and be subjected to routine tests as per IEC:96-
2/BS:2316/IS:5802.
years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of following tests, carried out in
accordance with ISS-8998, 8997 and IEC-481, from Govt/Govt approved test house shall be
submitted alongwith bid.
a) Dimensions
b) Resistively of inner conductor
c) Dielectric strength of core
d) Insulation resistance
e) Spark test
f) Discharge test
g) Characteristic impedance
Note : The characteristic impedance value is computed from capacitance and velocity ratio
measurements

h) Attenuation
i) High temperature test.
j) Low temperature test and
k) Flow test
Acceptance Tests
a) Dielectric strength of core
b) Insulation resistance
c) Characteristic impedance
d) Attenuation
e) Dimensions, and
f) High temperature test.
Routine tests
a) Spark test on the core

b) Dielectric strength of core
c) Insulation resistance
d) Spark test on sheath
e) Discharge test
f) Characteristic impedance
g) Attenuation
Electrical tests
The electrical test and the requirements shall be as specified in table 2
Table 2 electrical test and requirements
Sl No Test Requirement
(i) Resistivity of inner conductor As stated in IS : 5026 (Part-I)-1969

(ii) Dielectric strength of core 8 kV (rms)
(iii) Insulation resistance Not less than 5000 M Km
(iv) Spark test 8 kV (rms)
(v) Extinction voltage (corona test) Not less than 4 kV (rms)
(vi) Characteristic impedance 75 3
(vii) Attenuation 0.12 dB/m Max. The measuring frequency
shall be 200 MHz
Table 3 Climatic and Mechanical Test Requirements
Sl No Test Requirement
(i) High temperature test Max. permitted increase in attenuation

shall be 0.2 db/m
Low temperature The specimen shall be subjected to 20

hours at a temperature of 35 deg C
(ii) Low temperature test The specimen shall be subjected to 20

hours at a temperature of 40 deg C
(iii) Flow test The weight to be applied at each end of

the sample shall be 80 N (8 kgf)
8. POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL
8.1 As already indicated the information link shall be provided for speech, protection, telex and
data services. PLCC terminals shall be fully coordinated to match with the specific

requirements. Because of strict requirement of high speed of operation, security, reliability
and efficient operation of protection channel alongwith the carrier terminals, bidder shall
ensure the complete and tool proof coordination of the PLCC and protection equipments. If
shall therefore be necessary to have these combinations as one unit without any mismatch or
necessity of any intermediate coordination unit.
8.2 PLCC terminal shall use amplitude modulation and shall have single side band transmission
mode. These shall be equipped for fixed frequency duplex working and shall be fully
transistorized, however this fixed frequency shall be programmable at site.
Characteristic input and output parameters of the SSB PLCC terminals shall be as per IEC
495, unless otherwise specified.
8.3 The features of carrier terminal are detailed out below :
a) Mode of transmission single side band Amplitude modulation

with suppressed carrier or reduced
carrier
b) Carrier frequency range 40 to 500 kHz
c) Nominal carrier frequency band in 4.0 kHz

either direction of transmission
d) Power output (PEP) at HF terminal 20 watt
e) Frequency difference between a pair of Frequency difference between VF

PLCC terminals signal at the transmitting and receiving
ends will not exceed 2 Hz with
suppressed carrier. With reduced
carrier frequency difference shall be
zero. This shall include permissible
ambient temperature variation and
supply frequency and voltage variation
of (+) 15% and (-) 10%
f) Automatic gain control For 40 dB change in carrier frequency

signal level within the regulation range,
change in VF receive levels of both
speech and other signals shall be less
than 1 dB.
g) Supply voltage 48 V DC +15%, - 10% (positive pole

earthed)
h) Nominal impedance
Carrier frq. Sides 150 ohm balanced
VF sides 600 ohm
i) Return lose within nominal freq. Band - Not less than 10 dB on carrier freq
transmit side
- Not less than 14 dB on VF side.
j) Spurious emission at edge of nominal - 10 dBm (Max.)

carrier freq. Band.
k) Speech level across 600 ohms

- Four wire transmit 0 dBr to 17 dBr
- Four wire receive -3.5 dBr to +8 dBr

- 2 wire transmit 0 dBr
- 2 wire receive -7 dBr
l) Permissible limits for the various of 1.5 dB for complete band 300 Hz to
overall loss (attenuation) of the speech 2400 Hz
channel in relation to 800 Hz for back
to back operation of pair of terminals
without compander
m) Voltage withstand requirement D/C

power terminal
- When isolated from earth Capable of withstanding 500V DC for 1
minute between both terminals
connected together and earth.
- When not isolated from earth An impulse voltage of 1000V 1.2/50
applied between terminal and earth
- VF signalling and alarm ckt. 500 V DC applied for one minute
when free from earth between terminals of ckt. connected
together and earth.
8.4 Following facilities to be provided in the PLCC terminals.
a) Loop test facility for local transmitter and receiver.

b) Changeover provision of termination of PLCC terminals on dummy load
c) Position of each module may be marked at the back side of chasis also.
d) Terminal blocks for power supply, telephone cable and two HF cable sockets.
e) Channel testing from terminal to terminal.
8.5 All the PLCC terminals shall be of multipurpose type. The bidder shall confirm that the total
transmission time for teleprotection shall not exceed 20 ms for permissive and 30 ms for
direct tripping signals.
8.6 In the input circuit of the PLCC terminal protective devices shall be provided in the form of
zener diodes or surge suppressors in order to eliminate any surge transfer through the
coupling device or the surge transfer through the coupling devices or the surge induced in the
connecting path of HF cable.
8.7 To improve voice transmission characteristics for the system , companders and expanders
shall be provided. The companders shall have at least 2:1 compression ration with a
corresponding expansion ration of 1:2. The operating range of companders shall be
compatible with the audio power levies specified for 4 wire operation. The improvement
gained by companders shall however not be taken into account for power allocation and shall
be in hand reserve .
8.8 Sudden changes in input level to the receiver shall not cause false tripping. The bidder shall
clearly indicate in his offer the methods adopted to ensure above phenomenon. The receiver
design shall also provide protection against false tripping from random noise.
8.9 Fail safe devices shall be provided so that a male-function in one unit or sub-assembly cannot
cause damage elsewhere in the system. All plug in equipment shall be fitted with features to
prevent improper insertion. The electrical cables shall routed across sharp edges or near
sources of high temperature true. The adjustments, which are susceptible to misadjustment
from accidental contact/vibration, shall be equipped with suitable locking devices.
8.10 The PLCC set shall be designed to give guaranteed performance from 0 deg C to 50 deg C
ambient temperature. The thermal capability of the equipment shall be so designed that the
equipment remains operational successfully upto 60 deg C ambient temperature. Any
ventilation fans provided for circulation of air inside the cabinets shall conform to relevant
Indian Standards.

8.11 The terminals shall be provided with built in indicating instrument to facilitate checking of
important voltages and current valves and signal levels in different parts of the PLCC
terminals. Protection fuses shall be provided in all important circuits and fuses shall be so
mounted as allow their easy inspection and replacement. All test points shall be easily
accessible.
The carrier set shall be provided with suitable supervision and alarm facilities. Individual parts
of the carrier set should be accessible from front, making it possible to place the carrier
cabinets side by side. All components and parts of the carrier set shall be suitably
tropicalised.
8.12 PLCC terminals shall be housed in floor mounting sheet metal cabinets, suitable for mounting
on concrete plinth as well as channel frame by means of nuts and bolts or welding. The
cabinets shall be properly cleaned and spray painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint.
Exterior of the cabinets shall be painted with smoke-glossy finish. All the panels shall be
properly earthed to the Employers earthing grid by the contractor. Contractor shall submit
detailed drawings for earthing connections.
8.13 All cabinets having PLCC terminals shall be provided with lamps of sufficient wattage for
interior illumination with switch
8.14 A name plate shall be provided on the front door of each cabinet indicating channel function,
transmitter frequency and direction etc.
8.15 Bidder shall submit type test and routine test certificated from internationally reputed test
authorities for the quoted PLCC terminals in respect of characteristic input and output
parameters of the PLCC terminals in accordance with PLCC alongwith the bid.
8.15.1 Type test : PLCC terminal
years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of following tests, carried out in
accordance with ISS-9482-1980/IEC-495-1993 form Govt/Govt approved test house shall be
submitted alongwith bid :
1. Common requirements for standard equipment and speech plus equipments :
Carrier Frequency Side.
i) Balance to ground
ii) Spurious emissions
Voice Frequency Side.
i) Automatic gain control

ii) Transmit/Receive frequency difference
iii) Selectivity
iv) Nominal impedance and return loss
v) Balance to ground
vi) Voltage withstand requirements
vii) Electromagnetic compatibility
2. Standard Equipment
i) Attenuation distortion
ii) Group delay distortion

3. Speech plus equipment.
i) Attenuation distortion
ii) Group delay distortion
The remaining type test report of clause 8.15, 8.16, 8.17, 8.17, if not submitted with the offer,
shall be submitted by the successful bidder within three months of the issue of letter of intent.
The failure to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.
8.16 In addition to above each transmitter and receiver shall be given a routine factory test to
establish that it has been properly assembled and adjusted for normal operation as per table-I
of IS-10706 cl. 4.0
8.17 All the solid state equipment/system panels shall be subjected to the heat soak test as a
routine test as per the following procedure:
All solid state equipment shall be burn in tested for minimum of 120 hours continuously under
operation condition. During the last 48 hours of testing, the ambient temperature of the cost
chamber shall be 50 deg C. Each PLCC panel shall be complete with all associated sub-
systems and the same shall be in operation during the above test. During the last 48 hours of
the above test, the temperature inside the panel shall be monitored with all the doors closed.
The temperature of the panel interior shall not exceed 65 deg C.
8.18 Bidder shall quote charges for type test of PLCC terminal as per IEC-495 in the relevant
schedule of BPS.
8.19 The bidder shall give details of his manufacturing, testing procedures and the facilities and
methods to perform above mentioned tests.
9. SPEECH COMMUNICATION
PLCC equipments offered shall provide telephone communication between the stations where
the transmission lines are terminating. The equipment shall be suitable for providing the
following facilities :
a) It shall be possible for subscribers at any of the stations to contact the subscriber at
all other stations connected in the system as shown in the specification drawing by
dialling his call number. To achieve this a 24 lines EPAX with 4 wire interface and
remote subscriber unit shall be provided/available at different stations.
b) The equipment shall contain all normal facilities like ring back tone, dial tone, engage
tone and priority tone, and suitable pluses to establish and disconnect communication
between subscribers.
c) The equipment shall be provided with necessary alarm circuits and fuses etc.
d) The equipment shall be of 4 kHz bandwidth on either direction and be suitable for
providing superimposed data and teleprinter facilities at a later date without major
modifications and high cost. The bidder shall clearly indicated in his bid the provision
made in his proposal for future development and the extent to which such additional
facilities can be added at later date.
e) The system shall be completely automatic with definite number allocated for each
telephone. The numbering scheme for telephones, exchange and tie lines shall be
developed by the bidder and indicated in the bid. Final numbering scheme shall be
fully co-ordinated with the existing/proposed future systems by the contractor.

f) Arrangement for over-riding facilities shall be provided by means of priority keys
wherever specified. The over-riding facility shall enable cutting-in ongoing calls with
the priority key and ask the concerned parties to finish their conversation. The wanted
number should then get automatically connected without having to redial the number.
g) All the carrier telephone conversation shall be secret and it should not be possible for
any body to over hear the conversation going on between any two parties excepting
those provided with over riding facilities.
h) The necessary cables for connecting al the telephone instruments ordered for at each
sub-station (including wiring and terminations) shall be provided by the contractor.
These telephone instruments shall be located within control room building at
respective sub-station.
i) All the relays etc. used in the equipment shall be of robust design to cope with the
duty imposed on them. Electronic components used in the equipment shall be of long
life type and as far as possible a few types only shall be used.
j) The cabinets housing the equipment for EPAX, for wire E/M interface and remote
subscriber unit (four wire) shall have mounting arrangement similar to that for PLCC
terminals as monitored in clause 9.13 part-I of this section. These cabinets shall also
be painted with the same paint as given under clause 9.13 part-I of this section.
k) All the terminals for speech shall be supplied fully wired for addition of VFTs and
transit filters in future.
l) Equipment for speech communication must be fully compatible with Employers

existing equipment. Any interfaces required for proper matching the connection with
the Employers existing equipment shall be provided by the contractor.
m) Terminals for protection shall be suitable for between two ends of each transmission
line or on random operation basis with back to back connection at the intermediate
stations.
n) Each PLCC terminal for speech as well protection purposes shall be provided with a
plug-in type service telephone and buzzer. Further 4 wire remote telephone
instruments (parallel to norvice telephone) shall also be provided on one PLCC
terminal for the protection for each link. Those instruments shall be located in
respective switchyard control room to enable the operator to make emergency call on
point to point basis. Each such instrument shall be equipped with buzzer and press
to call key and shall not require any additional power supply units.
10. ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC EXCHANGE (EPAX)
10.1 The Electronic Private Automatic Exchange (EPAX) wherever specified shall be provided with
24 subsequent lines and 8 trunk lines and shall be equipped to operate with 4 subscribes and
4 trunk lines. The trunk lines shall be connected to PLCC channels (speech panel). The
exchange will have the own managing current and tone generator etc. The exchange shall be
suitable for working on 48 V DC power supply (positive pole earthed). The exchange shall be
fully automatic solid state and of modular construction and shall have multiple switching lines
(minimum 4 routes)
10.2 EPAX shall also be provided with two (2) additional interface units and operate exclusively
with Employers leased subscriber lines of department of telecommunication (DOT) and
compatible with 2 wires full duplex voice grade made of operation. The details of
communication protocol for interfacing the DOT leased lines shall be coordinated by the
contractor with the leasing authority (DOT).

10.3 The technology of the equipment to be supplied by the Contractor must conform to C-DOT
version.
11. FUNCTIONAL AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF ELECTRONIC SINGLE LINE

TERMINATION RELAY (ESLTR)
It affords an subscriber to a PLCC network direct access to the carrier trans-receive terminal.
It can be used with greater economy in place of four wire iner-dialing/group selector and PAX
where only one subscriber is to be connected to the carrier equipment, i.e., it is useful for end
station terminals.
It should be compatible and designed to work in coordination with the existing switching
equipment mostly four wire inter dialling switching equipment model WSX 100 of M/S WST or
same ESLTR at the other end of the section any special interfacing unit required for this
purposed should also be offered.
The equipment should be preferably microprocessor based and programmable
It should be capable of carrying out the following functions :
i) Two wire, interconnection

ii) Selection of subscriber identification number
iii) Priority
iv) Over riding facility
v) Tones and ringing
vi) Programmable to seize pulse code and numbering scheme.
vii) Two telephone subscribers connection
12. TESTING AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
Besides the stipulations made under clause 11 Part-I, the testing and maintenance equipment
shall conform to following technical particulars. Each set of these equipment shall consist of
one no. each of following five items.
Sl No. Description of equipment
1. 200 Hz to 620 kHz Selective level meter (SLM) including

impedance and return loss measuring attachments compatible
with level generator (at sl. 2 below)
2. Level generator with a range of 50 Hz to 620 kHz including

facility for synchronization with SLM
3. 8 digit time interval and frequency counter with a frequency

range of 1 Hz to 10 MHz and timer range of 1 microsec. To 1
sec in decade steps.
4. Dual trace 15 MHz Oscilloscope with a display screen 8x 10 sq

cm and input impedance of 1 Mohm/25 pF with a deflection co-
efficient of 5mV/div to 20V/div.
5. 4 digit LCD multimeter with a input impedance of 10 Mohm

and with a range of 0.1 mV to 1000 V DC, 0.1 mV to 600 V
AC, 0-10 AMP DC and 0-10 AMP AC (40 Hz to 10 kHz) and 0-
20 Mohm with built-in power supply.
6. Test kit

13. LIST OF COMMISSIONING TESTS
The following tests shall be carried out on complete system/subsystem during commissioning.
a) Composite loss and return loss on coupling device using dummy load.
b) Composite loss (attenuation) for HF cable coupling device.
c) 2nd to end attenuation measurement for verification of optimum coupling mode. Test
shall be done for all combinations.
d) End to end return loss for optimum coupling mode.
i) Open behind line trap
ii) Grounded behind line trap.
e) If end to end return loss for optimum coupling mode is not satisfactory, same shall be
measured for other coupling modes also
f) Adjustment of Tx/Rx levels on PLCC equipment as per test schedule
g) AF frequency response (end to end ) for the entire 4 kHz bandwidth for speech and
teleoperation channels.
h) Measurement of noise in 2 kHz bandwidth with and without line energized.
i) SNR (lost one) with line energized noting down weather conditions.
j) Transmission time for tele-protection and other data channels
k) Observation of Tx/Rx levels (test-tone) for each channel at both ends by sequential
switching on/off parallel channels using dummy load and also with the transmission
line.
l) Observation of end to end and trunk dialling performance.
m) Observation to end to end protection signalling ( command sent and received) in
conjunction with protective relays, nothing down transmission/receipt of unwanted
commands under switching operations in the switchyard during protective relay
testing.
Notes
1. All measurements for link attenuation, composite loss and return loss shall be carried out for
the entire range of carrier frequencies with specific attention to the frequencies
i) Within coupling device bandwidth

ii) Within line trap bandwidth, and
iii) Operating frequencies
2. Following test shall be carried out independently at each end
i) Composite loss and return loss for coupling device

ii) Attenuation test for HF cable + coupling device.
iii) Levels and other local adjustments (on dummy load). Final adjustment shall be on
end to end basis.
iv) Test for loading by parallels channels with dummy line load. This test can be done
alongwith test for coupling device.
v) Protection signalling under local-test (dummy load)

TECHNICAL PECIFICATIONS
66 KV GRADE CABELS
1. GENERAL
Technical specifications in this section cover supply of 66 kV grade cables.
2. APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES
The Standards and Codes applicable to the works are listed in Annexure I of the tender
document and may be referred to.
3. 66 KV GRADE POWER CABLES

Conforming to IS 7098 Part 3
3.1 Aluminium Conductor cables
3.1.1 Voltage Grade 66 kV

3.1.2 Conductor High purity aluminium rods meets standard IEC 60228, IS : 8130
3.1.3 Conductor XLPE insulation (continuous triple extrusion and continuous caterary
Insulation vulcanization)
3.1.4 Taping Semi conducing water blocking / water swellabel tape of superior
quality
3.1.5 Extruded lead Lead ingot of 99.98% minimum purity
alloy "'
sheathing
3.1.6 Conductor Semi conducting cotton tape helically wound on the core as bedding
screening
3.1.7 Copper Copper wires / copper tapes helically applied over the lead alloy sheath
screening and bedding
tapping
3.1.8 Sheathing with Sheathing is either of PVC or of black polyethylene
graphite coating
3.1.9 Manufacturers The outer sheath shall bear the manufacturer's name and trade mark at
Marking every meter length
4.0 TESTING
4.1 Tests at manufacturers work

The cables shall be subjected to shop test in accordance with relevant standards as per IS
7098 Part-3 or IEC 60840 as quality assurance
Routine test
All drums are tested for high voltage tests
Parallel discharge
Conductor resistance
Electrical test on non metallic sheath
Type tests
Type test is performed on a representative sample
All electrical type tests as per IEC 60840 or IS 7098 Part-3
All non electrical type test as per IEC 60840 or IS 7098 Part-3

5.0 CABLE LAYING
5.1 General
The Cable Laying works shall be executed according to the rules of the Art pertaining to
professional grade and generally in compliance with International Standards and Indian
Standards.
5.2 Cable Laying
5.2.1 Cases
The EHV Cables shall be laid in ground depending upon the site conditions of the selected
route, any of the following paying conditions, may be adopted
Case 1 & Case 1A Direct buried, with all cables laid in flat formation.
Case 2 Direct buried, with the cables (3) of each circuit laid in trefoil formation and side by
side in one trench.
Case 3 Laid in underground duct.
Case 4 Laid in Trench less piping.
Details of Case 2
The laying conditions shall not be less than the following, for Case2.
- The trench for carrying the cables shall be at least 1.8m deep and 1.1m wide.
- Each of the 2 feeders shall consist of 3 single-core cables, and laid in trefoil formation.
- Cables shall be laid at a depth of 1.7m below the ground level and over a 100 mm bed
of coarse sand.
- Trench is to be filled with sand upto a depth of 1100mm below the ground level.
- Warning concrete slabs of at least 50mm thickness shall then be laid above the sand.
- Trench shall then be filled with earth upto a depth of 300 mm below the ground level.
- A warning net shall then be laid above the earth filling (at 300 mm depth below the
ground level).
- The top space of 300 mm shall be suitably filled with compacted Boulder and
Bitumen/Jelly and given a final finish matching the surroundings.
- The cables shall be tied through locking belts after 2 meters each for keeping the
cables intact in case of trefoil formation. At locations, where there is change of level of
laying, the cables shall be tied through locking belts after 1 meter each.
5.2.2 Details of Case 3

In specific locations, the Employer may require the cables to be laid in underground ducts.
The underground ducts shall be laid where road construction or formation is under
construction or where water logging stretch is expected or as per the specific site condition.
The general arrangement for such type of laying is shown as Case-3.
5.2.3 Details of Case 4

On all road/rail crossings and at other specific locations, cable laying shall be through
trenchless drilling and the cables shall be passed through High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
or G.I. Pipes of appropriate diameter and thickness (Case-4). One spare HDPE pipe shall be
laid for each feeder of 3 cables at the road/rail crossings.
5.3 Spare Cables and Pipes
When cables are laid in pipes, in addition to the pipes carrying the cables, at least one spare
pipe (minimum 200 mm dia), without cable shall also be provided.

In the case cables laid in underground ducts (Case 3) and cables laid in Trenchless
piping (Case 4), spare HDPE pipes, one for each circuit, shall be provided.
In addition to pipes for power cables, 2 additional pipes, each of not less than 100 mm
dia, shall be provided to carry control and monitoring cables, one operational and one
spare (As indicated in the Interfacing Requirements, other cables such as pilot wire for
pilot wire protection, if required, copper-core or optic fibre cables for control and
monitoring, tele-communication etc, supplied by other Contractors shall be installed by
the Contractor, in these pipes.
5.4 Cable protection at changeover location

The cable path, when changing from buried in ground to underground duct or trenchless
piping shall be adequately protected by proper sealing in concrete or other suitable means of
sufficient mechanical strength to avoid cable from suffering damage due to heat/fire/water
ingress etc.
5.5 Pulling Chambers

Pulling chambers shall be provided, as necessary, along the route. Such pulling chambers
shall be 4m long, 3m wide and at least 2.5m deep. The masonry structure should be of
adequate strength with water proofing to avoid any accumulation of seepage of water inside.
The edges of RCC covers and masonry shall be lined in GI angles to achieve a long service
life.
5.6 Route Markers

The route shall be appropriately marked by suitable retro-reflective cable markers, at suitable
intervals and positions of straight through joints shall be indicated by suitable boards.
5.7 Civil Works

The Contractor will be required to execute civil works while preparation of cable path in the
form of trenches, pulling chambers, RCC covers etc. The grade of concrete mixture used
shall be M25 grade. Also, the design should meet structural strength and safety requirements.
6.0 CABLE ACCESSORIES AND BONDING
6.1 Straight Through Joints and Terminations

The straight through Joints should be HEAT SHRINK type, suitable for underground buried
cables. The joint should comprise of stress control sleeves, insulating sleeves and co-
extruded dual wall Tubing comprising of an insulating and semi-conducting layer. A
mechanical connector with shear head bolts shall make the conductor connection.
Pre-moulded cables accessories are acceptable. Further offered objects should have been in
successful operation for at least 5 years. The tenderer should submit performance certificate
from the users to support this
The product should be type tested as per IEC /KEMA specifications.
The termination arrangement insulators shall be composite type and shall be unaffected by
atmospheric conditions due to fumes, ozone acids, alkaline, dust, sand storms or rapid
change in temperature between 0C and 75C under working conditions and the prevailing
environmental conditions/changes in Delhi.
6.2 Creepage distance for one bushing should be 3 cm/kV.
Termination shall be realized in conformity with the latest IEC standards.

7.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
a) The product offered should be proven and should be in use in India for a minimum period
of 5 years for the same voltage class. List of past supplies in India to be furnished.
Performance certificates to be submitted along with the offer.
b) The product offered should have unlimited shelf life.
c) Offers should be supported with type test certificates from test laboratories of repute, as
per IEC/KEMA specifications, failing which the offers shall be ignored.
7.1 General Specifications for Joints and Terminations For 66 kV Cables
The Terminations (Outdoor Ealing ends) and Straight Through Joints for 66 kV cables shall
be of Heat-shrinkable, Raychem type, suitable for 66 kV (E) grade or higher, single core 800
sq mm or higher, XLPE Insulated, Aluminium or copper sheathed cables.
7.2 General
In High Voltage power transmission, three single core cables are used in place of three core
cables. In the single core power transmission, the cables are usually covered with a metallic
sheath to prevent ingress of moisture, protect the core from possible mechanical damage and
create an earthed shield.
Unlike the three core cables, the Single core cable behaves like a transformer. The current
carrying conductor of the cable acts as the primary winding and the metallic sheath as the
secondary. The field of the current carrying conductor induces a voltage in the metallic sheath
of the cable.
7.3 Sheath Induced voltage:

The magnitude of the EMF induced in the cable sheath is directly proportional to the
magnitude of the load current carried by the conductor, the mutual inductance between
sheaths of the cables, the spacing between the cables and the cable length.
Es = 314. I. L volts/m
Es = Sheath Voltage.
I = Current in the conductor
L = Mutual inductance between the sheaths of cables
This induced EMF causes a circulating current to flow in the sheath when both ends of the
metallic sheath are bonded to the ground.
7.4 Circulating Currents:

Circulating currents are generated in the metallic sheaths of 1/C cables when the cable's
insulated conductor is carrying alternating current and its metallic sheath is bonded to ground
at both ends. It doesnt matter what metal the layer is. If it's metal and grounded at both
ends there will be a current induced into it. The magnitude of this circulating current depends
on the current in the conductor and the impedance of the loop formed by this layer and the
ground path.
Sheath Bonding methods:
(a) Single Point Bonding

(b) Mid Point Bonding
(c) Cross Bonding
Single Point Bonding:

In single point bonding, one end of the sheath is grounded and the other end is kept floating.
Usually the supply end is grounded.
When the cable's Armour / sheath / concentric ground is floating at one end, a standing
voltage will be generated on this metallic layer. The magnitude of this standing voltage is
directly proportional to conductor current and to cable length. It's also proportional to the

spacing between cables and how they're laid out (i.e. flat or trefoil), but current and length are
the big factors. Generally standing voltage is not of concern except if the runs are long and /
or conductor current is high.
As per the earthing practices as laid down in IS 3043, this standing voltage should not exceed
65 Volts. Typically, Single point bonding is adopted for feeder lengths not exceeding 1kM.
During installation care must be taken to ensure that cable jackets are not damaged. If they
are damaged the Armour or sheath could make contact with ground along the run. This forms
ground loops, which would, allow circulating currents to flow and this causes cables to
overheat. Sparking and cable failures have also been observed at points where
cable jackets have been damaged and these circulating currents are allowed to flow to
ground.
The floating end should be insulated from the ground. A Sheath Voltage Limiter is installed at
the floating end so as to ensure that sheath does not see very high voltages at the time of
fault. If the sheath is damaged, moisture ingress & flow of circulating current shall happen.
For longer feeder lengths, multiple single point bonding can be carried out with a ground
continuity conductor.
Mid point Bonding:
In this method, the bonding is carried out at the center of the cable feeder and the other two
ends are grounded through SVL. This ensures that the sheath standing voltage is halved.
Cross-bonding:
For longer feeder lengths wherein the Sheath induced voltages are high, cross bonding of
sheaths is to be carried out.
The sheaths are electrically transposed at every splice, reducing both currents and voltages.
SVLs are needed at 2 out of 3 joint locations, and a ground continuity conductor is often
installed (but not mandatory).
The sheath bonding Copper cables (3.3 kV) of appropriate size, link boxes, sheath voltage
limiters and other accessories are to be provided. The link boxes should be suitable for
underground burial and shall be housed in a common bay near the jointing bay. The length of
sheath bonding cables should not exceed 10 mtrs.
Depending upon the route finally chosen, the BE-6&7 Contractor shall prepare a design for
Bonding, and shall establish that with the Bonding method adopted, the sheath voltages do
not exceed the max permissible limit.
In case Cross Bonding becomes necessary, the sheaths have to be electrically transposed at
every straight though joint location and Sheath Voltage Limiters (SVL) may require to be
provided at 2 out of 3 Joint locations. This shall be decided during the design of the Bonding
method.
The contractor will be required to submit the calculation that bonding method selected by
him, single point bonding/ mid point bonding/ cross bonding, ensures that the sheath voltage
is limited to less than 65V in case of ultimate full loading of cable i.e. considering short time
over loadings also. Generally, cross bonding is to be used if feeder length is more than 3kms.
Thus cross bonding will be required for all the substations.

WIRING
1.0 GENERAL
Technical Specifications in this section cover the Internal Wiring Installation for Lights, Fans,
convenience socket outlets etc as required.
2.0 STANDARDS AND CODES
3.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Conduiting System
3.1.1 M S Conduit Fabricated from MS steel strips

16 gauge upto 32 mm and 14 gauge above 32mm
Electric resistance welded (ERW)
Electric threaded with both ends screwed having perfectly
circular tubing.
Shall be free from burrs, fins
Black enamel painted inside and outside in its manufactured
form.
All conduits shall be ISI embossed.
3.1.2 GI conduit As above but galvanized to IS 209-1992 and IS 6745 1972.
3.1.3 Metallic Fabricated from electro galvanized, bright, cold rolled annealed
Flexible strip mild steel
Conduit The conduit shall be wound tightly and the strip so overlapped
that no openings are seen
Internal surface shall be free from burrs and strip edges
Conduits shall be marked with IS certification mark
3.1.4 Non Metallic The rigid conduit pipes shall be ISI marked
Conduits The conduits shall be circular in cross section and designated
by their nominal outside diameter.
The dimensional details of rigid non metallic conduits are as
follows.
Sr Nominal Maximum Minimum Maximum Maximum
No. outside outside inside permissible permissible
diameter diameter diameter (in eccentricity ovality
(in mm) (in mm) mm) (in mm) (in mm)
1 20 20+0.3 17.2 0.2 0.5
2 25 25+0.3 21.6 0.2 0.5
3 32 32+0.3 28.2 0.2 0.5
4 40 40+0.3 35.8 0.2 0.5
5 50 50+0.3 45.0 0.4 0.6
3.2 Conduit Accessories.
3.2.1 MS Bends / GI bends

Large right angle bends (more Conduits shall be bent cold with an approved
than 75 mm radius) and non type of bending block or bending machine,
right angle bends without altering the dimensions of their
sections.
All conduits bends shall be such as to permit

compliance to the requirements for bends in
cables to as stated in the IEE regulations
Bends shall be made with as large a radius as
the position of the conduit within the building
permits. Where the bend is more than 90
degree, circular or rectangular junction boxes
shall be used for connecting conduits.
3.2.2 Standard accessories
Standard/extra-deep circular Heavy duty black enamel painted
boxes, looping in boxes, Heavy duty covers screwed with approved
junction boxes, solid quality screws
/inspection elbows, solid/
inspection tees, couplers,
nipples, saddles, check nuts,
earth clips, ball socket joints,
bushes etc
3.2.3 Ordinary clips or girder
clips Size of conduit Width Thickness
20 mm &25 mm 19 mm 20 SWG
(0.9144 mm)
32 mm & above 25 mm 18 SWG
(1.219 mm)
3.2.4 Fabricated accessories
3.2.4.1 General Specifications Means of fixing connectors etc., as required,
shall be provided in the boxes
Boxes shall be finished with minimum 2 coats
of enamel paint of approved colour.
A screwed brass stud shall be provided in all
boxes as earthing terminal.
provided with required number of threaded
collars for conduit entry
3 mm thick Perspex/hylam sheet cover of
matching colour shall be provided.
3.2.4.2 Outlet/junction boxes Fabricated from 1.6 mm thick MS sheets
3.2.4.3 recessed ceiling fan outlet Fabricated from minimum 3 mm thick sheets
boxes Hexagonal in shape
Minimum 100 mm depth and 60 mm sides.
provided with 'U' shaped 15 mm dia rod
welded to the box with minimum 150 mm
projection on either side
3.2.4.4 Outlet Boxes For Light Minimum 75mm x 75mm x 50mm deep
Fittings.
3.2.4.5 Boxes for switches, switched The boxes shall be protected from rust by
socket outlets, telephone/ zinc phosphate primer process.
computer / TV outlets, bell Fabricated from minimum 1.6 mm thick MS
pushes, electronic fan sheets
regulators Finished with rust inhibiting zinc phosphating
treatment,
These boxes shall be free from burrs, fins
and internal roughness.
Shall be suitable for a grid plate mounting for
wiring accessories leaving ample space at
the back and on the sides for accommodating
wiring conductors.
Shall be provided with a brass earth terminal.

3.3 Stranded Wires
3.3.1 General Specifications Voltage grade 1100 V

99.97% pure electrolytic grade bright
annealed bare copper conductors
All conductors shall be stranded
Shall be single core unsheathed
Coil packings shall be ISI marked as
stipulated in IS 694
Insulation parameters like critical oxygen
index, temperature index, smoke density and
flammability test shall conform to relevant IEC
and ASTM Standards.
3.3.2 PVC insulated ISI marked / IS 694
3.3.3 FRLS PVC insulated Critical oxygen index more than 29%
(minimum)
Temp. index more than 250 deg
Smoke density more than 40%
Acid gas generation more than 20%
Flammability test as per IEC 332-I
3.3.4 ZHFR PVC Insulated IEC 332-1 and IS 694 : 1990
3.4 Modular Wiring Accessories
3.4.1 General Specifications Modular enclosed type flush mounted 110

Volt AC
Colour as approved by Architects/Consultants
The housing, cover plates etc shall be made
from high impact resistant, flame retarding
and ultra violet stabilized engineering plastic
material.
3.4.2 6/16 amp switches The moving and fixed contacts shall be of
silver nickel and silver graphite alloy and
contact tips coated with silver.
3.4.3 Moulded Cover Plates Secured to the box with counter sunk round
head chromium plated brass screws
Multiple switches installed together shall have
a common switch cover plate as under
Size 1 - One and two gang switch,
telephone outlet, 6 and 16 amps
switched/unswitched
Size 2 - Three and four gang switches
Size 3 - Six and eight gang switches
Size 4 - Nine and twelve switches
Wherever required the next higher size of
cover plate shall be used and openings
provided with blank-off covers at no extra
cost.
3.4.4 6/16 amps wall socket outlets Universal pins
Switched socket outlets unless otherwise
stipulated.
Linear safety shutters
The controlling switch shall be on the phase
wire of the circuit.
All outlets shall have an earth terminal
connected to the earthing stud in the box.

3.5 Wiring Capacity of Conduits
Conduits shall be of ample sectional area to facilitate simultaneous drawing of wires and
permit future provision also. Total cross section of wires measured overall shall not normally
be more than half the area of the conduit. Maximum number of wires which could be drawn in
various sizes of conduits shall be as given in table below.
Maximum no of PVC insulated 660/1100 V grade aluminium/copper conductor wires

conforming to IS : 694 1990
Nominal Cross 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 38 mm 51 mm 64 mm
sectional area
S B S B S B S B S B S B
of conductor in
sq mm
1.50 5 4 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -
2.50 5 3 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -
4 3 2 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -
6 2 - 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -
10 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -
16 - - 2 2 3 3 6 5 10 7 12 8
25 - - - - 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7
35 - - - - - - 3 2 6 5 8 6
50 - - - - - - - - 5 3 6 5
70 - - - - - - - - 4 3 5 4
1. The above table shows that maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous drawing in of
cables.
2. The columns headed S apply to runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding 4.25 m
between draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the straight by an angle of more than
15 degrees. The columns headed B; apply to runs of conduit, which deflect from the straight
by an angle of more than 15 degrees
3. Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.
4.0 CONDUITING AND WIRING INSTALLATION
4.1 Scope of work
Conduits shall be laid either recessed in walls and ceilings or on surface on walls and ceilings
or partly recessed and partly on surface, as required. Same rate shall apply for recessed and
surface conduiting in this contract.
Stranded copper conductor insulated wire of size as per schedule of quantities shall be
provided in entire conduiting for loop earthing.
Steel wire of 1.6 mm / 1.2 mm (16 / 18 SWG) size shall be left in all conduit runs to facilitate
drawing of wires after completion of conduiting.
4.2 Samples
Sample Approval Samples of all conduits fittings and accessories shall be

approved by Engineer-in-Charge before use.
4.3 M S Conduiting
4.3.1 Conduit Layouts, Conduit layout and routes shall be submitted for
routes and drawings Engineer-in-Charges approval prior to execution.
Allowance for adjustments due to site conditions shall
be provided with no extra cost.

Conduit routes shall be straight runs with a minimum of
bends and crossings and shall in general run at right
angles or parallel to floors and ceilings.
Spacing of conduits from gas lines minimum 150 mm.
If unavoidable, effectively segregate using rubber or
other insulating material to ensure equipotential at
points of contact.
Conduits to be segregated from extra low voltage
circuits and telecommunication circuits.
Conduits from different distribution boards shall not be
connected to the same junction box.
4.3.2 Draw/ outlet/ switch Outlets boxes for housing accessories shall be used as
boxes draw boxes.
Conduits runs between draw boxes shall not exceed 12
m or have more than two right angle bends.
Boxes for Ceiling mounted fluorescent fittings shall be
provided 300 mm off centre for a 1200 mm fitting and
150 mm off centre for a 600 mm fitting so that the wiring
is taken directly to the down rod.
In case the number of switches in one box is not as per
standard manufacture, the box accommodating the next
higher number of switches shall be provided without any
extra cost
Junction/ draw boxes shall be located in accessible
locations to permit redrawing of wires in future.
Conduit entry shall be secured in position by check nuts
and provided with bushes. No timber shall be used for
any supports.
4.3.3 Joints and Electrical and mechanical continuity shall be maintained
terminations throughout all conduits joints and terminations. Conduit
threads shall be thoroughly cleaned and the conduits
tightly screwed. The conduit system shall be watertight
after installation.
Conduits shall be connected using couplers or via boxes.
With a coupler, the ends of the conduit shall butted close
together with running coupler screwed tightly and
tightened by a locknut.
Conduits terminating into boxes provided with spouts
shall be threaded so that there are no exposed threads.
For boxes with no spouts, the termination shall be made
using a brass bush screwed tightly onto its end and a
coupler screwed to butt firmly against the exterior wall of
the box.
Where conduits are not jointed or terminated in boxes,
they shall be terminated in a screwed brass bush.
In all joints and terminations, conduits threads shall not
be exposed. Where this cannot be avoided as in a
running coupler, the exposed threads shall be coated
with red lead paint to seal against the ingress of water.
4.3.4 Expansion Joints When crossing through expansion joints in buildings, the
conduit sections across the joint shall be through approved
quality heavy duty metal flexible conduits of the same size as
the rigid conduit.
4.3.5 Painting Before laying, conduits shall be painted at such places
where paint has been damaged due to vice or wrench grip or
any other reason.
4.3.6 Colour coding of Surface conduits shall be provided with 20 mm wide and 100
conduits mm long colour coding strips as below

Use Code colour
Low voltage Grey
Telephone Black
Earthing system Green
Control system lighting Purple
4.3.7 Recessed Conduiting

4.3.7.1 Recessed in Concrete slabs
Conduits recessed in concrete members shall be laid before casting, in the upper
portion of slabs or otherwise as may be instructed with a minimum cover of 12 mm
concrete.
Should it become necessary to embed conduits in already cast concrete members,
suitable chase shall be cut in concrete for the purpose with a chase cutting machine
at no extra cost.
Conduits shall be adequately tied to the reinforcement casting at intervals of
maximum 1 meter. No reinforcement bars shall be cut to fix the conduits.
4.3.7.2 Recessed in walls
Conduits recessed in brick work shall be laid in chases to be cut by electrical
Contractor in brick work before plastering.
The chases shall be cut by a chase cutting electric machine.
The chases shall be of sufficient width with minimum 10 mm spacing between
adjacent conduit to accommodate the required number of conduits and of sufficient
depth to permit full thickness of plaster minimum 6 mm over conduits.
The conduits shall be secured in the chase by means of heavy duty pressed steel
clamps screwed to MS flat strip saddles at intervals of maximum 1 meter.
The chases shall then be filled with cement and coarse sand mortar (1:3) and
properly cured by watering.
For chases more than 75 mm width, a wiremesh shall be provided for the full length
and width of the chase in the plaster to prevent cracking.
Open ends of conduits laid in slabs and walls shall be suitably plugged before
pouring concrete / plastering to prevent ingress of water / debris in to the conduits
If making chases are necessary in the finished brick work these shall be made good
in most workmanlike manner to match with the original finish after fixing conduit in
chases at no extra cost.
4.3.7.3 Fittings and Accessories
The fittings and accessories shall be completely embedded in walls/ceilings leaving
top surface flush with finished wall/ceiling surface in a workman like manner.
4.3.8 Surface Conduiting
Neat appearance and good workmanship of surface conduiting work is of particular
importance. The entire conduit work shall be in absolute line and plumb.
Holes in concrete or brick work for fixing the saddles shall be made neatly by electric
drills using masonry drill bits.
Conduit shall be laid in surface over finished concrete and/or plastered brickwork
with suitable spacer saddles of approved make at intervals not exceeding 600 mm.
Conduits shall be fixed on the saddles by means of good quality heavy duty GI
clamps screwed to the saddles by counter sunk screws.
No run of conduit shall have more than four right angle bends from outlet to outlet.
Bends in multi runs of conduits shall be parallel to each other and neat in
appearance, maintaining the same distance as between straight runs of conduits.
4.3.9 Conduits above false ceiling
Conduits above false ceiling shall be fixed on suitable hangers supported from the
structural ceiling
4.3.10 Final Connections All final connections shall be made through steel flexible
above false ceiling conduits.

4.4 Non-Metallic Conduit Installation
4.4.1 Conduit layouts No non metallic conduits less than 20 mm in diameter

shall be used.
The erection of conduits of each circuit shall be
completed before the cables are drawn in
4.4.2 Joints and All joints shall be sealed / cemented with approved
terminations cement. Damaged conduit pipes/ fittings shall not be
used in the work. Cut ends of conduit pipes shall have
neither sharp edges nor any burrs.
4.4.3 Bends Bends may be formed either by bending the pipes by an
approved method of heating, or by inserting suitable
standard accessories e.g. bends, elbows or similar
fittings, or by fixing non metallic inspection boxes,
whichever is most suitable.
Radius of bends in conduit pipes shall not be less than
7.5 cm. No length of conduit shall have more than the
equivalent of four quarter bends from outlet to outlet
Care shall be taken while bending the pipes to ensure
that the conduit pipe is not injured, and that the internal
diameter is not effectively reduced.
4.4.4 Outlet Boxes All switches, plugs, fan regulators etc. shall be fitted in
flush pattern.
4.4.5 Surface Conduiting
Conduit pipes shall be fixed by staples or heavy gauge non metallic saddles with
base, secured with approved plugs with screws at an interval of not more than
60 cm.
On either side of couplers or bends or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a
distance of 15 cm from the center of such fittings.
Slotted PVC saddles may also be used where the PVC pipe can be pushed in
through the slots.
5.0 LAYING AND DRAWING OF WIRES
5.1 Conduit Preparation prior to wire drawing

5.1.1 Cleaning of Conduit The entire conduit system including outlets and boxes shall
Runs be thoroughly cleaned by forcing compressed air after
completion of erection and before drawing in of cables.
5.1.2 Protection of To safeguard against filling up with mortar/plaster etc. all the
Conduits outlet and switch boxes shall be provided with temporary
covers and plugs. All screwed and socketed joints shall be
made fully water tight with white lead paste.
5.1.3 Protection Against All outlets in conduit system shall be properly drained and
Dampness ventilated to minimise chances of condensation/sweating.
5.1.4 Completeness of No wire shall be drawn into any conduit, until all work of any
conduiting and nature, that may cause injury to wire is completed. Burrs in
removal of burrs cut conduits shall be smoothened.
etc
5.2 Bunching of Wires Wires carrying current shall be so bunched in conduits
that the outgoing and return wires are drawn into the
same conduit.
Wires originating from two different phases shall not be
run in the same conduit.
5.3 Drawing of Wires Care shall be taken in pulling the wires so that no
damage occurs to the insulation of the wire.
Approved type bushes shall be provided at conduit
terminations.

Care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks which
cause breakage of conductors.
There shall be no sharp bends.
5.4 Precautions after After wiring is completed,
wiring is completed
Provide a blank metal/sunmica plate at no extra cost on
all switch / outlet / junction boxes for security and to
ensure that wires are not stolen till switches / outlets
etc.. are fixed.
The contractor shall be responsible to ensure that wires
and loop earthing conductors are not broken and stolen.
In the event of the wire being partly / fully stolen , the
contractor shall replace the entire wiring alongwith loop
earthing at no extra cost. No joint of any nature
whatsoever shall be permitted in wiring and loop
earthing .
5.5 Termination Wiring conductors shall be continuous from outlet to
/Jointing of Wires outlet. Joints where unavoidable, due to any special
reason shall be made by approved connectors.
Joints shall be made only at distribution board terminals,
switches/buzzers/outlets/lamp holders terminals for
lights/ fans/ socket outlets. No joints shall be made
inside conduits or junction/ draw/ inspection boxes.
Insulation shall be shaved off for a length of 15 mm at
the end of wire like sharpening of a pencil and shall not
be removed by cutting it square or wringing.
Strands of wires shall not be cut for connecting
terminals.
Conductors having nominal cross sectional area
exceeding 1.5 sq. mm shall always be provided with
crimping sockets.
At all bolted terminals, brass flat washer of large area
and approved steel spring washers shall be used.
Brass nuts and bolts shall be used for all connections.
The pressure applied to tighten terminal screws shall be
just adequate, neither too much nor too less.
5.6 Wiring system Sub-circuit wiring shall be carried out in looping system.
Switches controlling lights, fans or socket outlets shall
be connected in the phase wire of the final sub circuit
only.
Switches shall never be connected in the neutral wire.
5.7 Wiring parameters For estimation of load, following loads per point shall be
assumed.
Light points 60/100 Watts.

6 amps socket outlet points 100 Watts.
Fan points 60 Watts.
Exhaust fan points 100 Watts unless otherwise
specified.
16 amp socket outlet 1000 Watts. unless otherwise
specified
Light and fan points shall be wired on a common final

sub-circuit. Each sub circuit shall not have more than a
total of 10 nos lights and fans or a load of 800 watts
whichever is lesser unless specifically stipulated
otherwise.

5.8 Labelling of wires All wiring shall be labelled with appropriate plastic
ferrules for identification.
5.9 Load Balancing The Contractor shall plan the load balancing of circuits in 3
phase installation and get the same approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge before commencement of the work.
5.10 Colour Code of Colour code for normal supply

Conductors
Phases .. Red, Yellow, Blue
Neutral Black
Earth Green
Colour code for UPS supply
Phases Red/white,Yellow/white, Blue/white

Neutral White
Earth Green/yellow
6.0 EARTHING
6.1 Loop Earthing A protective (earth) conductor shall be run throughout

the installation and shall be continuous.
The earth conductor shall be drawn inside the conduit in
all distribution circuits to provide for earthing of non
current carrying metallic parts of the installation.
The Loop earthing wire shall commence from the earth
terminal blocks at the DB and shall be connected to a
screwed earth stud inside switch/ ceiling fan/ light/ outlet
boxes to make an effective contact with the metal body.
Loop earthing shall be provided by means of insulated
stranded copper conductor wires of sizes as per
Schedule of Quantity laid alongwith wiring inside
conduits for all wiring outlets and sub-mains.
Gas or water pipe shall not be used as protective
conductors (earth medium)
7.0 LIGHTING FIXTURES
7.1 Assembly prior to shall be assembled and installed complete and ready for
Installation service, in accordance with details, drawings, manufacturer's
instructions
7.2 Wire Connection Wires from junction boxes shall be drawn in GI flexible
pipes for connecting to fixtures. The flexible pipes shall
be provided with a checknut at the fixture end.
7.3 Pendant fixtures Overall suspension length shall be as advised and subject to
change
mounted rigid, true to alignment, plumb, level and capable of
resisting all lateral and vertical forces
concealed suspension arrangement shall be provided
8.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT OF WIRING
Wiring for lights, fans and convenience socket outlets shall be measured and paid for on
Point Basis as itemized schedule of quantities and as elaborated as below (unless otherwise
stated).

8.1 Average wiring Length.
The point wiring basis of payments shall assume average conduiting and wiring length based
on parameters stipulated in para 7.3 below. The average length shall consider the electrical
layouts of the entire project.
Tenderers are advised to seek clarifications, if they so desire, on this aspect before
submitting their tenders.
No claim for extra payment on account of any lack of understanding and/or electrical
layouts in part or whole of the project requiring larger average wiring and conduiting
length per point, whether specifically shown in tender drawings or not, shall be
entertained after the award of contract.
8.2 Point Wiring Rates
The point wiring rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of the sub heads of cost as per
nomenclature hereunder
8.2.1 Sub Heads of Cost
Code of Item Description of items

A Cost of entire material and labour require for completion of the point
B Recessed/surface conduiting system with all accessories,
junction/draw/inspection boxes, bushes, check nuts etc. complete as
required,
C Circuit Wiring from DB through switch upto point with stranded copper
conductor ZHFR/ FRLS PVC insulated 660/1100 volt grade wires
including terminations etc. complete as required.
D Point Wiring with stranded copper conductor ZHFR/ FRLS PVC
insulated 660/1100 volt grade wires including terminations etc. complete
as required.
E Loop earthing with stranded copper conductor ZHFR/ FRLS PVC
insulated 660/1000 volt grade wires including terminations etc.
F Control switch with switch box and cover plate of specified type including
fixing screws, earth terminal etc. complete as required.
G MCB control for light point
H ceiling outlet box with recessed fan hooks and installation of fan
regulator
J Providing a 3/5 pin 6 amp socket outlet near the fan alongwith plug top
and a separate 6 amp control switch.
K Providing 3 pin 6 amp socket outlet with 6 amp control switch in GI box
with cover
L 3 pin 16 amp socket outlet with 16 amp control switch in GI box with
cover
8.2.2 Point Wiring Rates calculated as below

Primary Light point in group A + B + C + D + E + F
control with switch
Primary Light point in group A + B + C + D + E
control with MCB
Secondary light point A+B+D+E
Ceiling Fan point A+B+C+D+E+F+H
Exhaust fan point A+B+C+D+E+J
3/5 pin 6 amp convenience switch A + B + C + D + E + K
socket outlet
3/5 pin 16 amp convenience A + B + C + D + E + L
switch socket outlet

9.0 ROUTINE AND COMPLETION TESTS
9.1 Installation Completion Tests
At the completion of the work, the entire installation shall be subject to the following tests:
1. Wiring continuity test

2. Insulation resistance test
3. Earth continuity test
4. Earth resistivity test
Besides the above, any other test specified by the local authority shall also be carried out. All
tested and calibrated instruments for testing, labour, materials and incidentals necessary to
conduct the above tests shall be provided by the contractor at his own cost.
Test Description Desired Value

Wiring All wiring systems shall be tested for
Continuity continuity of circuits, short circuits, and
Test earthing after wiring is completed and before
installation is energised.
Insulation Measure insulation resistance between earth The insulation resistance
Resistance and the whole system conductors, or any measured shall not be
Test section thereof with all protection in place and less than 50 megohms
all switches closed and except in concentric divided by the number of
wiring all lamps in position of both poles of the points provided on the
installation otherwise electrically connected circuit.
together, with a direct current pressure of not
less than twice the working pressure provided The whole installation
that it does not exceed 1100 volts for LT shall not have an
circuits. Where the supply is derived from AC insulation resistance lower
three phase system, the neutral pole of which than one megohm.
is connected to earth, either direct or through
added resistance, pressure shall be deemed
to be that which is maintained between the
phase conductor and the neutral.
Measure insulation resistance between all The insulation resistance
conductors connected to one phase conductor measured shall not be
of the supply and shall be carried out after less than 50 megohms
removing all metallic connections between the divided by the number of
two poles of the installation points provided on the
circuit.
The whole installation

shall not have an
insulation resistance lower
than one megohm.
Measure the insulation resistance between This shall not be less than
the frame work of housing of power half a megohm or when
appliances and all live parts of each appliance PVC insulated cables are
used for wiring 12.5
megohms divided by the
number of outlets. Where
a whole installation is
being tested a lower value
than that given by the
above formula subject to a
minimum of 1 Megohms is
acceptable.

Testing Of The earth continuity conductor including metal This shall not exceed one
Earth conduits and metallic envelopes of cable in all ohm.
Continuity cases shall be tested for electric continuity
Path and the electrical resistance of the same
measured alongwith the earthing lead but
excluding any added resistance of earth
leakage circuit breaker measured from the
connection with the earth electrode to any
point in the earth continuity conductor in the
completed installation
Testing Of In a two wire installation verify that all non-
Polarity Of linked single pole switches have been
Non-Linked connected to the same conductor throughout,
Single Pole and such conductor shall be labeled or
Switches marked for connection to an outer or phase
conductor or to the non-earthed conductor of
the supply
In the three of four wire installation, verify that
every non-linked single pole switch is fitted to
one of the outer or phase conductor of the
supply.
Earth Earth resistivity test shall be carried out in
Resistivity accordance with IS Code of Practice for
Test earthing IS 3043.
9.2 Performance
Should the above tests not comply with the limits and requirements as above the contractor
shall rectify the faults until the required results are obtained. The contractor shall be
responsible for providing the necessary instruments and subsidiary earths for carrying out the
tests. The above tests are to be carried out by the contractor without any extra charge.

CABLE TRAYS
1. Cable trays, of sizes as per schedule of quantities and drawings shall be of perforated
doubled bend channel/ladder design unless otherwise stated. Cable trays shall be fabricated
from minimum 2 mm thick sheet steel and shall be complete with tees, elbows, risers, and all
necessary hardware. Cable trays shall comply with the following:
2. Trays shall have suitable strength and rigidity to provide proper support for all contained
cables. Trays shall not have sharp edges, burrs or projections injurious to cable insulation.
Trays shall include fittings for changes in direction and elevation. Cable trays and accessories
shall be painted with one shop coated of red oxide zinc chromate primer and two side coats of
aluminium alkyd paint or approved equivalent. Cable trays shall not have sharp edges, burrs
or projection that may damage the insulation jackets of the wiring. Cable trays shall have side
rails or equivalent structural members.
3. Unless otherwise specifically noted on the relevant layout drawing, all cable tray mounting
works to be carried out ensuring the following :
Cable tray mounting arrangement type to be as marked on layout drawing. Assembly of tray
mounting structure shall be supplied fabricated, erected & painted by the electrical contractor.
Tray mounting structures shall be welded to plate inserts or to structural beams as approved
by the Owners/Architects. Wherever embedded plates & structural beams are not available
for welding the tray mounting structure electrical contractor to supply the MS plates & fix them
to floor slab by four anchor fasteners of minimum 16 mm dia having minimum holding power
of 5000 Kg at no extra cost. Maximum loading on a horizontal support arm to be 120 Kg.
metre of cable run. Width of the horizontal arms of the tray supporting structures to be same
as the tray widths specified in tray layout drawings, plus length required, for welding to the
vertical supports. The length of vertical supporting members for horizontal tray runs shall be
to suit the number of tray tiers shown in tray layout drawings. Spacing between horizontal
supports arms of vertical tray runs to be 300 mm. Cable trays will be welded to their mounting
supports. Minimum clearance between the top most tray tier and structural member to be 300
mm. Cables in vertical race ways to be clamped by saddle type clamps to the horizontal
slotted angels. Clamps to be fabricated from 3 mm thick aluminium strip at site by the
electrical contractor to suit cable groups. The structural steel (standard quality) shall be
according to latest revision of IS : 226 & 808. Welding shall be as per latest revisions of IS :
816. All structural steel to be painted with one shop coat of red oxide and oil primer followed
by a finishing coat of aluminium alkyd paint where any cuts or holes are made on finished
steel work these shall be sealed against oxidation by red oxide followed by the same finishing
paint. Steel sheet covers wherever indicated to be similarly painted. Trays shall be erected
properly to present a neat and clean appearance. Trays shall be installed as a complete
system. Trays shall be supported adequately by means of painted MS structural members
secured to the structure by dash fasteners or by grouting. The entire cable tray system shall
be rigid. Each run of cable tray shall be completed before laying of cables. Cable trays shall
be erected so as to be exposed and accessible.

415 VOLTS MV SWITCHBOARDS
1.0 GENERAL
This section covers specification of Switchboards
2.0 STANDARDS AND CODES
3.0 SWITCHGEAR
3.1 LT Air Circuit Breakers
3.1.1 Type Air Break

3.1.2 Operating voltage 415 volt 3 phase 50 Hz
3.1.3 Insulation Voltage 660 volts
3.1.4 Current rating As per Schedule of Quantities
3.1.5 Fault Level withstand As per Schedule of Quantities
Ics
3.1.6 Icu 100% Ics
3.1.7 Icw 100% Ics
3.1.8 Isolation function As per IEC 60947-2 Section 7.12
3.1.9 Insulation Cass II insulation between the front panel and internal
power circuits
3.1.10 Cubicle mounting Draw out unless otherwise stated.
3.1.11 Operating Trip free such that the circuit breaker is at all times free to
mechanism open immediately the trip coil is energised
Independent Manual spring closing (IMS) or motor wound

spring closing mechanism (MWS) as per Schedule of
Quantities
3.1.12 No of Poles 3 or 4 as required
3.1.13 All current carrying Silver plated
parts
3.1.14 Arcing contacts Shall be provided to protect the main contacts and shall be
separate from the main contacts and easily replaceable.
3.1.15 Arc chutes Shall be provided for each pole, and shall be suitable for
being lifted out for the inspection of the main and the arcing
contacts.
3.1.16 Isolating Contacts Self aligning cluster type
3.1.17 Safety Shutters Earthed metal or insulated automatically operated shutters
to screen live cluster contacts when the Breaker is
withdrawn from the cubicle
3.1.18 Auxiliary Contacts Self aligning sliding auxiliary contacts.
Free / minimum 6 NO/NC auxiliary contacts rated at 16
amps 415 volts 50 Hz
These shall be approachable from the front for connecting
all external wiring
They shall close before the main contacts when the Circuit
Breaker is plugged in and vice versa when the Circuit
Breaker is Drawn Out of the cubicle.
The fixed portion of the sliding contacts shall have easy
access for maintenance purposes.

3.1.19 Indications and Mechanical ON/OFF indication
Operations integral Operating handle
with ACB on front Mechanical trip push button
Mechanical indicator for Ready to close situation for
the breaker by checking all interlockings.
Indication of mechanical wear of contacts and hence
contact life
3.1.20 Anti pumping Mechanical and electrical devices integral to Breaker
mechanism
3.1.21 Circuit Breaker Four distinct and separate positions and shall be indicated
operational positions on the face of the panel.
"Service" -- Both main and secondary isolating

contacts closed
"Test" -- Main isolating contacts open and
secondary isolating contacts closed
"Isolated" -- Both main and secondary isolating
contacts open
"Maintenance" -- Circuit Breaker fully outside the panel
ready for maintenance
3.1.22 Accessories Control wiring and all accessories shunt trip coil, under
voltage release etc shall be fittable and accessible from
front.
3.1.23 Circuit Breaker Sequence type strain free interlocks shall be provided to
Interlocking ensure the following:
Breaker cannot be withdrawn from the cubicle when in

the "ON" position. Suitable mechanism shall be
provided to lock the Breaker in the tripped position
before the Breaker is isolated.
Breaker cannot be switched "ON" until it is either in the
fully inserted position or, for testing purposes, it is in the
fully isolated position.
Circuit Breaker cannot be plugged in unless it is in the
OFF position.
A safety latch shall be provided to ensure that the
movement of the Breaker is checked when being
withdrawn to prevent its accidental fall due its weight.
Sheet steel hinged lockable doors for each separate
compartment shall be provided and duly interlocked
with the breaker in "ON" and "OFF" position.
3.1.24 Protection Microprocessor based releases EMC (Electro Magnetic
Compatible) having built in overload, short circuit & earth
fault protection and/or EMI (Electromagnetic indication)/
numeric relays shall be provided for the Circuit Breakers as
stipulated in the Schedule of Quantities
3.1.25 Earthing The frame of the Circuit Breaker shall be positively earthed
when the Circuit Breaker is racked into the cubicle.
3.1.26 Types of terminals Flexibility in changing at site to suit the bus bar orientation
3.1.27 Electrical endurance Breakers upto 4000 amps greater than 5000
with maintenance cycles
Breakers 4000 amps and above.... 1500 cycles
3.1.28 Type test certificates Submit Certificates from a recognised test house for the
Circuit Breakers offered.

3.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
3.2.1 Type Air Break

3.2.2 Operating voltage 415 volt 3 phase 50 Hz
3.2.3 Insulation Voltage 660 volts
3.2.4 Current rating As per Schedule of Quantities
3.2.5 Fault Level withstand As per Schedule of Quantities
Ics
3.2.6 Icu 100% Ics
3.2.7 Icw 100% Ics
3.2.8 Isolation function As per IEC 60947-2 Section 7.12
3.2.9 Insulation class II insulation between the front panel and internal
power circuits
3.2.10 Cubicle mounting Fixed unless otherwise specified
3.2.11 Operating Trip free
mechanism Independent Manual spring closing (IMS) or motor wound
spring closing mechanism (MWS) as per Schedule of
Quantities
3.2.12 No of Poles 3 or 4 as required
3.2.13 All current carrying Silver plated
parts
3.2.14 Arcing contacts Shall be provided to protect the main contacts and shall be
separate from the main contacts and easily replaceable.
3.2.15 Arc chutes Shall be provided for each pole, and shall be suitable for
being lifted out for the inspection of the main and the arcing
contacts.
3.2.16 Common Operating Required for Three phase MCCBs for simultaneous
handle operation and tripping of all the three phases.
3.2.17 Indications and mechanical ON/OFF/ Tripped indication
Operations integral Operating handle
with ACB on front mechanical trip push button
3.2.18 Accessories Following accessories shall be provided as required
Under voltage trip
Shunt trip
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
3.2.19 Circuit Breaker Interlocks shall be provided to ensure the following:
Interlocking
Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations
of the breaker.
Door interlock to prevent door being opened when the
breaker is in ON position
Deinterlocking device to open the door even if the
breaker is in ON position.
Sheet steel hinged lockable doors for each separate
compartment shall be provided and duly interlocked
with the breaker in "ON" and "OFF" position.
3.2.20 Protection Microprocessor based releases and/or thermal magnetic
releases shall be provided for the Circuit Breakers as
stipulated in the Schedule of Quantities
3.2.21 Electrical endurance Upto 250 amps. minimum 10,000 operations
For 400 amps & above.minimum 4,000 operations
3.2.22 Type test certificates Submit Certificates from a recognised test house for the
Circuit Breakers offered.

4.0 SWITCHBOARDS
4.1 Supply System Three phase 4 wire, 415 volt, 50 Hz, Indian TN-S system
4.2 Short circuit level As per Schedule of Quantities
withstand
4.3 Ingress protection IP 42 unless otherwise stated
Metal based neoprene gaskets between all adjacent units
and beneath all doors and covers shall be provided to
render the joints dust and vermin proof
4.4 Pressure relief Shall be provided to minimize danger to operator during
devices internal fault conditions.
4.5 Panel Compartmentation
4.5.1 Compartment Tier 3A as per IEC 6043 (Part-I) unless otherwise stated in
Schedule of Quantities
4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Separate segregated compartment shall be provided for
Metering accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control
contactors and control MCB etc. These shall be accessible
for testing and maintenance without any danger of
accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker,
busbars and connections.
4.5.3 Control wiring A horizontal wire way with screwed cover shall be provided
compartment at the top to take interconnecting control wiring between
vertical sections.
4.6 Panel Configuration
4.6.1 Panel configuration MCCB's arranged. multi-tier formation
Air Circuit Breakers. Single or Double tier formation
4.6.2 Spare Space The Switchboards shall have a provision of 25% spare
provision space to accommodate possible future additional
switch gear.
4.6.3 Extensible Shall be extensible on both sides
4.7 Panel Construction
4.7.1 Panel construction Metal clad totally enclosed,
Dead front
floor mounted
free standing type
modular extensible design
suitable for indoor mounting.
4.7.2 Switchboard Fabrication with.... CRCA Sheet Steel
cubicles, doors and Cubicles. thickness not less than 2.0 mm
covers ....folded and braced
to ensure rigid support for all components.
Doors/ covers.. thickness not less than 1.6 mm.
Joints seam welded
Welding slag ground off
Welding pits ..wiped smooth with plumber metal.
4.7.3 Switchboard frames Fabrication with .electro galvanized MS sheets
U Channel switchboard frames. 2.5 mm thick
All joints.. neatly formed and
............finished flush with adjacent surfaces
No joints shall be located in corners.
Bare edges shall be lipped.
Structural members and bracings where ever required shall
be welded or bolted to the frame. The frame shall be of
modular design and extensible.
4.7.4 Cable compartment Rear Access switchboardsall cabling from rear
Front access switchboardsSeparate vertical cable
Accessible from front only
Adequate space shall be provided for ease of installation

and maintenance with safety for working without coming into
contact with any live parts.
The cable chambers shall be complete with
Adequate support for cables.
tinned brass cable sockets,
tinned brass compression glands,
3 mm thick gland plates,
supporting clamps and brackets etc
for termination of 1100 volt grade aluminium conductor
XLPE/ PVC/ PVCA cables.
4.7.5 Door handles Good quality door handles fitted with toggles to operate rods
to latch with suitable slots in both top and bottom of
switchboards shall be provided. Latching rods and
associated brackets shall be cadmium plated.
4.7.6 Operating handles All operating device shall be located in front of switchgear
only.
4.7.7 Fixing Screws Fixing screws shall enter holes tapped into an adequate
thickness of metal or provided with hank nuts. Self threading
screws shall not be used in switchboards.
4.7.8 Dimensional Base channel 75 mm x 5 mm thick shall be provided at

Limitations the bottom.
Minimum 200 mm blank space between the floor of
switchboard and bottom most unit shall be provided.
Overall height shall be limited to 2300 mm unless
otherwise stipulated.
Height of the operating handle, push buttons etc shall be
restricted between 300 mm and 1700 mm from finished
floor level.
4.8 Switchboard Bus Bars, Interconnections etc rating
4.8.1 Rating of Bus Bars, These shall be designed as per requirements in Schedule of
interconnections and Quantities to
to feeders Carry full load current for phase and neutral bus bars
withstand the stresses of fault level
for aluminium shall have a minimum cross section of 1
amp per sq.mm.
Copper 0.6 amps per sq mm
4.9 Switchboard Bus Bars
4.9.1 Bus Bar material High conductivity, high strength aluminium alloy, complying
with requirements of grade E 91E of IS 5082 1981
Alternatively
Electrical grade 99.99% pure copper
As per Schedule of Quantites
4.9.2 Bus Bar Insulation Heat shrunk PVC sleeving of 1.1 kV grade and bus bar
joints provided with clip-on shrouds.
4.9.3 Bus Bar supports Non-breakable, non-hygroscopic epoxy resin or glass fiber
reinforced polymer insulated supports able to withstand
operating temperature of 110O C at regular intervals, to
withstand the forces arising from a fault level as stipulated in
schedule of quantities.
4.9.4 Colour Coding All bus bars shall be colour coded.
4.9.5 Auxiliary Bus Electrolytic copper Auxiliary buses for control power supply,
space heater power supply or any other specified service
shall be provided. These shall be insulated, adequately
supported and sized to suit specific requirement.

4.10 Switchboard Interconnections
4.10.1 Interconnection Unit ratings upto 100 amps, FRLS PVC insulated copper
material conductor wires with crimped
terminations.
Rating of 100 amps and Solid copper/ aluminium

above connections PVC sleeved
4.10.2 Interconnection All connections, tappings etc
jointing Shall be made to ensure minimum contact resistance.
shall be firmly bolted and clamped with even tension.
Before assembly
joint surfaces shall be filed or finished to remove burrs,
dents and oxides and silvered to maintain good
continuity at all joints.
All screws, bolts, washers shall be cadmium plated.
Approved spring washers shall be used with cadmium
plated high tensile steel bolts with BSF threads.
4.10.2 Instrument and All wiring for relays and meters shall be with ZHFR PVC
control wiring insulated copper conductor wires. The wiring shall be coded
and labelled with approved ferrules for identification. The
minimum size of copper conductor control wires shall be 2.5
sq. mm.
4.11 Earthing Continuous earth bus sized for prospective fault current
shall be provided with arrangement for connecting to station
earth at two points. Hinged doors / frames shall be
connected to earth through adequately sized flexible braids.
4.12 Ventilation Fans Panel mounting type ventilation fans shall be provided in
each panel with switchgear rated for 2500 amp and above.
The fan shall be interlocked with switchgear operation.
4.13 Space Heaters Anti- condensation heaters shall be fitted in each cubicle
together with an ON/OFF isolating switch suitable for
electrical operation at 230 volts A.C 50 Hz single phase of
sufficient capacity to raise the internal ambient temperature
O
by 5 C operation interlocked with switchgear.
4.14 Sheet Steel Sheet steel used in the fabrication of switchboards shall
Treatment And undergo a rigorous cleaning and surface treatment seven
Painting tank process comprising of alkaline degreasing, descaling
in dilute sulphuric acid and a recognised phosphating
process after which a coat of primer paint compactively with
the final paint shall be applied over the treated surface.
Final paint coat of oven baked powder coating, of minimum
50 micron thickness, of sheet approved by Engineer-in-
Charge shall then be provided.
4.15 Labels Suitable engraved white on black metal identification labels
shall be provided for each switchgear cubicle in front and
back identifying the circuit, switchgear type, rating and duty.
4.16 Testing at All wiring checks and connections
manufacturers works Relay adjustment
Interlock function check
Continuity checks of wiring, fusesct
Insulation test
Trip test
Hight voltage test
4.17 Testing and Assembly of various sections of panels
commissioning Grounding the units
Connecting up bus bars and jointing insulated
Insulation test with 500 volts megger. The insulation
resistance not more than 100 mega ohms

4.18 Local Authority All requirements by the local Authority including those listed
Requirements below shall be complied with
Provision for Gas nozzles within each cubicle
Danger Notice Plate
Rubber floor mat of 6 m thickness and 1 m width
provided for the full length of the switchboard.
A dry chemical type fire extinguisher of required
capacity with approved label

EARTHING
1.0 GENERAL
This section covers specifications for earthing systems comprising of earth electrodes, earth
leads and loop earthing conductors.
2.0 STANDARDS
3.0 EARTHING NETWORK
3.1 EARTH NETWORK PARAMETERS

3.1.1 General All the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical
Guidelines installations including metal conduits, trunkings, cable
armour, switchboards, DBs, light fittings and all other non
current carrying parts made of metal shall be bonded
together and connected by means of specified earthing
conductors to an efficient earthing system.
3.1.2 Earthing Material The earthing system shall be constructed from bare or
insulated GI, Aluminium or Copper as specified in the
Schedule of Quantities.
3.1.3 Earths vis--vis All three phase equipment shall have two separate and
phases independent distinct body earths and single phase
equipment shall have a single body earth.
3.2 EARTH ELECTRODES
3.2.1 Guidelines for Minimum distances
earth electrodes Any electrode and building structure shall be 1.5 m.
location Two adjacent electrodes shall be 2 m.
As far as possible earth connections shall be visible for
inspections
Drawing showing the main earth connection and earth
electrodes be prepared for each installation.
Electrodes shall be located in accessible locations and not

under entrances, pavements and roads.
3.2.2 Plate Earth Electrodes
3.2.2.1 Material Copper or GI as per Schedule of Quantities
3.2.2.2 Plate size Plate size shall be based on fault level as per IS 3043 but
shall be minimum
CopperMinimum 600 mm x 600 mm x 3 mm thick
GI.Minimum 600 mm x 600 mm x 6 mm thick
3.2.2.3 Earth Pit Plate electrode shall be buried in ground with its face
vertical depth from GL to top plate 3 m
The depth shall be increased if required so that
permanently moist soil level is reached.
The electrode shall be surrounded by 15 cms thick of
alternate layers of charcoal and salt.
The 20 mm class B of GI watering pipe shall have a
watering funnel attachment with a wire mesh which shall
be housed in the masonary inspection chamber.
Main earth lead shall be securely terminated at the
electrode by means of 2 bolts, nuts, checknuts and

spring washers to be of GI for GI plate and tinned bras
for copper plate
The earth lead from the electrode upto the test link in
masonry chamber shall be drawn in a suitable diameter
class B GI pipe for mechanical protection as per BOQ
The lead shall terminate in a test link provided in the
inspection chamber to enable the earth electrode to be
isolated for measuring earth resistance.
3.2.3 Pipe Earth Electrodes
3.2.3.1 Material Class B (medium) GI pipe
3.2.3.2 Pipe Size 40 mm dia 4500 mm long
Pipe shall be tapered at the bottom and shall be provided
with 12 mm dia holes drilled at every 75 mm.
3.2.3.3 Earth pit Pipe electrode shall be installed with its top not less than
200 mm below ground level.
The top shall be provided with a 40 mm x 20 mm reducer
to fix watering funnel with mesh on top.
The 2 mtr length of pipe below the inspection chamber
shall be surrounded by 15 cms alternate layers of
charcoal and salt
Earth lead shall be provided for pipe electrode and shall
be terminated using a through GI bolt, nuts, check nuts,
spring washers etc. at the top of pipe electrode
3.2.4 Masonry Shall have earth test link and watering funnel
Chamber for 400 mm x 400 mm x 400 mm deep masonry inspection
pipe and earth chamber
electrode Lockable 10 mm thick cast iron hinged cover plate with
frame
The hinged cover marked on top with identifier.
3.3 EARTH MATS
3.3.1 Separate Earth Separate earth conductors of appropriate size shall be
Conductors provided for.
Electrical Network
UPS system earth bus
Computer system earth bus
Telephone system earth bus
3.3.2 Earth Mats Shall be constructed as per IEEE 80-2000, IS 3043:1987
and NBC with Copper /Aluminium /GI for horizontal and
vertical conductors as per BOQ and drawing
Brazed / welded joints shall be coated with bituminous
compound
Shall be constructed to achieve maximum resistance to
earth as per par 3.8
3.3.3 Masonry 450 mm x 450 mm x 450 mm deep
chamber Shall have joint plate of earth mat riser as per drawing
3.4 CHEMICAL EARTHING
Suitable for any type of soil conditions
Shall be constructed with Chemical component and
copper /SS/GI electrodes to achieve maximum
resistance as per para 3.8
Shall not require any maintenance after commissioning
and shall have a minimum life of 50 years
3.5 EARTHING CONDUCTOR
3.5.1 Main Earth Lead Minimum depth 300 mm below ground
From earth Minimum depth.600 mm below road crossings/ pavements
electrode Earth lead..routed through GI pipe of adequate size.
inspection GI / copper wire15 mm dia class B GI pipe.

chamber to mainGI pipe.. Provided with a coat of bituminous paint
switchboard on the outside for minimizing corrosion or wrapped with
bituminous jute wrapping.
3.5.2 Secondary Secondary conductors shall be interconnected to form the
conductors earthing network throughout the installation and shall cover
Main earthing conductors from the main switchboards to
all other switchboards
Sub-mains earthing conductors from switchboard to the
sub distribution boards and to final distribution boards.
Loop earthing conductors from the sub/final distribution
boards to any point on the internal wiring system.
Final point earthing within internal wiring to all light
fixtures, fans, convenience outlets etc.
Cable armouring shall be earthed at the ends adjacent to
switchboards which they connect
Use a permanent fittings (like a screwed down plastic
label at copper label at the connection point that is clearly
marked with the words EARTHING LEAD DO NOT
DISCONNECT
3.5.3 Equipotential All earth electrodes shall be interconnected with GI strip
grid enclosed in GI pipe laid directly in the ground to ensure
equipotential within the entire earthing network.
3.5.4 Galvanizing Galvanizing of Earth Electrodes and Earthing Conductors
shall conform to class IV of IS 4736 : 1986.
3.6 INSTALLATION AND JOINTING OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS
3.6.1 General Earthing conductor routings shall minimize jointing of the
specifications conductors in between terminations.
All exposed joints shall be provided with 2 coats of anti
corrosive paint.
If the connection is on a painted surface, the paint shall
be thoroughly removed and the metal exposed for making
effective electrical contact.
3.6.2 Copper Strip conductors shall be secured to building walls etc.
conductors with appropriate size of saddles
Spacing not exceeding 900 mm.
Saddle shall be gun metal for copper
Jointing of strips
Copper. butt welding /brazing
or the mating surfaces shall be tinned, riveted and
soldered.
Jointing of wires by means of lugs of appropriate size

connected by bolts, nuts, checknuts and washers. For
Copper wires Lugs and bolts shall be of brass
GI Conductors GI Strip conductors shall be secured to building walls
etc. with appropriate size of saddles
Spacing not exceeding 900 mm.
Saddle shall be made from GI
Jointing of GI strips with

GI bolts, nuts, checknuts
and spring washers of appropriate size.
Jointing of wires by means of lugs of appropriate size

connected by bolts, nuts, checknuts and washers. For
GI wires..Lugs and bolts shall be of brass /
COPPER

3.7 Prohibited Sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas, water, or
Connections inflammable liquid shall not be used as a means of earthing
an installation or even as a link in an earthing system.
3.8 Resistance to Ohmic resistances as measured by an approved earth
Earth testing apparatus shall be as follows
Earth electrode maximum ohmic resistance 1 ohms

Earth electrode in rocky soil ohmic resistance max 3
ohms.
Electrical resistance between earth connection at the
main switchboard and any other point on the completed
installation shall not exceed 1 ohm.
3.9 Site Testing
3.9.1 Testing Of Earth The earth continuity conductor including metal conduits and
Continuity Path metallic envelopes of cable in all cases shall be tested for
electric continuity.
The electrical resistance of the same alongwith the earthing
lead but excluding any added resistance of earth leakage
circuit breaker measured from the connection with the
earth electrode to any point in the earth continuity
conductor in the completed installation shall not exceed
one ohm.
3.9.2 Earth Resistivity Earth resistivity test shall be carried out in accordance with IS
Test Code of Practice for earthing IS 3043.

Annexure-l
STANDARDS AND CODES
66 KV GRADE CABELS
1 Cross linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic IS : 7098 Part-3

sheathed cables - specification. Part-3 for working
voltages from 66 kV upto and including 220 kV
2 Conductors of insulated cables I EC 60228
3 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for I EC 60502
rated voltages from 1 kV to 30 kV
4 Power cables with extruded insulation and their I EC 60840
accessories for rated voltages above 30 kV (Um = 36
kV) upto 150 kV (Um = 170 kV) - Test methods for
requirements
5 Electric cables calculation of current rating I EC 60287
6 Tests on electric cables under fire conditions I EC 60332
WIRING
1 660/1100 V grade PVC insulated / cables for IS 694 : 1990

working voltage upto and including 1100 volts
2 MS conduits for electrical installation - General IS 9537 : Part I 1980
requirements
3 MS conduits for electrical installation Rigid steel IS 9537 : Part II 1981
conduit
4 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical IS 3837 : 1976
wiring
5 Fittings for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring IS 2667 : 1988
6 Flexible (pliable) nonmetallic conduit IS 9537 (P-5) : 2000
7 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring IS 3480 : 1966
8 Rigid nonmetallic conduit for electrical installations IS 2509 : 1973
fittings for rigid non metallic conduit IS 3419 : 1988
9 Interlocking switch socket outlets IS 4160 : 1967
10 Switch socket outlets IS 4615 : 1968
11 3 pin plugs and socket outlets upto 250 volts rated IS 1293 : 1988
current upto 16 amps
12 Conductors for insulated electric cable and flexible IS 8130 : 1984
conduit
13 General and safety requirements for luminaries IS 1913 Part-I : 1978
Tubular fluorescent lamp
14 Switches for domestic and similar purposes IS 3854 : 1997
15 Danger notice plates IS 2551 : 1982
16 Code of practice for electrical installation fire IS 1646 : 1997
safety of buildings
17 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations IS 732 : 1989
18 General requirements for enclosures for IS 14772 : 2000
accessories for house hold and similar fixed
electrical installations
19 Guide for marking insulated conductor IS 5578 : 1985
20 Guide for uniform system of measuring and IS 11353 : 1985
identification of conductors and apparatus
terminals

21 General and safety requirements for fans and IS 12155 : 1987
regulators for house hold and similar purposes
22 Guide for safety procedure and practices in IS 5216 Part-I : 1982
electrical works : General
23 Recommendation on safety procedure and IS 5216 Part-II : 1982
practices in electrical works life saving
technique
LT SWITCHBOARDS
1 Specification for low voltage switchgear

switchgear and controlgear
General Rules IS 13947 Part-1 : 1993
Circuit breaker IS 13947 Part-2 : 1993
Switches, disconnectors, switch IS 13947 Part-3 : 1993
disconnectors and fuese combination units
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear
Specification - Control circuit devices and
switching elements
Electro mechanical control circuit devices IS 13947 Part-5 : Sec-1 : 2004
Proximity switches IS 13947 Part-5 : Sec-2 : 2004
2 Guide for uniform system of marking and IS 113553 : 1985
identification of conductors and apparatus
terminals
Electrical relays for power system protection
General introduction and list of parts IS 3231 Part-0 : 1986
General requirement
Contact performance IS 3231 Part-1 : Sec-1 : 1986
Insulation tests IS 3231 Part-1 : Sec-2 : 1986
High frequency disturbance test for static IS 3231 Part-1 : Sec-3 : 1986
relay
Requirements for principal families
All or nothing relays IS 3231 Part-2 : Sec-1 : 1987
General requirement for measuring relay IS 3231 Part-2 : Sec-2 : 1987
General requirements for thermal relay IS 3231 Part-2 : Sec-3 : 1987
Requirements for particular group or relays : IS 3231 Part-3 : Sec-3 : 1987
Biased (percentage) differential relay
Requirements for particular group or relays : IS 3231 Part-4 : Sec-3 : 1987
Directional relays and power relays
3 Specification for low voltage switchgear and

controlegear assemblies :
Requirements for type tested and partially IS 8623 : Part 1 : 1993
type tested assemblies
Particular requirements for busbar trunking IS 8623 : Part 2 : 1993
system (busway)
Particular requirements for equipment where IS 8623 : Part 3 : 1993
unskilled person have access for their use
4 Code of practice for selection, installation, and
maintenance of switchgear and control gear
General IS 10118 Part-1 : 1982
Selection IS 10118 Part-2 : 1982
Installation IS 10118 Part-3 : 1982
5 General requirement for switchgear and control IS 4237 : 1982
gear for voltage not exceeding 1000 volt AC or
1200 volt DC

LIST OF STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL STANDARDS
INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES
1S-5 : 2004 Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels
IS-335 Insulating Oil for Transformers and Switchgear
IS-617 Aluminium and Aluminium alloy & Ingots and Castings for General
Engineering Purposes
IS-1448 Methods of Test for Petroleum and its Products.
IS-2071 Measuring Devices
1S-2165 Phase-to-Phase Insulation Co-ordination, Principles and Rules
IS-2362 Determination of Water by the Kar Fisher - Test Method
IS-3043 Codes of practice for earning
IS-3202 Code of Practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment
IS-3637 Gas Operated Relays
IS-6103 Methods of Test for specific resistance (Resistivity) of Electrical

Insulating Liquids
1S-6104 Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil against Water by the
Ring Method.
IS-6262 Method of Test for Power Factor and Dielectric Constant of Electrical Insulating
Liquids
IS-6792 Method for Determination of Electric Strength of Insulating Oils.
IS-8263 Method for Radio interference Tests on High Voltage Insulators
IEG-60214 On-Load Tap-Changers
IEC-60289 P-6 Reactors
IEC-60354 P-7 Loading Guide for Oil Immersed power transformers
ANSJ-C57.12.80 Genera! Requirements for Distribution, _Power and Regulating

Transformers. , :
ANSI-C57,12, 90 Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation Transformers. ANSI-
C57, ANSI-C57.21 Requirements Terminology and Test Code for Shunt Reactors
Rates over 500 KVA.
ANSI-C57, 92 Guide for loading Oil-Immersed Power Transformer upto and

Including 100 MVA with 55C or 65C Winding Rise
ANSI-CG, IEEE-4 Standard Techniques for high Voltage Testing

NEMA-TR-1 Transformers, Regulators and Reactors
IS-4379 Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-62271 High Voltage Alternating Current Circuit Breakers IS 13118
IEC-60427 Synthetic Testing of high voltage alternating current circuit Breakers
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING CAPACITOR

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IS-2705 Current Transformers
IS-3156 Voltage Transformers
IS-9348 Coupling capacitor and capacitor divider
IS-11322 Method for partial discharge measurement in instrument transformers
IEC-11322 Instrument Transformers measurement of Partial discharges
IEC-60481 Requirements for instrument transformers
ANSI-C93 1 Requirements for power line 'carrier coupling capacitor
BUSHING
IS-2099 Bushing for alternating Voltages above 1000V
IEC-600137 insulated Bushings for Alternating voltages above 1000V
SURGE ARRESTERS
IS-3070 Lightning arrestors for alternating current systems: Metal (part-3) oxide
lightning arresters without gaps.
I EC 60099-4 Metal oxide urge arresters without gaps
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS
IS 1248 Direct acting indicating anaogne electrical measuring instruments

their accessories.
IS-1248 Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments and their
Accessories - Specification
IS-3231 (PO-3) Electrical relays for power system protection.
IEC-60068.2.2 Basic environmental testing procedures Part 2: Test B: Dry heat
lEC-60529 Degree of Protection provided by enclosures
IEC-60158 Low Voltage control gear, contractors
IEC-61439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
ANSI-C37.20.1 Standard for metal enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear

ANS1-C37.50 Test Procedures for low voltage alternating current power circuit
Breakers
ANS1-C39 Electric Measuring instrument,
ANS1-C83 Components for electric equipment
IS:8623 Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
LT SWITCHGEAR
IS:8623 Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies
IS:4237 General requirements for switchgear and control gear for ves not
exceeding 1000 Voltage AC or 1200 Voltage AC.
IS-12063 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures of electrical

equipment
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection.
!S;1248 Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments and their
Accessories - Specification
IS.9792 Guide for testing, calibration and maintenance of ac electricity meter
IS:4794 Push-button switches: Part 1 General requirements and tests

Push button switches: Part 2 Push button switches, Type 1
IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel
IS:5082 Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium alloys for electrical purposes.
DISCONNECTING SWITCHES
IEC-129 Alternating Current Dis-connectors (Isolators) and Earthing switches
1S-9921 Specification for Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing

Switches for Voltages Above 1 000 V - Part -1 and II
IEC-60265 High voltage switches
ANSI-C37.32 High voltage switches, Bus supports and accessories schedules of preferred
rating, construction Guidelines and Specification
ANSI-C37.34 Test code for high voltage air switches NEMA-SG6 Power switching equipment.
PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
IEC-60051 Recommendations for Direct acting indicating analogue electrical

measuring instruments and their accessories.
IEC-60255 Measuring Relays and Protection Equipment
IEC-60297 Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6mm (19 inches) series.
IEC-359 Expression of the performance of electrical & electronic measuring equipment.

IEC-387 Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters

IEC-447 Man machine interface/ MM-Alternating principles
IEC-521 Class 0.5,1 and 2 alternating current wall hour meters
IEC-547 Modular plug-in unit and standard 19-inch rack mounting unit based on NIM
standard (for electronic nuclear instruments)
ANSI-81 Screw threads.
ANSI-B18 Bolts and Nuts '

ANSI-C37.1 Relays, Station controls etc.
ANSI-C37.2 Manual and automatic station control, supervisory and associated telemetering
equipment.
ANSI-C37.2 Relays and relay system associated with electric power apparatus.
ANSI-C39.1 Requirements for electrical analog indicating instruments.
BATTERY CHARGERS
IS:3895 Mono-Crystaline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells and stacks
IS:4540 Mono-crystailine semiconductor rectifier assemblies and equipment
IS:6619 Safety code for semiconductor rectifier equipment
IS:2026 Power Transformer
IIS:1248 Indicating Instruments
1S:12063 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures of electrical

equipment
1S:6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and steel.
IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:3842 Electrical relay for AC systems,
IS:5 Colors for ready mix paints and Enamels.
BATTERY
IS: 1651 Stationary cells and batteries, lead-acid type (with tubular positive plates)
1S:1652 Stationary Cell and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Plant Positive
Plates).
1S:1146 Rubber and plastic containers for Lead-Acid Storage Batteries
IS:6071 Synthetic separators for lead-acid batteries
IS:266 Specification for Sulphuric Acid.

IS: 1069 Quality Tolerances for Water for Storage Batteries - Specification
IS:3116 Sealing Compound for Lead-acid Batteries (Bitumen Based) Specification
IS: 1248 Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring Instruments and their
Accessories Specification
WIRE AND CABLES
IS-694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including 1100
Volts.
IS-1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables

upto and including 33 kV rating.
IS-1554 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (part 1) for working
voltage upto and including 1100 V Part (2) for working voltage from 3.3 upto
including 11 kV.
IS-3961 Recommended current rating for cables.
IS-3975 Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables
IS-5831 PVC insulated and sheath of electric cables
IS-6380 Elastomeric insulating and sheath of electric cables.
IS-7098 Cross linked polythylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for

working voltage upto and including 1100 volts.
IS-8130 Conductors for insulated electrical cables and-flexible cords
IS-10418 Specification for drums for electrical cables
IEC-96 Radio Frequency cables
IEC-183 Guide to the selection of High Voltage Cables,
IS-5608 Specification for Low-Frequency Cables and Wires with PVC Insulation and
PVC Sheath
IEC-227 Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated voltages upto and

including 4507750 V.
IEC-228 Conductors of insulated cables.
IEC-230 Implulse tests on cables and their accessories.
IEC-287 Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load

factor).
IEC-304 Standard colors for insulation for low frequency cables and wires.
IEC-331 Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cabies.iEC-332
IEC-332 Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC-502 Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cable for rates voltages
from 1 kV upto 30 kV.

IEC-754 Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables.
NEMA-WC1 Asbestos and asbestos-varnished cloth and asbestos-

thermoplastic insulated wire and cable
NEMA-WC2 Steel armour and associated covering for impregnated paper

insulated cables
NEMA-WC3 Rubber insulated wire and cable for transmission and distribution of
electrical energy.
NEMA-WC5 Thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electric energy.
NEMA-WC7 Cross linked thermo setting polyethylene insulated wire and cable
for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
NEMA-WC8 Ethylene-propylene-rubber insulated wire and cable for the

transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
IS-806 Steel tubes for structural purposes

IS-1172 Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation
iS-1199 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
IS-1566 Hard-dawn steel wire fabricated concrete reinforcement
IS-1742 Building drainage
IS-1785 Plain hard-drawn .steel wire for pre stressed concrete
IS-1786 High strength deformed and wires for concrete reinforcement
IS-1811 Method of sampling Foundry sands.
IS-1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
IS-2062 Steel for general structural purposes
IS-2065 Code of practice for water supply in buildings
IS-2090 High tension steel bars used in pre stressed concrete
IS-2140 Standard galvanised steel wire for fencing
IS-2470 Code of practice for installation of septic tanks
IS-2514 Concrete vibrating tables
IS-2645 Integral cement waterproofing compounds
IS-3025 Method of sampling and test physical chemical for water waste
water,
IS-4091 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for

transmission line tower and poles
IS-4111 Code of practice for ancillary structure in sewerage system
IS-4990 Plywood for concrete shuttering work
IS-5600 Sewage and drainage pimps

SF6 Gas Insulated 72.5 kV Switchgear Technical Specs

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SF6 Gas Insulated 72.5 kV Switchgear Technical Specs

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SF6 GAS INSULATED 72.5 KV SWITCHGEAR

Section 1 - General ........................................................................................................................... 12

Section 2 - Particular requirements for SF6 Metal clad Equipment .................................................... 13

Section 3 - Particular Requirements for Primary Electrical Equipment .............................................. 17

Section 4 - Particular Requirements for Secondary Equipment ......................................................... 23

Section 5 - Inspection and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 26

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 11

1.2. Extent of main contract work

1.3 Standards and Ratings

In particular the switchgear current rating as specified in the schedules corresponds to an

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 12

2.1 Design concept of SF6 GIS

2.2 Type Tests

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 13

2.4 Support Insulators and Section Barriers

2.5 Gas Seals

2.6 SF6 Gas Density and Pressure

2.7 SF6 Gas Purity

2.8 Gas Monitoring Devices

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 14

2.9 SF6 Gas Treatment

2.10 Metal clothing

2.11 Expansion Joints and Flexible Connections

Expansion joints, flexible connections and adjustable mountings shall be provided to

2.12 Finish of interior surface and clearing

The equipment shall be manufactured and assembled at me manufacturer's works under

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 15

2.13 Supply of SF6 Gas

2.14 Gas Filling and Evacuating Apparatus

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 16

3.1 Circuit breakers

The breaker are to be restirke free

3.1.2 Auto re closing

3.1.3 Closing devices

3.1.4 Tripping Devices

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 17

An emergency hand tripping (mechanical) device shall be provided in the operating

3.1.5 Anti pumping

3.1.6 Operating Mechanisms

(a) Start pump motor,

3.1.7 Auxiliary Switches

3.1.8 Indicating Devices

Devices shall be provided to clearly indicate whether a circuit-breaker is open or closed.

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 18

3.2 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches

3.2.2 Operating Mechanisms

(a) Hand operation

(b) Spring operation

(c) Electric motor operation

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 19

3.2.4 Auxiliary Switches

3.3 Current transformer

3.3.2 Position of Current Transformers and Cores, Ratios and Characteristics

3.3.3 Rating and diagram plates

3.3.4 Secondary Thermals and earthing

3.4 Voltage transformers

3.4.2 Ratio and Characteristics

66 kV GIS Substation Page - 20

3.4.4 Secondary terminals, earthing and fuses

Bushings shall generally be in accordance with the requirements of IEC

3.5.2 Insulation Levels and creepage Distances